(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

Choices 




LYCOMING COLLEGE 




1 he mission of Lycoming College is to provide a 
distinguished baccalaureate education in the liberal 
arts. This is achieved within a coeducational, 
supportive, residential setting through programs that 
develop communication and critical thinking skills; 
foster self -awareness while increasing receptivity to 
new concepts and perspectives; explore literary and 
scientific traditions; cultivate an aesthetic sensibility; 
elicit social responsibility; promote racial inclusive- 
ness, gender equality, and an appreciation of cultural 
diversity; and produce leadership for the institutions of 
society. Each student is encouraged to develop and 
strengthen virtues and traits of character that enable, 
ennoble, and emancipate the human spirit while 
deepening commitment to those values that undergird 
civilization. 



Contents 



Academic Calendar, 1991-1992 2 



Welcome to Lycoming 4 



The Academic Program 



The Curriculum 36 



Student Services 137 



Admission 140 



Financial Matters 144 



The Campus 154 



Directory 157 



Administrative Staff/Faculty 159 



The Alumni Association 173 



Index 175 



The general regulations and policies stated in 
this catalog are in effect for the 1991-1992 
academic year. Students beginning their first 
term at Lycoming College in the fall of 1991 
or the spring of 1992 are thereafter governed 
by the policies stated in this catalog. Re- 
quirements governing a student's major are 
those in effect at the time a major is formally 
declared and officially accepted by the major 
department. 

If changes are made in subsequent editions of 
the catalog to either general requirements or 
major requirements, students may be permit- 
ted the option of following their original 
program or a subsequent catalog version, but 
the College always reserves the right to 
determine which requirements apply. 

If a student interrupts his or her education 
without a leave of absence, the catalog 
requirements in effect at the time of 
readmission will apply. Students on an 
approved leave of absence retain the same 
requirements they had when they entered, if 
their leaves do not extend beyond one year. 

Lycoming College reserves the right to 
amend or change the policies and procedures 
stated in this catalog without prior notice to 
those who may be affected by them. The 
provisions of this publication are not to be 
regarded as an irrevocable contract between 
the applicant and/or the student and 
Lycoming College. 



/ 



▲ 



Academic Calendar 
1991 - 1992 





Fall Semester 


Spring Semester 


Bills are due 


August 12 


December 13 


Orientation of new faculty 


August 22 




Residence halls open 8 a.m. for freshmen 


August 23 




Residence halls open 8 a.m. for upperclassman 


August 25 


January 5 


Faculty available for advising 


August 26 




Classes begin first period 


August 27 


January 6 


Processing of drop/add begins 


August 27 


January 6 


Re-registration fee of $25 applies 
after this date 


September 2 


January 10 


Last day for drop/add 


September 2 


January 10 


Last day to elect audit and pass/fail grades 


September 2 


January 10 


Last day for submission of final grades for 
courses for which Incomplete grades were 
recorded in Spring, May, and Summer terms 


October 7 




Last day for submission of final grades 
for courses for which Incomplete 
grades were recorded in fall semester 




February 14 


Mid- semester deficiency reports due 
in Registrar's Office at noon 


October 14 


February 21 


Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for 
spring recess 




February 28 


Residence halls open at 8 a.m. 




March 8 


Classes resume first period after 
spring recess 




March 9 


Preregistration for students who have 
completed at least one semester 


November 5, 6, 7 




Preregistration for sophomores and juniors 




March 25 - 26 



A 





Fall Semester 


Spring Semester 


Preregistration for freshmen 


November 13, 14, 15 


April 1 -2 


Last day to withdraw from courses 


November 18 


April 3 


Residence halls close at 9:00 p.m. for 
Thanksgiving recess 


November 26 




Residence halls open at 8 a.m. 


December 1 




Classes resume first period after 
Thanksgiving 


December 2 




Final examinations begin 


December 9 


April 20 


Semester ends at 5:00 p.m. 


December 13 


April 24 


Residence halls close at 9:00 p.m. 


December 13 


April 24 




May term 


Summer term 


Residence halls open at 8 a.m. 


May 3 


May 31 


Classes begin 


May 4 


June 1 


Last day for drop/add 


May 5 


June 3 


Last day to elect audit and pass/fail grades 


May 5 


June 3 


Last day to withdraw from course 


May 22 


June 26 


Term ends 


May 29 


July 10 


Residence halls close at 4:00 p.m. 


May 29 


July 10 



Special dates to remember: 

Freshman Seminar August 23, 24, 25 

Freshman Convocation August 23 

All College Carnival August 31 

Labor Day (classes in session). . September 2 

Long Weekend 

(classes suspended) October 4, 5, 6 

Homecoming Weekend. . October 11, 12, 13 

Admissions Open House September 28 

Parents Weekend November 1 , 2, 3 

Admissions Open House October 26 



Thanksgiving 

recess November 26 - December 1 

Spring recess February 28 - March 8 

Honors Convocation April 5 

Good Friday 

(afternoon classes suspended) April 17 

Baccalaureate May 2 

Commencement May 3 

Memorial Day (no classes) May 25 

Independence Day (no classes) July 3 



A 



Welcome To 
Lycoming College 




l^ycoming College is an independent, 
coeducational institution dedicated to provid- 
ing the type of learning that can be used for a 
lifetime - the liberal arts and sciences. 

Lycoming's principal aim is to help 
students develop a central core of integrated 
values, skill, information, and strategies 
while they learn to communicate, reason, 
make decisions, understand, and use their 
imagination. This type of education can lead 
to productive and fulfilling lives in many 
fields while encouraging optimum personal 
growth and development. 

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts degrees 
in 31 major fields, a bachelor of fine arts 
degree in sculpture , and a bachelor of 



science degree in nursing. Because it is built 
upon the two principles of the liberal arts 
known as distribution and concentration, 
students study in breadth and depth through- 
out a challenging curriculum. 

Students who have special interests not 
met entirely by a major field can design their 
own majors. Or, if they are interested in 
teaching, medicine, law, dentistry, or the 
ministry, they can take courses needed to 
enter their advanced study. 

Students also can study engineering, 
forestry or environmental studies, podiatric 
medicine, optometry, medical technology, 
and sculpture through cooperative programs 
operated by Lycoming with other colleges 
and universities. Or, they can study abroad 
or in Philadelphia, PA., Washington, D.C., or 
New York City through other off-campus 
study opportunities. 

Most students complete their program of 
study in four years, usually by taking four 
courses each fall and spring semester. 
Students can take one course during Lycom- 
ing's May term, or two courses during the 
summer term as well. 

Recognizing students' concerns about 
careers, Lycoming offers extensive counsel- 
ing through the Career Development Center 
and advisory committees for prelaw, the 
health professions, and premedical students. 
The College also operates a diverse intern- 
ship program which allows students to earn 
academic credit while working at area 
businesses, government offices, and nonprofit 
organizations. 

Lycoming's ratio of students to faculty is 
14 to one, which means that most classes are 
small and there is abundant opportunity for 



A 



individual attention. All faculty members 
teach. More than 80 percent of Lycoming's 
faculty hold the highest degree in their fields 
from the nation's outstanding colleges and 
universities. Lycoming has been recognized 
nationally for the quaUty and commitment of 
its teaching faculty. 

Nineteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
main campus. Modem facilities include 
eight residence halls; the library; the Aca- 
demic Center, which houses the Arena 
Theatre, planetarium, computer center, and 
art gallery; the student union; the physical 
education/recreation center, including a six- 
lane, 25 yard pool; a completely renovated 
fine arts center with excellent facilities to 
accommodate sculpture, painting, drawing, 
printmaking, ceramics and photography; 
and a music building, which houses individ- 
ual practice rooms and an electronic-music 
studio. 

Opened in 1990, the Heim Biology and 
Chemistry Building is one of the finest 
undergraduate science facilities in the East. 
The three-level structure totals more than 
63,000 square feet and contains state-of-the- 
art biology and chemistry laboratories, 
lecture and seminar rooms, reading and 
research areas and a greenhouse, as well as 
classrooms and faculty offices. 

Lycoming houses approximately 900 of 
its 1 ,275 students in the residence halls, 
which include double and single rooms. 
Most students find the campus friendly and 
comfortable, with all of the buildings easy to 
reach from anywhere on campus. Lycoming 
has a diverse student body. Most students 
call Pennsylvania, New Jersey, or New York 
their home. The college expects students to 
work together in an atmosphere of respect 
and tolerance. 

The College offers a variety of extracur- 
ricular activities. Recent Artist Series events 
have included the Broadway Musicals Into 
the Woods and Big River. The Pilobolus 
Dance Theatre, The Northeastern Philhar- 
monic, Intimate P.D.Q. Bach, and The New 




York City Opera National Company have all 
performed recently at the college. Admission 
to all Artist Series events is free for Lycom- 
ing students. Student government groups 
help to plan activities and social events. 
Recent major campus concerts have included 
REO Speedwagon, Richard Marx, and Robert 
Palmer. Numerous clubs, honor societies, 
social fraternities and sororities, the student 
newspaper, yearbook and literary magazine, 
and the band and widely acclaimed choir 
meet other student interests. Students who 
like to perform or compete can act on the 
Arena Theatre stage or play on intercollegiate 
or intramural sports teams. Intercollegiate 
teams for men include football, soccer, 
basketball, wrestling, tennis, golf, swimming, 
track and field, and cross country. Intercolle- 
giate teams for women include basketball, 
tennis, field hockey, swimming, track and 
field, cross country, and softball. 

In addition, students who like hiking, 
backpacking, skiing, camping, fishing, hunt- 
ing, kayaking, spelunking, and other outdoor 
sports will find Lycoming's location ideal. 



A 



Lycoming is situated on a slight promi- 
nence near downtown Williamsport, a small 
city nestled along the West Branch of the 
Susquehanna River in northcentral Pennsyl- 
vania's rolling hills and valleys. The College 
is within a four-hour drive of metropohtan 
centers such as New York City, 
Philadelphia, Pittsburgh, Washington, D.C., 
Baltimore, Syracuse, Rochester and the New 
Jersey shore points. The Williamsport metro 
area is home to about 75,000 persons. 

Lycoming enjoys a relationship with The 
United Methodist Church. It supports the 
Methodist tradition of providing an education 
for persons of all faiths. 

Fully accredited, Lycoming is a member 
of the Middle States Association of Colleges 
and Schools, and the University Senate of 
The United Methodist Church. It is a 
member of the Association of American 
Colleges, the Pennsylvania Association of 
Colleges and Universities, the Commission 
for Independent Colleges and Universities, 
the National Commission on Accrediting, and 



the National Association of Schools and 
Colleges of The United Methodist Church. 

History 

Lycoming College was founded in 
1812 as the Williamsport Academy, an ele- 
mentary and secondary school. Thirty- six 
years later, the academy became the Wil- 
liamsport Dickinson Seminary under the 
patronage of The Methodist Episcopal 
Church. The seminary operated as a private 
boarding school until 1929, when a college 
curriculum was added and it became the 
Williamsport Dickinson Seminary and Junior 
College. In 1947, the junior college became 
a four-year degree-granting college of 
liberal arts and sciences. It adopted the 
name Lycoming, derived from the Indian 
word "lacomic," meaning "Great Stream." 
The word Lycoming has been common 
to northcentral Pennsylvania since 
colonial days. 




Academic 
Program 

The Bachelor Of 
Arts Degree 

L/ycoming is committed to the principle 
that a liberal arts education is the best hope 
for an enlightened citizenry. Consequently, 
the bachelor of arts degree is conferred upon 
the student who has completed an educa- 
tional program incorporating the two prin- 
ciples of the liberal arts known as distribution 
and concentration. The objective of the 
distribution principle is to insure that the 
student achieves breadth in learning through 
the study of the major dimensions of human 
inquiry: the humanities, the social sciences, 
and the natural sciences. The objective of the 
concentration principle is to provide depth of 
learning through completion of a program of 
study in a given discipline or subject area 
known as the major. 

Requirements For The 
Bachelor Of Arts Degree 

rLvery degree candidate is expected to 
complete the following requirements in order 
to qualify for graduation: 

• complete the distribution program. 

t complete Writing Across the Curriculum 
Program requirements. 

• complete a major consisting of at least 
eight courses while achieving a minimum 
grade point average of 2.0 in those courses. 

• earn one year of credit in physical educa- 
tion. Athletic training courses may count 
towards this requirement All students 
must demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may be 




granted by the College physician after an 
examination and review of the student's 
medical history and family physician's 
report.) 

• pass a minimum of 32 units (128 semester 
hours) with a minimum cumulative average 
of 2.0. Additional credits beyond 128 
semester hours may be completed pro- 
vided the minimum 2.0 cumulative average 
is maintained. 

• complete in residence the final eight 
courses offered for the degree at Lycoming. 

• satisfy all financial obligations incurred at 
the College. 

• complete the above requirements within 
seven years of continuous enrollment 
following the date of matriculation. 

All exemptions or waivers of specific 
requirements are made by the Committee on 
Academic Standards. 



A 



The Bachelor Of 
Fine Arts Degree 

1 he bachelor of fine arts degree is spe- 
cifically designed to train professional artists. 
The BFA in sculpture is a synthesis of three 
diverse forms of education: a studio art 
program that emphasizes the skills and 
concepts of the visual language, an appren- 
ticeship that takes technical expertise as the 
departure point, and the scholastic method 
employed in both art history and the general- 
education component. 

Requirements For 
The Bachelor Of Fine 
Arts Degree 

li/very BFA degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements in 
order to qualify for graduation: 

• complete the 12-course Art Department 
course of study, while achieving a mini- 
mum grade point average of 2.0 in 
these courses. 

• complete the distribution program. 

• complete Writing Across the Curriculum 
Program requirements. 

• pass a minimum of 32 units (128 semester 
hours) with a minimum cumulative average 
of 2.0 in these courses. 

• complete one of the field specialization 
apprenticeships at the Johnson Atelier 
Technical Institute of Sculpture. 

• earn one year of credit in physical educa- 
tion. Athletic training courses may count 
towards this requirement All students 
must demonstrate comj)etence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may be grant- 
ed by the College physician after an exami- 
nation and review of the student's medi- 
cal history and family physician's report.) 
complete in residence the final eight 

• courses offered for the degree at 
Lycoming. 



• satisfy all financial obligations incurred at 
the College. 

• have a public exhibition of original art 
work and make an oral defense. 

The Bachelor Of Science 
In Nursing Degree 

1 he program of study leading to the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree is 
designed to prepare men and women as 
beginning practitioners of professional 
nursing, qualified for first-level positions in a 
variety of health settings and for graduate 
study in nursing. Upon satisfactory comple- 
tion of the program, a graduate is eligible to 
write the State Board of Nursing examination 
for licensure as a registered nurse. The goal 
of the program is to develop a liberally 
educated and self-directed individual who is 
prepared to contribute to the welfare of the 
nation through the practice of professional 
nursing which supports the promotion and 
restoration of health of individuals and 
families in a variety of settings. 

Requirements For The 
Bachelor Of Science In 
Nursing Degree 

rLvery BSN degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements in 
order to qualify for graduation: 

• complete the 13 -course major with a 
minimum cumulative average of 2.0, in- 
cluding the required May term following 
the junior year. 

« complete the distribution requirements for 
the BSN degree. 

• complete Writing Across the Curriculum 
Program requirements. 

• complete a minimum of 32 units (128 
semester hours) with a minimum cumula- 
tive average of 2.0. 

• earn one year of credit in physical educa- 
tion. Athletic training courses may count 



A 



towards this requirement. All students 
must demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physician after an 
examination and review of the student's 
medical history and family physician's 
report.) 

• complete in residence the final eight 
courses offered for the degree at 
Lycoming. 

• satisfy all financial obligations incurred at 
the College. 

• complete the degree requirements within a 
five-year period after admission to the 
nursing major. Candidates who are unable 
to meet this requirement must petition for 
an extension. 

Writing Across The 
Curriculum Program 

I. Purpose 

The Lycoming College Writing Across 
the Curriculum Program has been developed 
in response to the conviction that writing skill 
promotes intellectual growth and is a hall- 
mark of the educated person. The program 
has therefore been designed to achieve two 
major, interrelated objectives: 

(1) to enhance student learning in general 
and subject mastery in particular, and 

(2) to develop students' abilities to com- 
municate clearly. In this program students 
are given opportunities to write in a variety 
of contexts and in a substantial number of 
courses, in which they receive faculty 
guidance and reinforcement 

II. Program Requirements 

In order to graduate from Lycoming all 
students must complete the following writing 
requirements: 

A. English 049 (Developmental Reading 
and Writing) or exemption from the course. 

B. English 106 (Composition) and one 
other English course. 

C. A writing component in all distribution 
courses completed at Lycoming. 



D. Two courses designated as writing- 
intensive, or "W" courses. 

(1) Successful completion of English 106 
is a prerequisite for enrollment in writ- 
ing-intensive courses. 

(2) All courses designated "W" are 
numbered 2(X) or above. 

(3) Each student must complete one "W" 
course from among those offered by the 
major department, or, with department 
approval, from a related department. 
The other "W" course completed must 
be from a department other than the 
major department. In the case of 
students with multiple majors, one "W" 
course must be completed from one of 
those majors. The second course may be 
taken in one of the student's other 
majors. 

(4) Students should take one "W" course 
during the sophomore year and one 
during the junior year - though other 
sequences are possible and may in 
certain circumstances be advisable. 

(5) A writing intensive course may not 
duplicate a course taken to satisfy II. B. 

The Distribution Program 

A course can be used to satisfy only one 
distribution requirement. Courses for which 
a grade of "P" is recorded may not be used 
toward the fulfillment of the distribution 
requirements, (Refer to page 16 & 17 for an 
explanation of the grading system.) A course 
in any of the following distribution require- 
ments refers to a full-unit (four semester 
hours) course taken at Lycoming, any 
appropriate combination of fractional unit 
courses taken at Lycoming which accumulate 
to four semester hours, or any single course 
of three or more semester hours transferred 
from another institution. For the BSN 
degree, see special modified distribution re- 
quirements on page 11. 



A 



English - Students are required to demon- 
strate competence in basic writing skills and 
to pass English 106 and one other unit of 
English. Competence in basic writing skills 
may be demonstrated either by exemption 
from English 049 through placement in 
English 106 or by earning a Pass in English 
049. The placement test in English is 
designed for placement purposes only and 
may not be used to exempt a student from re- 
peating English 049 should the student earn a 
Fail in the course. A student must demon- 
strate this competence before being permitted 
to enroll in English 106. Unless impossible 
because of failure to complete English 049, 
English 106 MUST be taken during the 
freshman year; English 106 or consent of 
instructor is required before enrolling in any 
other English course. Students may choose 
any course from the department's offerings to 
satisfy the requirement for another unit in 
English. 

Foreign Language or Mathematics - Stu- 
dents are required to meet a minimum basic 
requirement in either a foreign language or 
the mathematical sciences. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGE - Students may 
choose from among French, German, or 
Spanish and are required to pass two courses 
on the intermediate or higher course level. 
Placement at the appropriate course level will 
be determined by the faculty of the Depart- 
ment of Foreign Languages and Literatures. 
Students who have completed two or more 
years of a given language in high school are 
not admitted for credit to the elementary 
course in the same foreign language except 
by written permission of the chairman of the 
department. 

MATHEMATICS - Students are required to 
demonstrate competence in basic algebra and 
to pass three units of Mathematical science 
other than Mathematics 005. Competence in 
basic algebra may be demonstrated either by 
passing the basic algebra section of the 



Mathematics Placement Examination or by 
passing Mathematics 005. By demonstrating 
higher competence on the Mathematics 
Placement Examination, students may reduce 
the requirement to two units of mathematical 
science. No more than one unit may be taken 
in computer science. 

The Mathematics Placement Examination 
may be scheduled a maximum of three times, 
only one of which may be after matriculation. 
A retest fee of $25 will be charged for each 
private test administration. 

Religion or Philosophy - Students are 
required to pass two courses in either religion 
or philosophy. Any two religion courses may 
be used to fulfill the philosophy/religion 
distribution requirement, with this exception: 
only one course from the combination 
Religion 120-121 may be selected for 
distribution. 

Fine Arts - Students are required to pass two 
courses as indicated in art, literature, music, 
or theatre. 

ART - Any two courses. 

LITERATURE - Any two literature courses 
selected from the offerings of the Depart- 
ments of English and Foreign Languages and 
Literatures (French, German or Spanish). 

MUSIC - Any combination of eight (8) 
credits, including applied music, ensemble, 
and music department courses. 

THEATRE - The fine arts distribution 
requirement may be satisfied by selecting any 
two of the following courses: Theatre 100, 
110, 140, 148, 332, 333, or other courses 
with the consent of the instructor. 

Natural Science - Students are required to 
pass any two courses as indicated in one of 
the following disciplines: astronomy and 
physics, except Astr 114 and 115; biology; or 
chemistry. 



A 



History and Social Science - Students are re- 
quired to pass two courses as indicated in 
economics, history, political science, psy- 
chology or sociology/anthropology. 

ECONOMICS. Any two courses. 

HISTORY. Any two courses, except 
History 222. 

POUTICAL SCIENCE. Any two courses. 

PSYCHOLOGY. Psychology 110 and one 
other course, except Psychology 101. 

SOCIOLOGY I ANTHROPOLOGY. Sociol- 
ogy/Anthropology 110 plus another course. 



The Distribution Program 
For The BSN Degree 

English - Same as A.B. degree. 

Mathematical Sciences - competence in 
basic algebra as demonstrated by completion 
of, or exemption from Math 005; Mathemat- 
ics 103; and Computer Science 108, 125, or 
Mathematics 214. 

Religion and Philosophy - Religion 120 and 
Philosophy 219. 

Fine Arts/Foreign Language - two courses 
from one department as follows: 

ART - Any two courses. 

LITERATURE - Any two literature coiu"ses 
selected from the deparmients of English and 
Foreign Languages and Literatures. 

MUSIC - Any combination of eight (8) 
credits, including applied music, ensemble, 
and music department courses. 

THEATRE. - Any two courses from among 
Theatre 100, 1 10, 140,148, 332, 333, or other 
courses with the consent of the instructor. 

LANGUAGE - Any two courses at the 
intermediate or higher level. No student who 



has had two or more years of a given foreign 
language in high school shall be admitted to 
the elementary courses in that same language 
for credit, except by written permission of the 
chairman of the department. 

Natural Science - Chemistry 108, 115. 

Social Science - Psychology 1 10 and 1 17; 
Sociology and Anthropology — one from 
among Soc 1 10, 1 14, 220, 222, 224, 227, 
228,229, 331, 334 and 335. 



The Major 

»Students are required to complete a 
series of courses in one departmental or inter- 
disciplinary (established or individual) major. 
Specific course requirements for each major 
offered by the College are listed in the 
curriculum section of this catalog. Students 
must earn a 2.0 or higher grade-point average 
in those courses stipulated as comprising the 
major. Students must declare a major by the 
beginning of their junior year. Departmental 
and established interdisciplinary majors are 
declared in the Office of the Registrar, where 
as individual interdisciplinary majors must be 
approved by the Committee on Curriculum 
Development. Students may complete more 
than one major, each of which will be 
recorded on the transcript. Students may be 
removed from major status if they are not 
making satisfactory progress in the major. 
This action is taken by the Dean of the 
College upon the recommendation of the 
department, coordinating committee (for 
established interdisciplinary majors), or 
Curriculum Development Committee (for 
individual interdisciplinary majors). The 
decision of the Dean of the College may be 
appealed to the Academic Standards Com- 
mittee by the student involved or the recom- 
mending department or committee. 



A 



Departmental Majors - Departmental 
majors are available in the following areas: 
Accounting 
Art History 
Art Studio 
Astronomy 
Biology 

Business Administration 
Chemistry 
Computer Science 
Economics 
English 

Foreign Languages, and Literatures 
French, German, Spanish 
History 

Mass Communication 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 
Religion 

Sociology/ Anthropology 
Theatre 

Established Interdisciplinary Majors - The 

following established interdisciplinary majors 
include course work in two or more depart- 
ments: 

Accounting-Mathematical Sciences 

American Studies 

Criminal Justice 

International Studies 

Literature 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

Individual Interdisciplinary Majors - Stu- 
dents may design a major that is unique to 
their needs and objectives and which com- 
bines course work in more than one depart- 
ment. This major is developed in consulta- 
tion with the student's faculty advisor and 
with a panel of faculty members from each of 
the sponsoring departments. The application 
is acted upon by the Curriculum Develop- 



ment Committee. The major normally 
consists of 10 courses beyond those taken to 
satisfy the distribution requirements. Stu- 
dents are expected to complete at least six 
courses at the junior or senior level. Ex- 
amples of individual interdisciplinary majors 
are Racial and Cultural Minorities, Illustra- 
tion in the Print Medium, Environmental 
Law, Advertising, Art/Business, Human 
Behavior and Images of Man. 

Major in Sculpture Leading to 
Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree - Through a 
cooperative program with the Johnson Atelier 
Technical Institute of Sculpture, Mercerville, 
New Jersey, students may earn a BFA degree 
in sculpture. The major consists of a core 
academic program, a course of study in art, 
elective courses, and an apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier. 

The Minor 

1 he College awards two kinds of minors, 
departmental and interdisciplinary, in 
recognition of concentrated course work 
in an area other than the student's major. 
All minors are subject to the following 
limitations: 

• a minor must include at least two courses 
which are not counted in the student's 
major, 

• a student may receive at most two minors. 

• students with two majors may receive only 
one minor; students with three majors may 
not receive a minor. 

• students may not receive a minor in their 
major discipline unless their major disci- 
pline is Art and the minor is Art History. 
(A discipline is any course of study in 
which a student can major. Tracks within 
majors are not separate disciplines.) 



A 




• a student may not receive a minor unless 
his average in the courses which count for 
his minor is a minimum of 2.00. 

• courses taken P/F may not be counted 
toward a minor. 

Students must declare their intention to 
minor by signing a form available in the 
Registrar's Office, obtaining required faculty 
signatures, and returning the completed form 
to the Office of the Registrar. 
When students complete a minor, the title 
will be indicated on their official transcript. 
Students must meet the requirements for the 
minor which are in effect at the time they 
declare a minor or which are in effect 
subsequent to that time before they graduate. 

Departmental Minors - Requirements for a 
departmental minor vary from department to 
department. Students interested in pursuing a 
departmental minor should consult that 
department for its policy regarding minors. 



Departmental minors are available in the 

following areas: 

ACCOUNTING 

Financial Accounting 

Managerial Accounting 

Federal Income Tax 
ART 

Art History 

Commercial Design 

Painting 

Photography 

Sculpture 
ASTRONOMY 
BIOLOGY 
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Marketing 

Finance 
CHEMISTRY 
ECONOMICS 
ENGLISH 

Literature 

Writing 
FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

French 

German 

Spanish 
HISTORY 

American History 

European History 

History 
MASS COMMUNICATION 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Computer Science 

Mathematics 
PHILOSOPHY 

Philosophy 

Philosophy and Law 

Philosophy and Science 

The History of Philosophy 
PHYSICS 
POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Political Science 

Foreign Affairs 

Legal Studies 
PSYCHOLOGY 
RELIGION 



A 



SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY 
THEATRE 

Theatre History & Literature 

Performance 

Technical Theatre 

Interdisciplinary Minors - Interdisciplinary 
minors include course work in two or more 
departments. Students interested in interdis- 
ciplinary minors should consult the faculty 
coordinator of that minor. Interdisciplinary 
minors are available in the following areas: 
BIBLICAL LANGUAGES, CRIMINAL 
JUSTICE, MASS COMMUNICATION, and 
WOMEN'S STUDIES. 

Academic Advisement 

One advantage of a small college is 
the direct, personal contact between a 
student and the College faculty who care 
about that student's personal, academic, 
and professional aspirations. The student 
can draw upon their years of experience 
to resolve questions about social adjust- 
ment, workload, study skills, tutoring and 
more. Perhaps the member of the faculty 
with the most impact on a student is the 
academic advisor. 

The freshman advisor, whom the 
student meets at summer orientation, 
assists with course selection by providing 
accurate information about requirements 
and programs and with personal adjust- 
ment by helping the student discover life 
and career goals. In addition, the advisor 
will refer students to other campus 
resources whenever the need is apparent. 

During the sophomore year, the 
student will choose a major and select an 
advisor from the major department. The 
new advisor, while serving as a resource, 
can best advise that student about course 
selection and career opportunities. 



A 



Advisors at Lycoming endeavor to 
contribute to our students' development 
in yet another way. We insist that 
students assume full responsibility for 
their decisions and academic progress. 
By doing so, we help to prepare them for 
the harder choices and responsibilities of 
the professional world. 
Also, Lycoming provides special 
advising programs for careers in medi- 
cine, law and religion. Interested students 
should register with the appropriate 
advisory committee immediately after 
deciding to enter one of these professions. 

Preparation for Educational 
Professions - Lycoming College believes 
that the liberal arts provide the best 
preparation for future teachers, thus all 
education students complete a liberal arts 
major in addition to the Lycoming 
College Teacher Education Certificate re- 
quirements. Students can be certified in 
elementary education or one or more of 
the following secondary areas: art (K-12), 
biology, chemistry, English, French, 
general science (with biology or astron- 
omy/physics tracks), German, mathemat- 
ics, music (K-12), physics, social studies, 
and Spanish. All teacher-education 
programs are approved by the Pennsylva- 
nia Department of Education. Pennsylva- 
nia certificates are recognized in most 
other states either through reciprocal 
agreements or by transcript evaluation. 

Preparation for Health Professions - 

The program of pre-professional educa- 
tion for the health professions (allopathic, 
dental, osteopathic, podiatric and veteri- 
nary medicine, optometry, and pharmacy) 
is organized around a sound foundation in 
biology, chemistry, mathematics, and 
physics and a wide range of subject matter 



from the humanities, social sciences, and fine 
arts. At least three years of undergraduate 
study is recommended before entry into a 
professional school; the normal procedure is 
to complete the bachelor of arts degree. 

Students interested in one of the health 
professions or in an allied health career 
should make their intentions known to the 
admissions office when applying and to the 
Health Professions Advisory Committee 
(HPAC) during their first semester. This 
committee advises students concerning 
preparation for and application to health- 
professions schools. All pre-health profes- 
sions students are invited to join the student 
Pre-Health Professions Association. (See 
also descriptions of the nursing program 
and of the cooperative programs in 
podiatric medicine, optometry, and medical 
technology.) 

Preparation for Legal Professions - 

Lycoming offers a strong preparation for 
students interested in law as a profession. 
Admission to law school is not predicated 
upon a particular major or area of study; 
rather, a student is encouraged to design a 
course of study (traditional or interdiscipli- 
nary major) which is of personal interest and 
significance. While no specific major is rec- 
ommended, there are certain skills of particu- 
lar relevance to the pre-law student: clear 
writing, analytical thinking, and reading 
comprehension. These skills should be 
developed during the undergraduate years. 

Pre-law students should register with the 
Legal Professions Advisory Committee 
(LPAC) upon entering Lycoming and should 
join the Pre-Law Society on campus. LPAC 
assists the pre-law student through advise- 
ment, compilation of recommendations, and 
dissemination of information and materials 
about law and the legal profession. The Pre- 
Law Society has sponsored films, speakers, 
and field trips, including visits to law 
school campuses. 



Preparation for Theological Professions - 

The Theological Professions Advisory 
Committee (TPAC) acts as a "center" for 
students, faculty, and clergy to discuss the 
needs of students who want to prepare them- 
selves for the ministry, religious education, 
advanced training in religion, or related 
vocations. Also, it may help coordinate 
internships for students who desire practical 
experience in the parish ministry or related 
areas. Upon entering Lycoming, students 
should register with TPAC if they plan to 
investigate the religious vocations. 

In general, students preparing to attend a 
theological seminary should examine the 
suggestions set down by the Association of 
Theological Schools (available from TPAC). 
Recommended is a broad program in the 
liberal arts, a major in one of the humanities 
(English, history, languages, literature, 
philosophy, religion) or one of the social 
sciences (American studies, criminal justice, 
economics, international studies, political 
science, psychology, sociology-anthropol- 
ogy), and a variety of electives. Students 
preparing for a career in religious education 
should major in religion and elect five or six 
courses in psychology, education and 
sociology. This program of study will 
qualify students to work as an educational 
assistant or a director of religious education 
after graduate study in a theological 
seminary. 

Registration 

LIuring the registration period, students 
select their courses for the next semester and 
register their course selections in the Office 
of the Registrar. Course selection is made in 
consultation with the student's faculty 
advisor in order to insure that the course 
schedule is consistent with College require- 
ments and student goals. After the registra- 
tion period, any change in the student's 
course schedule must be approved by both 
the faculty advisor and Office of the 



A 



Registrar. Students may not receive credit 
for courses in which they are not formally 
registered. 

During the first five days of classes, 
students may drop any course without any 
record of such enrollment appearing on 
the permanent record, and they may add any 
course that is not closed. Students wishing to 
drop a course between the fifth day and the 
12th week of classes must secure a with- 
drawal form from the Office of the Registrar. 
Withdrawal grades are not computed in the 
grade point average. Students may not 
withdraw from courses after the 12th week of 
a semester and the comparable period during 
the May and summer terms. 

In two-credit (1/2 unit) courses meeting 
only during the last half of any semester, 
students may drop/add for a period of five 
days, effective with the mid-term date shown 
on the academic calendar. Withdrawal from 
half-semester courses with a withdrawal 
grade may occur within six weeks of the 
beginning of the course. It is understood that 
the period of time at the beginning of the 
semester will be identical, for example, a 
period of five days as indicated above. 

The Unit Course System 

Instruction at Lycoming College is 
organized, with few exceptions, on a depart- 
mental basis, most courses are unit 
courses, meaning that each course taken is 
considered to be equivalent to four semester 
hours of credit. Exceptions occur in applied 
music and theatre practicum courses, which 
are offered for either one-half or one semes- 
ter hour of credit, and in departments that 
have elected to offer certain courses for the 
equivalent of one, two or three semester 
hours of credit. Further, independent studies 
and internships carrying two semester hours 
of credit may be designed. The normal 
student course load is four courses during the 
fall and spring semesters. Students who elect 
to attend the special sessions may enroll in 







/' JH|B ^ "^&'Wi|W 


^■p _-*"'*' ^ ^..-rf«*" 


jg^^S^, 


1 f^^^^^ \^,^,^...^-n^'^^^ 


^^ , "* ■ "^ 


"^^^^^ 




m^ ' 



one course during the May term and one or 
two courses in the summer term. A student is 
considered full time when enrolled for a 
minimum of three courses during the fall or 
spring semesters, one course for the May 
term, and two courses for the summer term. 
Students may enroll in five courses during 
the fall and spring semesters if they are 
Lycoming scholars or were admitted to the 
Dean's List at the end of the previous 
semester. Exceptions may be granted by the 
Dean of the College. Overloads are not 
permitted during the May and summer terms. 

The System of Grading and 
Reporting of Grades 

1 he evaluation of student performance 
in credit courses is indicated by the use of 
traditional letter symbols. These symbols 
and their definitions are as follows: 
A EXCELLENT - Signifies superior 



A 



achievement through mastery of content or 
skills and demonstration of creative and 
independent thinking. 

B GOOD - Signifies better-than-average 
achievement wherein the student reveals 
insight and understanding. 

C SATISFACTORY - Signifies satisfactory 
achievement wherein the student's work has 
been of average quality and quantity. The 
student has demonstrated basic competence 
in the subject area and may enroll in addi- 
tional course work. 

D PASSING - Signifies unsatisfactory 
achievement wherein the student met only 
the minimum requirements for passing the 
course and should not continue in the subject 
area without departmental advice. 

F FAILING — Signifies that the student has 
not met the minimum requirements for 
passing the course. 

I INCOMPLETE WORK — Assigned in 
accordance with the restrictions of estab- 
lished academic policy. 

R A REPEATED COURSE — Students shall 
have the option of repeating courses for 
which they already have received a passing 
grade in addition to those which they have 
failed. Credit is received only once for the 
course. The most recent course grade will 
count toward the G.P.A. 

P PASSING WORK, NO GRADE AS- 
SIGNED — Converted from traditional grade 
of A through D. 

X AUDIT — Work as an auditor for which 
no credit is earned. 

W WITHDRAWAL — Signifies withdrawal 
from the course from the sixth day through 
the twelfth week of the semester. 

The cumulative grade point average 
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying quality 
points by credits and dividing the total 
quality points by the total credits. A quality 
point is the unit of measurement of the 
quality of work done by the student. 





Quality Points 


radc 


Earned for each 




semester hour 


A 


4.00 


A- 


3.67 


B+ 


3.33 


B 


3.00 


B- 


2.67 


C+ 


2.33 


C 


2.00 


C- 


1.67 


D+ 


1.33 


D 


1.00 


D- 


0.67 


F 


0.00 



The grade point for the major is calculated 
in the same manner for the courses required 
for the major. 

A minimum of 2.00 is required for the 
cumulative grade point average in the major 
to meet the requirements for graduation. 
The cumulative GPA is not determined by 
averaging semester GPA's. 

Use of the pass/fail grading option is 
limited as follows (this does not apply to 
English 049): 

• students may enroll on a P/F basis in no 
more that one course per semester and no 
more than four courses during the under- 
graduate career. 

• P/F courses completed after declaration of 
the major may not be used to satisfy a 
requirement of that major, including 
courses required by the major department 
which are offered by other departments. 
(Instructor-designated courses are excepted 
from this limitation.) 

• courses for which a grade of P is recorded 
may not be used toward fulfillment of any 
distribution requirement. 



A 



• students may not enroll in English 106 on a 
P/F basis. 

• a course selected on a P/F basis which is 
subsequently withdrawn will not count 
toward the four-course limit. 

• instructor-designated courses may be 
offered during the May term with the 
approval of the Dean of the College. Such 
courses are not counted toward the four- 
course limit. 

• P grades are not computed in the grade 
point average. 

• students electing the P/F option may 
designate a minimum acceptance letter 
grade from A to B-. If the student earns 
the designated grade or better, the grade 
will be recorded in the permanent record 
and computed in the grade point average. 
If a student selects P/F (with no designated 
minimum acceptance grade) and earns a 
grade of A to D-, a P will be recorded in 
the permanent record but not computed in 
the grade point average. In all cases, if a 
student earns a grade of F this grade will be 
recorded in the permanent record and 
computed in the student's grade point 
average. 

• students must declare the P/F option before 
the end of the period during which courses 
may be added during any given 
semester, half-semester, or term. 

• instructors are not notified which of their 
students are enrolled on an P/F basis. 

• students electing the P/F option are 
expected to perform the same work as 
those enrolled on a regular basis. 

Incomplete grades may be given if, for 
absolutely unavoidable reasons (usually 
medical in nature), the student has not been 
able to complete the work requisite to the 
course. An incomplete grade must be 
removed within six weeks of the next regular 
semester. 

Students shall have the option of repeating 
courses for which they already have received 
a passing grade in addition to those which 



they have failed. Recording of grades for all 
repeated courses shall be governed by the 
following conditions: 

• a course may be repeated only one time. 

• both attempts will be recorded on the 
student's transcript. 

• credit for the course will be given only 
once. 

• the most recent grade will count toward the 
GPA with this exception: A "W" grade 
cannot replace another grade. 

• a repeated course will be counted toward 
the total number of unsuccessful attempts. 

Attendance 

1 he academic program at Lycoming is 
based upon the assumption that there is value 
in class attendance for all students. Individ- 
ual instructors have the prerogative of 
establishing reasonable absence regulations 
in any course. The student is responsible for 
learning and observing these regulations. 

Student Records 

1 he policy regarding student educational 
records is designed to protect the privacy of 
students against unwarranted instructions and 
is consistent with Section 43B of the General 
Education Provision Act (commonly known 
as the Family Educational Rights and Privacy 
Act of 1974, as amended). The details of the 
College policy on student records and the 
procedures for gaining access to student 
records are contained in the current issue of 
Student Handbook, which is available in the 
library and the Office of the Dean of Student 
Services. 



A 



Academic Levels 

1 he following table is used to determine 
the academic grade level of degree candi- 
dates. See page 145 for related Financial Aid 
information. 

Year Semester Number of Semester 
Hours Earned 

Freshman 1 Less than 12 

2 At least 12 but less than 24 

Sophomore 1 At least 24 but less than 40 

2 At least 40 but less than 56 

Junior 1 At least 56 but less than 76 

2 At least 76 but less than 96 

Senior 1 At least 96 but less than 112 

2 More than 112 

Academic Standing And 
Academic Honesty 

•Students will be placed on academic 
probation if either the number of hours 
completed or cumulative grade point average 
falls below the following standards: 



Semester Cumulative 



Hours 



(FuU-Time) 


GPA 


Completed 


1 


1.70 


12 


2 


1.80 


24 


3 


1.90 


40 


4 


2.00 


56 


5 


2.00 


72 


6 


2.00 


88 


7 


2.00 


104 


8 


2.00 


120 



In order to meet graduation requirements, 
students must complete 128 credit hours. 
Students who are enrolled part time or for 
fewer than the normal four courses per term 
will be expected to complete an equivalent 
proportion of their program each semester. 

Students will be subject to suspension from 
the College if they: 

• are on probation for two consecutive 
semesters; 



• achieve a grade point average of 1.00 or 
below during any one semester. 

Students will be subject to dismissal 
from the College if they: 

• cannot reasonably complete all require- 
ments for a degree; 

• exceed 24 semester hours of unsuccessful 
course attempts (grades of F, W, and R) 
except in the case of withdrawal for 
medical or psychological reasons. 

The integrity of the academic process of 
the College requires honesty in all phases 
of the instructional program. The College 
assumes that students are committed to the 
principle of academic honesty. Students who 
fail to honor this commitment are subject to 
dismissal. Procedural guidelines and rules 
for the adjudication of cases of academic 
dishonesty are printed in The Faculty 
Handbook and The Pathfinder (the student 
academic handbook), copies of which are 
available in the library. 

Transfer Credit 

Lxollege students who wish to study at 
other campuses must obtain prior written 
approval to do so from their advisor and 
the Lycoming College registrar. Coursework 
counting toward a major or minor must be 
approved in advance by the chairperson of 
the department in which the major or minor 
is offered. Once a course is approved, the 
credit and grades for the course will transfer 
to Lycoming and be calculated in the 
student's grade point average as if the 
com^ses were taken here. This means that 
"D" and "F" grades will transfer as well as all 
other grades. In addition, students are 
expected to be registered at Lycoming for 
their last eight courses. Requests for waivers 
of this regulation must be sent to the Com- 
mittee on Academic Standards. Final deter- 
mination of transfer credit will be made by 
the Lycoming College registrar based on 
official transcripts only. 



A 



Credit By Examination 

Advanced Placement - Entering freshmen 
who have completed an advanced course 
while in secondary school and who have 
taken the appropriate advanced-placement 
examination of the College Entrance Exami- 
nation Board (CEEB) are encouraged to 
apply for credit and advanced placement at 
the time of admission. A grade of three or 
above is considered satisfactory. Students 
should inform the Registrar's Office and their 
academic advisor immediately when ad- 
vanced placement examinations have 
been taken. 

College Level Examination Progam 

(CLEP) - Students may earn college credit 
for superior achievement through CLEP. By 
achieving at the 75th percentile or above on 
the General Examinations and the 65th 
percentile or above on approved Subject 
Examinations, students may earn up to 50 
percent of the course requirements for a 
bachelor of arts degree. Although these ex- 
aminations may be taken after enrollment, 
new students who are competent in a given 
area are encouraged to take the examination 
of their choice during the second semester of 
their senior year so that Lycoming will have 
the test scores available for registration 
advisement for the first semester of enroll- 
ment. Further information about CLEP may 
be obtained through the secondary-school 
guidance office or the Office of Admissions 
or the Registrar at Lycoming College. 
Students should inform the Registrar's Office 
and their academic advisors immediately 
when CLEP examinations have been taken. 

Academic Honors 

Dean's List — Students are admitted to the 
Dean's List at the end of the fall and spring 
semesters if they have completed at least 15 
credits with other than P or R grades, and 
have a minimum grade point average of 3.50 
for the semester. 



Graduation Honors — Students are awarded 
the bachelor of arts degree, the bachelor of 
fine arts degree, or the bachelor of science in 
nursing degree with honors when they have 
earned the following grade point averages 
based on all courses attempted at Lycoming, 
with a minimum of 64 credits (16 units) 
required for a student to be eligible for 
honors: 

summa cum laude 3.90-4.00 

magna cum laude 3.50-3.89 

cum laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, and 
Societies - Superior academic achievement is 
recognized through the conferring of awards 
and prizes at the annual Honors Convocation 
and Commencement and through election to 
membership in honor societies. 

SOCIETIES 

Biology Beta Beta Beta 

Freshmen Men Blue Key 

Freshmen Women Gold Key 

Economics Omicron Delta Epsilon 

English Sigma Tau Delta 

Foreign Language Phi Sigma Iota 

General Academic Phi Kappa Phi 

History Phi Alpha Theta 

Niu-sing Sigma Theta Tau 

(Lambda Nu) 

Philosophy Phi Sigma Tau 

Physics Sigma Pi Sigma 

Political Science Pi Sigma Alpha 

Psychology Psi Chi 

Social Science Pi Gamma Mu 

Theatre Alpha Psi Omega 

(Omega Chi) 

Prizes And Awards 

AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY 
AWARD - The award, sponsored by the 
Susquehanna Valley Chapter of the society, 
is given to the outstanding senior in chemis- 
try who plans to enter the profession. 



Mik. 



ACCOUNTING SOCIETY SERVICE 
AWARD - The award is given for outstanding 
service to the Lycoming College Accounting 
Society. 

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF CHEMISTS 
PRIZE - The prize, given by the Philadelphia 
section of the institute, goes to a senior major 
for excellence in chemistry. 

ARENA THEATRE AWARDS - 
Performance - This award is given to the 
senior who has demonstrated outstanding 
ability in theatre performance. 
Technical Theatre - This award is given to 
the senior who has demonstrated outstanding 
ability in technical theatre. 

WILUAM T. AND RUTH S. ASKEY MUSIC 
PRIZE - given to a graduating senior who is 
recognized for his/her proficiency as a music 
major. 

JACK C. BUCKLE AWARD - The award is 
given annually to a junior male student with 
high moral qualities, who has made an 
unusual contribution to campus life through 
leadership in student activities. 

BYRON C. BRUNSTETTER SCIENCE 
AWARD - The award is given for outstanding 
achievement in chemical and biological 
sciences. 

CRC PRESS CHEMISTRY ACHIEVEMENT 
AWARD - The award is given to that fresh- 
man who has exhibited the highest academic 
achievement in chemistry. 

CHIEFTAIN AWARD - The CoUege's most 
prestigious award is given to the senior who 
has contributed most to Lycoming through 
support of school activities; who has exhib- 
ited outstanding leadership qualities; who has 
worked effectively with other members of the 
College community; who has evidenced a 



good moral code; and whose academic rank 
is above the median for the preceding senior 
class. 

CIVIC CHOIR AWARD - The award is given 
to the College choir member who has 
outstanding musical ability and who has 
made significant leadership contributions to 
the choir. 

CLASS OF 1907 PRIZE - The prize is given 
to the senior who has been outstanding in the 
promotion of College spirit through participa- 
tion in athletics and other activities. 

BENJAMIN C. CONNER PRIZE - The prize 
is given to the graduating student who has 
done outstanding work in mathematics. 

BIOLOGY SERVICE AWARD - student who 
has shown good academic work and has 
fostered the ideals of the department by 
willingness to become involved in the 
activities of the department. 

FRESHMAN BIOLOGY AWARD - freshman 
who has obtained the highest overall average 
in Biology 110-111 (major biology lecture 
and laboratory). 

DURKHEIM AWARD - The award is given to 
the senior sociology/anthropology major who 
has done outstanding work in the field. 

BISHOP WILUAM PERRY EVELAND 
PRIZE -The prize is given to the senior who 
has shown progress in scholarship, loyalty, 
school spirit, and participation in school 
activities. 

EXCELLENCE IN TWO-DIMENSIONAL 
ART AWARD - The award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this field. 



A 



EXCELLENCE IN THREE-DIMENSIONAL 
ART AWARD - The award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this field. 

EXCELLENCE IN POUTICAL SCIENCE 
AWARD - The award goes to the senior 
political science major who has performed 
with excellence. 

W. ARTHUR FAUS MEMORIAL PRIZE - 
Prize given in memory of Dr. W. Arthur 
Faus, a former Professor of Philosophy at Ly- 
coming College, to the graduating senior who 
has done outstanding work in philosophy. 

J.W. FEREE AWARD - Given in memory of 
the first mathematics professor at Lycom- 
ing's forerunner, the Dickinson Seminary, the 
award goes to the student most active in 
mathematical sciences. 

FACULTY PRIZE - The prize is given to the 
commuting student with satisfactory scholar- 
ship and who has been outstanding in 
promotion of school spirit through participa- 
tion in school activities. 

DURANT L. FUREY III MEMORIAL 
PRIZE - The prize is given to the senior 
accounting major who has shown outstanding 
achievement in accounting. 

GILLETTE FOREIGN LANGUAGE 
PRIZES - The prizes are given to the French, 
German, and Spanish majors who have 
achieved excellence in foreign languages. 

JOHN P. GRAHAM AWARD - Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus, the award is 
given to the senior English major who 
achieves the highest average in English. 

EDWARD J. GRAY PRIZES -The prizes are 
given to the graduating students with the 
highest and second highest averages. 



DAN GUSTAFSON AWARD- In memory of a 
former member of the English Department, 
the award is given to the senior English 
major whose analytical writing demonstrates 
the highest standards of literary and critical 
excellence. 

HELEN R. HOOVER COMMUNITY SERV- 
ICE PRIZE - The cash prize is given annually 
to a graduating senior who has demonstrated 
a personal commitment to serving the less 
fortunate. 

IRUSKA AWARDS - The awards denote 
membership in the society for juniors who 
are very active on campus. 

JUNIOR BOOK AWARD - The award is 
given to the outstanding junior political 
science major. 

EUSHA BENSON KUNE PRIZE - The prize 
is given to the senior mathematics major with 
outstanding achievement in the field. 

THE KRAMER AND HOFFMAN 
ASSOCIATES AWARD - for superior achieve- 
ment in Federal Income Tax. 

CHARLES J. KOCIAN AWARDS - The 
awards are given to the accounting, business 
administration, and economics majors who 
show the greatest proficiency in statistics; the 
mathematics major who shows the greatest 
proficiency in applied mathematics, the 
graduating senior who shows the greatest 
proficiency in computer science and opera- 
tions research; the graduating senior business 
administration major with the highest grade 
point average; the graduating senior with the 
highest average in the class and the graduat- 
ing nursing major with the highest grade 
point average. 



^k. 



DON UNCOLN LARRABEE LAW 
PRIZE - The prize is given to the graduating 
student who has shown outstanding scholar- 
ship in legal principles. 

THE JOHN M. UNDEMUTH ENDOWED 
PRIZE FUND - The John M. 
Lindemuth Endowed Prize Fund, established 
in 1986 by Mr. and Mrs. John M. Lindemuth 
of Williamsport, Pennsylvania, provides 
annual cash awards for varsity football 
players who earn the highest cumulative 
grade point average in their chosen field of 
academic study at Lycoming College. This 
prize is managed in compliance with current 
NCAA regulations concerning scholastic 
awards for athletes. 

C. DANIEL AND JEANNE UTTLE AWARD - 
Presented in memory of two Lycoming 
alumni, the award is given to the outstanding 
student in public administration. 

THE GERTRUDE B. MADDEN MASS 
COMMUNICATION AWARD - Established in 
1985 by the students of the Mass Communi- 
cation Society, the award is to be presented 
annually to the senior mass communication 
major who, in the judgment of his or her 
peers, has best integrated academic excel- 
lence, professional development in a mass 
media field and contribution to campus 
media. 

THE MAKISU AWARD - The award is given 
for outstanding service to the college com- 
munity, for dedication above and beyond the 
realm of one's obligations to the College. 

JOHN C. MCCUNE MEMORIAL 
PRIZES - The prizes are given to the senior 
majors in mathematics, biology, chemistry, 
physics, philosophy, and psychology who 
have attained the highest averages. 



ETHEL MCDONALD PAX CHRISTI 
AWARD - The award is given for outstanding 
but quiet consistency in the life of faith and 
the practice of Christianity, noteworthy 
personal integrity and humble loving com- 
passion expressed in daily life. 

WALTER G. MCIVER AWARD- Named after 
Lycoming's former choir director, the award 
is given to an outstanding and dedicated choir 
member who has made significant campus 
contributions outside of choir. 

DEPARTMENT OF NURSING AWARD FOR 
CUNICAL EXCELLENCE - outstanding 
achievement in the clinical setting. 

DEPARTMENT OF NURSING FACULTY 
AWARD - senior nursing major who best 
exemplifies the spirit of the profession. 

LYCOMING COLLEGE NURSING HONOR 
SOCIETY RESEARCH RECOGNITION 
AWARD- given to the nursing student who 
has demonstrated an in-depth understanding 
of the research process, as evidenced by a 
completed research project, with formal dis- 
semination of the results of the study. 

PENNSYLVANIA INSTITUTE OF 
CERTIFIED PUBUC ACCOUNTANTS 
AWARD - The award is given to the senior 
accounting major who has demonstrated high 
scholastic standing and qualities of 
leadership. 

POCAHONTAS AWARD- The award is given 
to Lycoming's outstanding female athlete. 

PSI CHI SERVICE AWARD - The award is 
given for contributions to the Psychology 
Department. 

RESEARCH AND WRITING PRIZE IN 
HISTORY -The prize is given to the student 
who does the best work in History 449. 



^ck. 



THE PROFESSOR LOGAN A. RICHMOND 
ACCOUNTING PRIZE - is awarded annually 
to a graduating senior who has done outstand- 
ing work in accounting and demonstrated 
exceptional proficiency in writing. 

THE JANET A. RODGERS ACADEMIC 
AWARD - established in honor of the found- 
ing chair of the Department of Nursing, 
provides an annual $100 award to senior 
nursing student who demonstrates excep- 
tional academic achievement and has been an 
active participant in health-related programs. 

MARYL. RUSSELL AWARD - Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus of music, the 
award is given for outstanding musical 
achievement. 

SADLER PRIZE - The prize is given to the 
student with the highest achievement in 
calculus, foundations of mathematics, 
algebra and analysis. 

NATHAN A. SCHEIE MEMORIAL MUSIC 
FUND - In memory of a friend of the 
College, the fund provides financial assis- 
tance to qualified deserving students for 
advanced training in music. 

SENIOR MANAGEMENT AWARD - The 
award is given to the senior business major 
with the best senior project in Business 
Policies 441. 

SENIOR SCHOLARSHIP PRIZE IN HIS- 
TORY -The prize is given to the senior major 
with the highest average. 

SERVICE TO LYCOMING AWARD - 
Sponsored by the Office of Student Services, 
the award is given to students who have made 
outstanding contributions to Lycoming. 

FRANCES K. SKEATH AWARD - The award 
is given to the senior with outstanding 
achievement in mathematics. 



/. MILTON SKEATH AWARD - The award is 
given for superior undergraduate achieve- 
ment and potential for further work in 
psychology. 

SOPHOMORE INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNT- 
ING AWARD - for the accounting major with 
the highest average in Intermediate Account- 
ing at the end of the spring lerm. 

JOHN A. STREETER MEMORIAL AWARD 
IN ECONOMICS - The award is given to the 
graduating student with outstanding achieve- 
ment in economics. 

JOHN A. STREETER MEMORIAL AWARD 
IN MUSIC - The award is given to the 
College band member who has outstanding 
musical ability and who has made significant 
leadership contributions to the band. 

TOMAHAWK AWARD - The award is given 
to Lycoming's outstanding male athlete. 

TRASK CHEMISTRY PRIZE - The prize is 
given to the senior chemistry major who has 
done outstanding work in the field. 

WALL STREET JOURNAL AWARDS - Two 
awards are given. One is given to the senior 
business major for excellence in the field and 
service to the College community. A second 
award is given for excellence in economics. 

WILUAMSPORT ROTARY CLUB NURSING 
PRIZE - established in 1988, this endowed 
prize provides annual interest to a registered 
nurse with the highest cumulative grade point 
average. Candidates should have success- 
fully completed a minimum of 24 academic 
credits toward the BSN degree. 

SOL "WOODY" WOLF AWARD - The award 
is given to the junior athlete who has shown 
the most improvement. 



A 



WOMEN OF LYCOMING/ADA REMLEY 
SCHOLARSHIP - The scholarship is given to 
the junior woman student who has shown 
satisfactory scholarship, outstanding school 
spirit, and who is active in campus activities. 

Departmental Honors - Honors projects are 
normally undertaken only in a student's 
major, and are available only to exceptionally 
well-qualified students who have a solid 
background in the area of the project and are 
capable of considerable self -direction. The 
prerequisites for registration in an honors 
program are as follows: 

• a faculty member from the department(s) 
in which the honors project is to be under- 
taken must agree to be the director and 
must secure departmental approval of the 
project. 

• the director, in consultation with the 
student, must convene a committee consist- 
ing of two faculty members from the 
department in which the project is to be 
undertaken, one of whom is the director of 
the project, and one faculty member from 
each of two other departments related to 
the subject matter of the study. 

• the honors committee must then certify by 
their signatures on the application that the 
project in question is academically legiti- 
mate and worthy of pursuit as an honors 
project, and that the student in question is 
qualified to pursue the project 

• the project must be approved by the Com- 
mittee on Individual Studies. 

Students successfully complete honors 
projects by satisfying the following condi- 
tions in accordance with guidelines estab- 
lished by the Committee on Individual 
Studies: 

• the student must produce a substantial 
research paper, critical study, or creative 
project. If the end product is a creative 
project, a critical paper analyzing the 
techniques and principles employed and 
the nature of the achievement represented 
in the project shall be submitted. 



• the student must successfully explain and 
defend the work in a final oral examination 
given by the honors committee. 

• the honors committee must certify that the 
student has successfully defended the 
project, and that the student's achievement 
is clearly superior to that which would 
ordinarily be required to earn a grade of 
"A" in a regular independent-studies 
course. 

• the Committee on Individual Studies must 
certify that the student has satisfied all of 
the conditions mentioned above. 

Except in unusual circumstances, honors 
projects are expected to involve independent 
study in two consecutive unit courses. 
Successful completion of the honors project 
will cause the designation of honors in that 
department to be placed upon the permanent 
record. Acceptable theses are deposited in 
the College library. In the event that the 
study is not completed successfully or is not 
deemed worthy of honors, the student shall 
be re-registered in independent studies and 
given a final grade for the course. 

Auditors — Any person may audit courses at 
Lycoming at one-fourth tuition per course. 
Laboratory and other special fees must be 
paid in full. Examinations, papers, and other 
evaluation devices are not required of 
auditors, but individual arrangements may be 
made to complete such exercises with 
consent of the instructor. The option to 
audit a course must be declared during the 
same period (currently five days) at the 
beginning of each semester, half-semester, or 
term as drop/add and pass/fail and must be 
completed in the Registrar's Office. 



Special Features 



Academic Resource Center — The Aca- 
demic Resource Center, located on the first 
floor of Rich Hall, provides a variety of free 
services to the campus community. 



A 



• Writing Center: Working one-on-one, 
Writing Tutors use questioning techniques 
to help others improve individual papers 
while developing confidence and independ- 
ence as writers. Other services include the 
Paper File, a file of graded essays main- 
tained by course; the Writing Room, a 
quiet place for writers to work; self-paced, 
computer assisted typing instruction; and 
the Documentation Style Manual for use 
when citing sources on research projects. 

• Tutoring Center: The ARC provides one- 
on-one peer tutoring in math, foreign lan- 
guages, and sciences on a walk-in basis and 
peer tutoring by arrangement in other 
subjects. Tutors assist students with home- 
work assignments and exam review. 

• Survival Skills Program: The ARC and 
volunteer faculty conduct a group of study 
skills workshops on time management, 
note-taking from lectures, reading text- 
books, successful study techniques and 
WordPerfect. 

Developmental Program - The develop- 
mental program is provided for students who 
are identified as being able to benefit from 
specialized classroom instruction in college- 
level reading, writing, study and mathematics 
skills. Students develop these skills in 
courses designed to meet their needs. 
Reading and writing are taught in a one-unit 
developmental course (English 049), and 
study skills are introduced in a complemen- 
tary laboratory workshop. Mathematics skills 
are taught in a one-half unit algebra course 
(Mathematics (X)5) which is conducted on an 
individualized basis with tutorial support. 

Freshman Seminar/Office of Assistant 
Dean for Freshmen - The Freshman Seminar 
occurs the weekend before classes begin. 
Suggested readings are sent to the freshmen 
over the summer. Students meet in small 
discussion groups with faculty and upper- 
classmen. A variety of academic and social 



activities are integrated into this weekend 
designed to facilitate the student's transition 
to college. 

The Office of Assistant Dean for Fresh- 
men develops the Seminar and works with 
the freshmen throughout the year on individ- 
ual academic needs. 

Independent Studies - Independent studies 
are available to any qualified student who 
wishes to engage in and receive academic 
credit for any academically legitimate course 
of study for which he or she could not other- 
wise receive credit. It may be pursued at any 
level (introductory, intermediate, or ad- 
vanced) and in any department, whether or 
not the student is a major in that department 
Studies projects which duplicate catalog 
courses are subject to the same provisions 
which apply to all studies projects. In order 
for a student to be registered in an independ- 
ent-study course, the following conditions 
must be satisfied: 

• an appropriate member of the faculty must 
agree to supervise the project and must 
certify by signing the application form that 
the project involves an amount of legiti- 
mate academic work appropriate for the 
amount of academic credit requested and 
that the student in question is qualified to 
pursue the project. 

• the studies project must be approved by the 
chair of the department in which the 
studies project is to be undertaken. In the 
case of catalog courses, all department 
members must approve offering the catalog 
coiu"se as an independent studies course. 

• after the project is approved by the 
instructor and the chair of the appropriate 
department, the studies project must be ap- 
proved by the Committee on Individual 
Studies. 



^L 



Participation in independent-studies 
projects, with the exception of those which 
duplicate catalog courses, is subject to the 
following: 

• students may not engage in more than one 
independent-studies project during any 
given semester, 

• students may not engage in more than two 
independent-studies projects during their 
academic careers at Lycoming College, 

As with other academic policies, any 
exceptions to these two rules must be 
approved by the Committee on Academic 
Standards. 

Internship Program - An internship is a 
course jointly sponsored by the College and a 
pubhc or private agency or subdivision of the 
College in which a student is enabled to earn 
college credit by participating in some active 
capacity as an assistant, aide, or apprentice. 
At least one-half of the effort expended by 
the intern should consist of academic work 
related to agency situations. The objectives 
of the internship program are: 

(1) to further the development of a central 
core of values, awarenesses, strategies, skills, 
and information through experiences outside 
the classroom or other campus situations, and 

(2) to facilitate the integration of theory and 
practice by encouraging students to relate 
their on-campus academic experiences more 
directly to society in general and to possible 
career and other post-baccalaiu-eate objec- 
tives in particular. 

Any junior or senior student in good 
academic standing may petition the Commit- 
tee on Individual Studies for approval to 
serve as an intern. A maximum of 16 credits 
can be earned through the internship pro- 
gram. Guidelines for program development, 
assignment of tasks and academic require- 
ments, such as exams, papers, reports, grades, 
etc., are established in consultation with a 
faculty director at Lycoming and an agency 
supervisor at the place of internship. 



Students with diverse majors have 
participated in a wide variety of internships, 
including those with NBC Television in New 
York City, the AUenwood Federal Prison 
Camp, Pennsylvania State Department of En- 
vironmental Resources, Lycoming County 
Historical Society, the American Cancer 
Society, business and accounting firms, law 
offices, hospitals, social service agencies, 
banks and Congressional offices. 

May Term - The May term is a four-week 
voluntary session designed to provide 
students with courses listed in the catalog and 
experimental and special courses that are not 
normally available during the fall and spring 
semesters and summer term. Some courses 
are offered on campus; others involve travel. 
A number offer interdisciplinary credit. 
Illustrations of the types of courses offered 
during the May term are: 

(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of Germany, 
Spain, and France; Archaeological expedi- 
tions to study tricultural communities in New 
Mexico; Utopian Communities; Revolution- 
ary and Civil War Sites; Colonial America on 
Tour; Art on the East Coast; The New 
Kingdom in Ancient Egypt. 

(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, Field 
Ornithology, Energy Economics, Writer's 
Seminar, Psychology of Group Processes, 
Collective Bargaining, Aquatic Biology, 
Medical Genetics, Energy Alternatives, 
White Collar Crime, Lasers and their 
Applications, Selected Short Story Writers 
and their Works, Popular Forms of Contem- 
porary Fiction, Administrative and Organiza- 
tional Behavior of Police, Plant and Green- 
house Management and Street Law. 

Although participation in the May term is 
voluntary, student response has been out- 
standing with approximately 20 percent of 
the student body enrolling. In addition to 
the courses themselves, attractions include 
small and informal classes and reduced 
tuition rates. 



A 



Part-Time Students — Students who do not 
wish to pursue a degree at Lycoming College 
may, if space permits, register for credit or 
audit courses on either a part-time or full- 
time basis. Students who register for one or 
two courses are considered to be enrolled 
part time; students who register for three or 
four courses are considered to be enrolled 
full time. 

Anyone wishing to register as a non- 
degree student must fill out an application 
form in the Admissions Office, pay a one- 
time application fee and pay the tuition rate 
in effect at the time of each enrollment. 
After a non-degree student has attempted four 
courses, the Dean of the College reserves the 
right to grant or deny permission to continue 
to register in this category. 

All non-degree students are subject to the 
general laws and regulations of the College 
as stated in the College Catalog and the 
Student Handbook. The College reserves the 
right to deny permission to register individu- 
als who do not meet the standards of the 
College. 

Students who wish to change from a non- 
degree to a degree status must reapply (with 
no application fee) and satisfy all conditions 
for admission and registration in effect at the 
time of application for degree status. 

Study Abroad — Students have the opportu- 
nity to study abroad under auspices of 
approved universities and agencies. While 
study abroad is particularly attractive to 
students majoring in foreign language and 
literatures, this opportunity is open to all 
students in good academic standing. Mastery 
of a foreign language is desirable but not 
required in all programs. Dr. Barbara F. 
Buedel, assistant professor of Spanish, serves 
as coordinator for the Study Abroad Program. 
Interested students may contract her about 
opportunities available and procedural 
questions. 





mm 


i 




1 

f 

J 


i^KflHjVB 


■■^ 


■ill 






^B 




1 


^■■^^^ 


X 


g 



Teacher Intern Program - The purpose of 
the teacher intern program is to provide 
individuals who have completed a baccalau- 
reate degree with the opportunity to become 
certified teachers through on-the-job training. 
Interns can earn a Lycoming College Teacher 
Education Certificate and be certified by the 
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania in elemen- 
tary education or one or more of the follow- 
ing secondary areas: art, biology chemistry, 
English, French, general science (with 
biology or astronomy/physics tracks), 
German, mathematics, music, physics, social 
studies, and Spanish. 

Interested individuals should file a formal 
application with the Education Department 
for admission to the Intern Program. Upon 
completion of the application process, interns 
receive a letter of Intern Candidacy from the 
Pennsylvania Department of Education which 
the candidate then uses to apply for a 
teaching position. Necessary professional 
coursework can be completed prior to the 
teaching experience when individuals obtain 
teaching positions. (See Education Depart- 
ment on page 70 for course listing.) 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume 
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare 
of any student engaged in or en route to or 
from any ofT-campus study or activity not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this 
institution. 



A 



Cooperative Programs 

l^y coming has developed several coop- 
erative programs to provide students with 
opportunities to extend their knowledge, 
abilities, and talents in selected areas through 
access to the specialized academic programs 
and facilities of other colleges, universities, 
academies and hospitals. Although thorough 
advisement and curricular planning are 
provided for each of the cooperative pro- 
grams, admission to Lycoming and registra- 
tion in the program of choice do not guaran- 
tee admission to the cooperating institution. 
The prerogative of admitting students to the 
cooperative aspect of the program rests with 
the cooperating institution. Students who are 
interested in a cooperative program should 
contact the coordinator during the first week 
of the first semester of their enrollment at 
Lycoming. This is necessary to plan their 
course programs in a manner that will insure 
completion of required courses according to 
the schedule stipulated for the program. All 
cooperative programs require special 
coordination of course scheduling at 
Lycoming. 

Engineering - Combining the advantages of 
a liberal-arts education and the technical 
training of an engineering curriculum, this 
program is offered in conjunction with The 
Pennsylvania State University. Students 
complete three years of study at Lycoming 
and two years at the cooperating university. 
Upon satisfactory completion of the first year 
of engineering studies, Lycoming awards the 
bachelor of arts degree. When students 
successfully complete the second year of 
engineering studies, the cooperating univer- 
sity awards the bachelor of science degree in 
engineering. 

At Lycoming, students complete the 
distribution program and courses in physics, 
mathematics, and chemistry. The Pennsylva- 
nia State University offers aerospace, agricul- 
tural, ceramic, chemical, civil, electrical. 



engineering science, industrial, mechanical, 
mining and nuclear engineering. 

Forestry or Environmental Studies - 

Lycoming College offers a cooperative 
program with Duke University in environ- 
mental management and forestry. Qualified 
students can earn the bachelor's and master's 
degrees in five years, spending three years at 
Lycoming and two years at Duke. All 
Lycoming distribution and major require- 
ments must be completed by the end of the 
junior year. At the end of the first year at 
Duke, the A.B. degree will be awarded by 
Lycoming. Duke will award the professional 
degree of Master of Forestry or Master of 
Environmental Management to qualified 
candidates at the end of the second year. 

The major program emphases at Duke are 
Forest Resource Management, Resource 
Economics and Policy, and Resource 
Ecology. 

The program is flexible enough, however, 
to accommodate a variety of individual 
designs. An undergraduate major in one of 
the natural sciences, social sciences, or 
business may provide good preparation for 
the programs at Duke, but a student with any 
undergraduate concentration will be consid- 
ered for admission. All students need at least 
two courses each in biology, mathematics, 
and economics. 

Students begin the program at Duke in 
July after their junior year at Lycoming with 
a one-month session of field work in natural 
resource management. They must complete 
a total of 48 units which generally take four 
semesters. 

Some students prefer to complete the 
bachelor's degree before undertaking 
graduate study at Duke. The master's degree 
requirements for these students are the same 
as for those students entering after the junior 
year, but the 48-unit requirement may be 



A 



reduced for completed relevant undergradu- 
ate work of satisfactory quality. All credit 
reductions are determined individually and 
consider the student's educational back- 
ground and objectives. 

Medical Technology - Students desiring a 
career in medical technology may either 
complete a bachelor of arts program followed 
by a clinical internship at any American 
Medical Association-accredited hospital, or 
they may complete the cooperative program. 
Students electing the cooperative program 
normally study for three years at Lycoming, 
during which time they complete 24 unit 
courses, including the College distribution 
requirements, a major, and requirements of 
the National Accrediting Agency for Clinical 
Laboratory Sciences (NAACLS). The 
current requirements of the NAACLS are: 
four courses in chemistry (one of which must 
be either organic or biochemistry); four 
courses in biology (including coiu-ses in 
microbiology and immunology), and one 
course in mathematics. 

Students in the cooperative program 
usually major in biology, following a 
modified major of six unit courses that 
exempts them from Ecology (Biology 224) 
and Plant Sciences (Biology 225). Students 
must take either Microbiology (Biology 221) 
or Microbiology for the Health Sciences 
(Biology 226), and either Animal Physiology 
(Biology 223) or Cell Physiology (Biology 
335). The cooperative program requires 
successful completion of a one-year intern- 
ship at an American Medical Association- 
accredited hospital. Lycoming is affiliated 
with the following accredited hospitals: 
Divine Providence, Rolling Hill, Robert 
Packer, Lancaster, and Abington. Students in 
the cooperative program receive credit at 
Lycoming for each of eight courses in 
biology and chemistry successfully com- 
pleted during the clinical internship. Suc- 



cessful completion of the Registry Examina- 
tion is not considered a graduation require- 
ment at Lycoming College. 

Students entering a clinical internship for 
one year after graduation from Lycoming 
must complete all of the requirements of the 
cooperative program, but are not eligible for 
the biology major exemptions indicated 
above. Upon graduation, such students may 
apply for admission to a clinical program at 
any hospital. 

Optometry - Through the Accelerated Op- 
tometry Education Curriculum Program, 
students interested in a career in optometry 
may qualify for admission to the Pennsylva- 
nia College of Optometry after only three 
years at Lycoming College. 

After four years at the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry a student will earn 
a Doctor of Optometry degree. Selection of 
candidates for the professional segment of the 
program is completed by the admissions 
committee of the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry during the student's third year at 
Lycoming. (This is one of two routes that 
students may choose. Any student, of course, 
may follow the regular application proce- 
dures for admission to the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry or another college of 
optometry to matriculate following comple- 
tion of his or her baccalaureate program.) 
During the three years at Lycoming College, 
the student will complete 24 unit courses, 
including all distribution requirements, and 
will prepare for his or her professional 
training by obtaining a solid foundation in bi- 
ology, chemistry, physics, and mathematics. 
During the first year of study at the Pennsyl- 
vania College of Optometry, the student will 
take 39 semester hours of basic science 
courses in addition to introductions to 
optometry and health care. Successful 
completion of the first year of professional 
training will complete the course require- 
ments for the A.B. degree at Lycoming 
College. 



iBW 



Most students will find it convenient to 
major in biology in order to satisfy the 
requirements of Lycoming College and the 
Pennsylvania College of Optometry, Such 
students are allowed to complete a modified 
biology major which will exempt them from 
two biology courses: Ecology (Biology 224) 
and Plant Sciences (Biology 225). (This 
modified major requires the successful 
completion of the initial year at the Pennsyl- 
vania College of Optometry.) Students 
desiring other majors must coordinate their 
plans with the Health Professions Advisory 
Committee in order to insure that they have 
satisfied all requirements. 

The Philadelphia Urban Semester - A full 
semester liberal arts program for professional 
development and field study is now available 
to Lycoming students. The program compo- 
nents are: field placement; City Seminar; 
evening seminars; and living and learning in 
the city. The program is open to students 
majoring in any discipline or program. The 
Philadelphia Urban Semester is sponsored 
and administered by the Great Lakes Col- 
leges Association (Albion, Antioch, Denison, 
De Pauw, Earlham, Hope, Kalamazoo, 
Kenyon, Oberlin, Ohio Wesleyan, 
Wabash, Wooster). 

Normally the above special-semester 
programs are open only to juniors. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume 
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare 
of students engaged in or en route to or from 
any off-campus studies or activities which are 
not under the exclusive jurisdiction of this 
insitution. 

Podiatry - Students interested in podiatry 
may either seek admission to a college of 
podiatric medicine upon completion of the 
bachelor of arts degree or through the Accel- 
erated Podiatric Medical Education-Curricu- 
lum Program (APMEC). The latter program 
provides an opportunity for students to 
qualify for admission to the Pennsylvania 



College of Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the 
Ohio College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM) 
after three years of study at Lycoming. At 
Lycoming, students in the APMEC program 
must successfully complete 24 unit courses, 
including the distribution requirements and a 
basic foundation in biology, chemistry, 
physics, and mathematics. During the first 
year of study at PCPM or OCPM, students 
must successfully complete a program 
of basic science courses and an introduction 
to podiatry. Successful completion of the 
first year of professional training will 
contribute toward the fulfillment of the 
course requirements for the bachelor of arts 
degree at Lycoming. 

Most students in the cooperative program 
will major in biology: if so, they will be 
allowed to complete a modified major which 
will exempt them from two biology courses: 
Ecology (Biology 224) and Plant Sciences 
(Biology 225). (This modified major 
requires the successful completion of the 
initial year at PCPM or OCPM). 

Students interested in a career in podiatric 
medicine should indicate their intentions to 
the Health Professions Advisory Committee. 

U.S. Army Reserve Officers Training 
Corps Program (R.O.T.C.) - The program 
provides an opportunity for Lycoming 
students to enroll in R.O.T.C. Lycoming 
notes enrollment in and successful comple- 
tion of the program on student transcripts. 
Military Science is a four-year program 
divided into a basic course given during the 
freshman and sophomore years and an 
advanced course given during the junior and 
senior years. Students who have not com- 
pleted the basic course may qualify for the 
advanced course by completing summer 
camp between the sophomore and junior 
years. Students enrolled in the advanced 
course receive an annual stipend of $1,000. 
One course each in written communication, 
human behavior and military history will 
fulfill the professional mihtary education 



A 



requirements. R.O.T.C. scholarship cadets 
must also complete one semester of a foreign 
language. 

Students successfully completing the 
advanced course and advanced summer 
camp between the junior and senior years 
will qualify for a commission as a Second 
Lieutenant in the United States Army upon 
graduation, and will incur a service obliga- 
tion in the active Army or Army Reserves. 
The only expense to the student for this 
program is the $75 uniform deposit, which is 
refundable, less costs. 

Sculpture - The Art Department with the 
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture in Mercerville, New Jersey, offers 
a BFA degree in sculpture. It uses a classical 
apprenticeship approach as its teaching 
method. This ancient method of teaching is 
combined at Johnson with the most modem 
and technically advanced foundry and 
fabricating techniques. 

The Art Department offers a synthesis 
program that interrelates the student experi- 
ence at both institutions. This is achieved by 
having the student rotate between Lycoming 
and the Atelier so that each form of education 
is preparation for the other. Lycoming offers 
a core academic program, a course of study 
in the Art Department, and elective course 
opportunities. Lycoming gives eight course 
units of college credit to the student for 
having successfully completed one of the ap- 
prenticeship programs at the Johnson Atelier. 

All work completed by the student at 
Lycoming by the end of the sophomore 
year will be applicable to a bachelor of arts 
degree with a major in art should the student 
decide to withdraw from the BFA program. 
If the student should withdraw from the 
cooperative program prior to completing the 
apprenticeship at the Johnson Atelier, 
Lycoming will give up to four units of credits 
or one semester's work for the internship. If, 
however, the student completes more work at 
the Atelier that the four units, that extra work 



will not be credited to the bachelor of arts 
degree; it will only be used as part of the 
bachelor of fine arts degree, and then only if 
the course at the Atelier is completed. 

This course of study is very rigorous. It 
will require that the student be involved 
almost continuously, either at Lycoming or at 
the Johnson Atelier, during the four years it 
will take to complete the degree. (See Art 
Department listing for specific program.) 

Cross Registration - A special opportunity 
exists in the Williamsport area for students to 
take courses through a registration arrange- 
ment with Pennsylvania College of Technol- 
ogy. Students may enroll for less than a full- 
time course load at Penn College while 
remaining enrolled in courses at Lycoming. 

Student Teaching Abroad - Lycoming 
College has established a cooperation 
program with Moorhead State University 
whereby teacher education students may 
do all or part of their student teaching in a 
foreign country. 

This program offers exceptional students 
the opportunity to student teach in nearly any 
country in the world. Students are placed in 
independent international schools where 
English is the instructional language. An 
effort is made to assign students in geo- 
graphical areas that will enrich their back- 
grounds, serve their special interests and 
expand their cultural horizons. 

Washington, United Nations and London 
Semester and Capitol Semester Internship 
Program - With the consent of the Depart- 
ment of PoUtical Science, selected students 
are permitted to study in Washington, D.C., 
at The American University for one semester. 
They may choose from seven different 
programs: Washington Semester, Urban 
Semester, Foreign Policy Semester, Interna- 
tional Development Semester, Economic 
Policy Semester, Science and Technology 
Semester, American Studies Semester. 



M^ 



With the consent of either the Department 
of History or Political Science, selected 
students may enroll at Drew University in 
Madison, New Jersey, in the United Nations 
Semester, which is designed to provide a 
first-hand acquaintance with the world 
organization. Students with special interests 
in world history, international relations, law, 
and politics are eligible to participate. 

The London Semester programs of Drew 
and The American Universities emphasize 
European history, politics, and culture. 
Interested students participate with the 
consent of either Departments of History or 
Political Science. 
The Capitol Semester Internship Program is 
available to eligible students on a competi- 
tive basis. The program is co-sponsored by 
Pennsylvania's Office of Administration and 
Departments of Education. Paid Internships 
are available to students in most majors. 
Interested students should contact the Career 
Development Center for additional 
information. 

The Scholar Program 

1 he Lycoming College Scholar Program 
is a special program designed to meet 
the needs and aspirations of highly motivated 
students of superior intellectual ability. The 
Lycoming Scholar satisfies the college 
distribution requirements, generally on a 
more exacting level and with more challeng- 
ing courses than the average student. 
Lycoming Scholars also paiticipate in special 
interdisciplinary seminars and in serious 
independent study culminating in a senior 
project. 

Students are admitted to the program by 
invitation of the Scholar Council, the group 
which oversees the program. The council 
consists of a Director and four other faculty 
selected by the Dean of the College, and four 
students elected by current scholars. The 
guidelines governing selection of new 
scholars are flexible: academic excellence, 



intellectual curiosity, and creativity are all 
taken into account. Students who desire to 
participate in the Scholar Program but are not 
invited may petition the Scholar Council for 
consideration. Petitioning students should 
provide the Scholar Council with letters of 
recommendation from Lycoming faculty and 
a transcript to be sent to the director of the 
Scholar Program. 

To remain in the program, students must 
maintain a cumulative average of 3.0 
or better. Students who drop below this 
average will be placed on Scholar probation 
for one semester. After one semester, they 
will be asked to leave the program if their 
GPA has not returned to 3.0 or higher. To 
graduate as a Scholar, a student must have at 
least a 3.0 cumulative average. Scholars 
must successfully complete five Lycoming 
Scholars Seminars, as well as the non- 
credit Senior Scholar Seminar in which they 
present the results of their independent 
studies. In addition, the following distribu- 
tion requirements must be met. (Slightly 
modified requirements exist for students in 
the cooperative programs; a list of these re- 
quirements can be obtained from the 
Scholar Council.) 

Scholar Distribution Requirements for 
Student in AB and BFA Programs 

A. English. Scholars must complete English 
106 and one literature course numbered 200 
or higher. The Scholar Council strongly 
recommends that qualified scholars enroll in 
the honors section of English 106 if schedul- 
ing permits. English 106 must be taken 
during the freshman year. 

B. Foreign Language/Mathematical 
Sciences. Scholars must satisfy the require- 
ment in either language or mathematical 
sciences. Language: Scholars must com- 
plete two courses numbered 1 1 1 or higher 
(excluding courses taught in English). 
Mathematical Sciences: The mathematical 
placement test determines whether a Scholar 



ISk. 




must take two or three courses for distribu- 
tion. At least one course must be selected 
from Mathematics 116, 128, 130, or 214. 
Only one computer science course may be 
used to fulfill the mathematical sciences 
requirements. 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars must 
satisfy this requirement in either of the two 
areas. Philosophy. Two courses numbered 
221 or higher. Religion: Two courses 
numbered 222 or higher. 

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy the 
requirement in one of four areas. Art: Two 
options are available in art. Either two 
courses from Art 222, 223, 331, 332, 333, 
334, 335 (Art History), OR two courses from 
Art 1 1 1 , 1 15, 220 and 225 (Studio Art). 
Music: The equivalent of two units of credit 
from Music 117, 160-169, 330 or higher. 
Theatre: Two courses from Theatre 140 or 
higher, excluding Theatre 148. Literature: 
Two literature courses from English 220 or 
higher, Foreign Languages and Literatures 
225, or French, German, or Spanish 323 or 
higher. 



E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must satisfy 
the requirements in one of three areas. 
Astronomy/Physics: Two courses numbered 
111 or higher. Biology: Two courses num- 
bered 1 10 or higher, excluding 1 14 and 1 15. 
Chemistry: Two courses numbered 1 10 or 
higher. 

F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars must 
satisfy the requirements in one of five areas. 
Economics: Two courses numbered 1 10 or 
higher. History: Two courses, one of which 
must be numbered 200 or higher. Political 
Science: Two courses numbered 1 16 or 
higher. Psychology: Two courses including 
Psychology 110 and one course numbered 
224 or higher (excluding Psychology 338). 
Sociology/Anthropology: Two courses from 
Sociology 110, 220, 224, 226, 227, 229, 300 
or higher. 

Scholar Distribution Requirements for 
Students in BSN Program 

A. English. Same as for AB and BFA 

degrees. 



A 



B. Mathematical Science. Same as for AB 
and BFA degrees. (Note that the nursing 
major requires Mathematics 103 and one 
from Computer Science 108,125 or Mathe- 
matics 214). 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Met by taking 
Philosophy 219 and Religion 120. 

D. Fine Arts/Language. Same as for AB 
and BFA scholars. 

E. Natural Sciences. Met by Biology 113, 
Biology 114, Biology 226 (required for the 
major). 

F. History/Social Science. Met by Psychol- 
ogy 110, Psychology 117, (required for the 
major) and one course in Sociology 300 or 
higher. (This sociology course may be taken 
in lieu of the introductory guided elective in 
Sociology for the BSN.) 




All Scholars Must Complete The 
Following: 

G. Physical Education. Scholars must 
satisfy the same physical education require- 
ments stipulated by the College for all 
students. 

H. Lycoming Scholar Seminars. Team 
taught interdisciplinary seminars are held 
every semester under the direction of the 
Lycoming Scholar Council. They meet for 
one hour each week (Tuesdays at noon) and 
carry one hour of credit. Grades are "A/F" 
and are based on students' performance. 
Lycoming Scholars are required to success- 
fully complete five seminars and they are 
permitted to register for as many as eight. 
Topics for each academic year will be 
selected by the Scholar Council and an- 
nounced before spring registration of the 
previous year. Students must be accepted 
into the Scholar Program before they enroll 
in a Scholar Seminar. Scholars are strongly 
urged to register for a least one seminar 
during the freshman year. 



L Senior Project. In the senior year, 
scholars must successfully complete an 
independent studies or departmental honors 
project which has been approved in advance 
by the Independent Studies Committee and 
the Scholar Council. This project must be 
presented orally as part of the Senior Scholar 
Seminar and be accepted by the Scholar 
Council. 

J. Scholars must complete a major and 32 
units, exclusive of the Senior Scholar 
Seminar. 

K. In the case of transfer students and those 
who seek to enter the program after their 
freshman year and in other cases deemed by 
the Scholar Council to involve special or 
extraordinary circumstances, the Council 
shall make adjustments to the scholar distri- 
bution requirements provided that in all cases 
such exceptions and adjustments would still 
satisfy the regular College distribution 
requirements. 



^Sl 



Curriculum 



Numbers 001-049 Developmental courses 

Numbers 100-149 Introductory courses and 

Freshman level courses 

Numbers 200-249 Intermediate courses and 

Sophomore level courses 

Numbers 300-349 Intermediate courses and 

Junior level courses 

Numbers 400-449 Advanced courses and 

Senior level courses 

Numbers N50-N59* Non-catalogue courses 

offered on a limited basis 

Numbers 160-169 Applied Music, Theatre 

Practicums and other fractional credit 

courses 

Numbers 470-479 Internships 

Numbers N80-N89* Independent Study 

Numbers 490-491 Independent Study for 

Departmental Honors 



*N = course level 1, 2, 3 or 4 as determined 
by department 

Courses not in sequence are listed 
separately, as: 

Drawing Art 111 

Color Theory Art 212 

Courses which imply a sequence are indi- 
cated with a dash between, meaning that 
the first semester must be taken prior to the 
second, as: 

Intermediate French 

French 111-112 

All students have the right of access to 
all courses. 




Accounting 

Associate Professor: Kuhns 
Assistant Professor: Wienecke (Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructors: Crossley, Uzupis, 
Weiss 

1 he purpose of the accounting major is 
to help prepare the student for a career within 
the accounting profession. The major has two 
tracks. Track I is designed for students whose 
primary interests lie in the financial area of 
public accounting and provides preparation 
for the Certified Public Accountant Examina- 
tion; Track II is designed for students with an 
interest in management accounting and pro- 
vides preparation for the Certified Manage- 
ment Accountant Examination. 

Track I — Financial Accounting requires: 
Accounting 110, 220-221, 330, 440, 441, 
443, 445, Mathematics 103, Computer 
Science 108, and one unit to be selected from 
Philosophy 216, Accounting 225, 226, 331, 
442, 446, 447, and 448 or 449. Business 110 
may be substituted for Accounting 110. 
Duplicate credit will not be granted. 

Students seeking entry into the pubUc 
accounting field are advised to investigate the 
professional requirements for certification in 
the state in which they intend to practice so 
that they may meet all educational require- 
ments prior to graduation. All Track I majors 
are advised to enroll in Accounting 225, 226, 
331 , 442, 447, and 449, Economics 1 10 and 
HI, Business 335, 336, and 338, and one of 
the following: Business 340, Economics 220, 
or 337. 

Track II — Management Accounting 
requires: Accounting 110, 220, 330-331, 
444, and 449; Mathematics 103; Computer 
Science 108; and Business 338, 339, 
and 440. All Track II majors are advised to 
enroll in Economics 110 and 111 and Busi- 
ness 335 and 336. Students planning to sit 
for the Certified Management Accountant 




Examination are advised to enroll in Ac- 
counting 440, 441, 442, and 443. Business 
110 may be substituted for Accounting 110. 
Duplicate credit will not be granted 

Three minors are offered by the Depart- 
ment of Accounting. The following courses 
are required to complete a minor in Financial 
Accounting: Accounting 1 10, 220, 221, 443, 
447 and any other accounting course or 
independent study. A minor in Managerial 
Accounting requires the completion of 
Accounting 110, 220, 330-331 and 444. To 
obtain a minor in Federal Income Tax, a 
student must complete Accounting 110, 220- 
221, 441, and 442. 

110 

ELEMENTARY ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An introductory course in recording, classify- 
ing, summarizing, and interpreting the basic 
business transaction. Problems of classifica- 
tion and interpretation of accounts and prepa- 
ration of financial statements are studied. 
Not open to students who have received 
credit for Business 110. Prerequisite: 
Second-semester freshman or consent 
instructor. 



A 



220-221 

INTERMEDIATE 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 

An intensive study of accounting state- 
ments and analytical procedures with an 
emphasis upon corporate accounts, various 
decision models, price-level models, earnings 
per share, pension accounting, accounting for 
leases, and financial statement analysis. 
Prerequisite: AccountingllO. 

225 

FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS 

Deals with the analysis of financial 
statements as an aid to decision making. The 
theme of the coiu-se is understanding the 
financial data which are analyzed as well as 
the methods by which they are analyzed and 
interpreted. This course should prove of 
value to all who need a thorough understand- 
ing of the uses to which financial statements 
are put as well as to those who must know 
how to use them intelligently and effectively. 
This includes accountants, security analysts, 
lending officers, credit analysts, managers, 
and all others who make decisions on the 
basis of financial data. Prerequisite: Ac- 
counting 110 or Business 110. 

226 

GOVERNMENT AND 
FUND ACCOUNTING 

This course is designed to introduce 
accounting for not-for-profit organizations. 
Municipal accounting and reporting are 
studied. Prerequisite: Accounting 110 or 
Business 110. One-half unit of credit. 

330-331 

COST AND BUDGETARY 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 

Methods of accounting for material, labor, 
and factory overhead expenses consumed in 
manufacturing using job order, process, and 
standard costing. Application of cost ac- 
counting and budgetary theory to decision 
making in the area of make or buy, expansion 
of production and sales, and accounting for 



control are dealt with. Prerequisite: Ac- 
counting 220 and Mathematics 103 or 
consent of instructor. 

440 

AUDITING THEORY 

A study of the science or art of verifying, 
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and 
reports. The goal of the course is to empha- 
size concepts which will enable students to 
understand the philosophy and environment 
of auditing. Special attention is given to the 
public accounting profession, studying 
auditing standards, professional ethics, the 
legal liability inherent in the attest function, 
the study and evaluation of internal control, 
the nature of evidence, the growing use of 
statistical sampling, the impact of electronic 
data processing, and the basic approach to 
planning an audit. Finally, various audit 
reports expressing independent expert 
opinions on the fairness of financial state- 
ments are studied. Prerequisite: Accounting 
221, Mathematics 103, and Computer 
Science 108. 

441 

FEDERAL INCOME TAX 

Analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to income, deduc- 
tions, inventories, and accounting methods. 
Practical problems involving determination 
of income and deductions, capital gains and 
losses, computation and payment of taxes 
through withholding at the source and 
through declaration are considered. Planning 
transactions so that a minimum amount of tax 
will result is emphasized. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 110 or consent of instructor. 

442 

FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING 

An analysis of the provisions of the 
Internal Revenue Code relating to partner- 
ships, estates, trusts, and corporations. An 



A 



extensive series of problems is considered, 
and effective tax planning is emphasized. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 441. 

443 

ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I 

Certain areas of advanced accounting 
theory, including business combinations and 
consolidated financial statements. Prerequi- 
site: Accounting 221 . One-half unit of credit. 

444 

CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control process in the organization. Gen- 
eral systems theory, financial control sys- 
tems, centralization-decentralization, 
performance measurement and evaluation, 
forecasts and budgets, and marketing, 
production and finance models for control 
purposes. Prerequisite: Accounting 331 or 
consent of instructor. 

445 

AUDITING PRACTICE 

An audit project is presented, solved and 
the auditor's report written. This course is 
limited to students who have either com- 
pleted or are enrolled in Accounting 440. 
One-half unit of credit. Grade will be 
recorded as "P" or "F." 

446 

SEMINARS ON APB OPINIONS 
AND FASB STANDARDS 

A seminar course for accounting majors 
with library assignments to gain a workable 
understanding of the highly technical 
opinions of the Accounting Principles Board 
and standards of the Financial Accounting 
Standards Board. One term paper. Possible 
trip to New York City to attend a public 
hearing of the Financial Accounting Stan- 
dards Board. Prerequisite: Accounting 110. 
May term. 

447 

ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II 

An intensive study of parmerships, install- 
ment and consignment sales, branch account- 



ing, bankruptcy and reorganization, estates 
and trusts, government entities, and non- 
profit organizations. Prerequisite: Account- 
ing 221 . One-half unit of credit. 

448 

CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS 
FOR CPA CANDIDATES 

Problems from the Accounting Practice 
sections of past C.P.A. examinations, which 
require a thorough knowledge of the core 
courses in their solution, are assigned. The 
course is intended to meet the needs of those 
interested in public accounting and prepara- 
tion for the Certified Public Accountant's 
examination. Prerequisite: Accounting 330 
or consent of instructor. One-half unit of 
credit. Grade will be recorded as "P" 
or "F." 

449 

PRACTICUM IN ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the real world of ac- 
counting. Students are placed in Managerial 
and Public Accounting positions in order to 
effect a synthesis of the students' academic 
course work and its practical applications. 

Specifics of the course work to be worked 
out in conjunction with department, student 
and sponsor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in accounting typically work off 
campus under the supervision of a public or 
private accountant 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Typical examples of recent studies in 
accounting are: computer program to 
generate financial statements, educational 
core for public accountants, inventory 
control, and church taxation. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



JSk. 




Accounting - 

Mathematical 

Sciences 

Associate Professor: Kuhns (Coordinator) 

1 he accounting-mathematical sciences 
interdisciplinary major is designed to offer, 
within a liberal-arts framework, courses 
which will aid in constructing mathematical 
models for business decision making. 
Students obtain the necessary substantial 
background in both mathematical sciences 
and accounting. 

Requiring accounting courses are: Ac- 
counting 110, 220-221, 330-331,441,442. 
In mathematical sciences required courses 
are: Computer Science 125 and 321 and 
Mathematics 112, 128, 129, 338 and either 
103 or 332. Recommended courses include: 
Mathematics 130, 238, 333; Business 223, 
335, 336, 338, 339; Computer Science 108, 
246; Economics 110, 111; Psychology 224, 
225; and Sociology-Anthropology 110. 



^ American Studies 



Professor: Piper (Coordinator) 

1 he American Studies major offers a 
comprehensive program in American 
civilization which introduces students to the 
complexities underlying the development of 
America and its contemporary life. Thirteen 
courses are included. 

FOUR COURSE REQUIREMENTS - The 

primary integrating units of the major, 
these courses some team-taught, will encour- 
age students to consider ideas from different 
points of view and help then to correlate 
information and methods from various 
disciplines: 

1. America As a Civilization: American 
Studies 200 (First semester of major 
study) 

2. American Tradition in the Arts and 
Literature: American Studies 220 

3. Research and Methodology: History 449 
or Sociology/Anthro 447 (Junior or 
Senior Year) 

4. Internship or Independent Study (Junior 
or Senior year) 

CONCENTRATION AREAS - Six courses 
in one option and three in the other are 
needed. Six primary concentration -option 
courses in American Arts or American 
Society build around the insights gained in 
the core courses. They focus particular 
attention on areas most germane to academic 
and vocational interests. The three additional 
courses from the other option give further 
breadth to an understanding of America. 
Students also will be encouraged to take 
elective courses relating to other cultures. 
Students should design their American 
Studies major in consultation with the 
program coordinator. 



A 



AMERICAN ARTS 
CONCENTRATION OPTION 

Art 332 — American Art of the 20th Century 
English 222 — American Literature I 
English 223 — American Literature II 
Music 128 — American Music 
N 80 — Studies in American Music 
Theatre Studies — American Theatre 

AMERICAN SOCIETY 
CONCENTRATION OPTION 

Economics 224 — Urban Problems 
History 442 — U.S. Social and Intellectual 

History to 1877 
History 443 — U.S. Social and Intellectual 

History since 1877 
Political Science 331 — Civil Rights and 

Liberties 
Political Science 335 — Law and Society 
Sociology 334 — Racial and Cultural 
Minorities 

200 

AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION 

An analysis of the historical, sociocultural, 
economic, and political perspectives of 
American civilization with special attention 
to the interrelationships between these 
various orientations. May be taken for either 
one-half unit (Section 200A) or full unit 
(SectionB); declared majors and prospective 
majors should take the full-unit course, 200B. 
Alternate years. 

220 

AMERICAN TRADITION IN 
THE ARTS AND LITERATURE 

The relationship of the arts and literature 
to the various historical periods of American 
life. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP 
N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 




Art 



Professors: Bogle, Shipley 
Assistant Professor: Golahny (Chairperson) 
Visiting Assistant Professor: Monk 
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Ateher: Bartons, 
Barrie, Lash, Pitynski 

1 he Art Department offers two majors in 
the A.B. Degree (Studio Art and Art History) 
and a second degree program, a B.F.A. 
Degree in Sculpture. 

The A.B. Degree - 
Studio Art 

1 o complete a Bachelor of Arts Degree 
with a major in studio art, the students must 
complete the seven-course foundation 
program and the requirements for an area of 
specialization, participate in each semester's 
colloquium (while a declared major), and 
satisfactorily participate in the senior 
exhibition. Exception to participation in the 
colloquium may be made by the art faculty. 



A 



Foundation Program 

Art 111 Drawing I 

Art 115 Two-Dimensional Design 

Art 116 Figure Modeling 

Art 212 Color Theory 

Art 222 Survey of Art: Pre-history 
Through The Middle Ages 

Art 223 Survey of Art: From the Renais- 
sance through the Modem Age 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Art 148, 248, 348, 448 Art Colloquium 

Areas of Specialization 

I. Painting 

ART 220 Painting! 

ART 221 Drawing II 

ART 330 Painting I 

ART 446 Studio Research 

and two art history courses numbered 

300 or above. 

n. Printmaking 

ART 221 Drawing II 

ART 228 Printmaking I 

ART 338 Printmaking II 

ART 446 Studio Research 

and two art history courses numbered 

300 or above. 

m.Sculpture 

ART 225 Sculpture! 

ART 226 Figure Modeling II 

ART 335 Sculpture II 

ART 446 Studio Research 

and two art history courses numbered 

300 or above. 

IV. Commercial Design 

ART 221 Drawing II 

ART 311 Practicum in Layout and Design 

ART 312 Practicum in Typographic 

Composition 
ART 337 Photography II 
ART 442 Special Projects with 

Commercial Design 



ART 443 Computer Graphics for 

Commercial Design 
CGO 511 Layout and Design 
CG0 512 Typographic Composition 

A student is encouraged to take the fol- 
lowing courses: Internship (Art 470-479), 
Advertising (Business 332), Writing for 
Special Audiences (Mass Communication 
323), Introduction to Mass Communication 
(Mass Comm 110), Social Psychology 
(Psy 224). 

V. Generalist Art Major 

to be taken by those students who are seeking 
teaching certification in Art: 

ART 119 Ceramics! 

ART 220 Painting! 

ART 225 Sculpture! 

ART 228 Printmaking! 

and two art history courses numbered 300 or 

above. In addition to Art Department 

courses, under the generalist major, the 

student must complete the art certification 

program in the Education Department. 

VI. Photography 

ART 337 Photography II 

ART 340 Color Photography 

ART 341 Large Format View/Camera 

Photography 
ART 446 Student Research 
and two art history courses numbered 
300 or above. 

The A.B. Degree - 
Art History 

1 o complete a bachelor of arts degree 
with a major in art history, a student 
must take courses in art history, studio art, 
and history and/or religion. A student 
majoring in art history is advised to take a 
foreign language. 



^k. 



Required of all students: 

ART 222 Survey of Art: Pre-History 
Through the Middle Ages 

ART 223 Survey of Art: From Renaissance 
Through the Modem Age 

ART 447 Art History Research 

Choose four of the following: 

ART 331 20th Century European Art 
ART 332 American Art of the 20th Century 
ART 333 19th Century European and 

American Art 
ART 334 Art of the Renaissance 
ART 336 Art of the Baroque 
ART 339 Women in Art 

Choose two of the following: 

ART 111 Drawing! 

ART 115 Two-Dimensional Design 

ART 116 Figure Modeling I 

ART 227 Introduction to Photography 

Choose two of the following: 

fflSTORY210 Ancient History 
HISTORY 212 Medieval Europe and 

its Neighbors 
HISTORY 418 History of Renaissance 

Thought 
RELIGION 1 13 Old Testament Faith 

and History 
RELIGION 114 New Testament Faith 

and History 
RELIGION 226 Biblical Archaeology 

It is furthermore suggested that the 
student choose electives in other departments 
that may complement the studies of art 
history. Among these recommended 
electives are: 

FRENCH 412 French Literature of the 

19th Century 
ENGLISH 336 Shakespeare 
MUSIC 1 17 Survey of Western Music 
MUSIC 335 History of Western Music I 
MUSIC 336 History of Western Music II 
THEATRE 332 History of Theatre I 
THEATRE 333 History of Theatre II 



Minors 

Five minors are being offered by the Art 
Department. Requirements for each follow: 
Commercial Design: Art 111, 115,212,223, 
3 11, 3 12, 5 11, 5 12; Painting: Art 111, 115. 
220, 330 and 221 or 223; Photography: Art 
1 11, 212, 223, 227, 337 and 340 or 341; 
Sculpture: Art 1 16, 225, 226, 335, and 1 1 1, 
119 or 445; Art History: Art 222, 223 and 
two advanced art history courses. Art Majors 
who minor in art history must take two 
additional upper level coiu^ses beyond the 
two required for the minor intended for 
students who major in other disciplines (i.e. 
Art 222, 223 and four upper level courses). 

The B,F.A. Degree 
in Sculpture 

1 he student completes a specified course 
of study in the Art Department, the Lycom- 
ing College distribution requirements, and 
one of the field specialization apprenticeship 
programs at the Johnson Atelier in Mercer- 
ville. New Jersey. 

The Art Department course of study 
consists of 12 courses in studio and art 
history: Figure Modeling I and II (Art 116 
and 226), Sculpture I and II (Art 225 and 
335), Drawing I and II (Art 1 1 1 and 221), 
Introduction to Photography (Art 227), 2-D 
Design (Art 115), Survey of Art (Art 222 and 
223), and two additional courses in Art 
History (Art 331, 332, 333, 334, 336 or 339). 

Twelve additional course units are re- 
quired of the student. The student must meet 
the requirements of the distribution program 
within these courses. 

In order to complete the B.F.A. Degree 
the students must participate in the art 
colloquium every semester while taking 
course work at Lycoming (as a declared 
major) and must participate in a senior 
exhibition. Exception to participation in the 
colloquium may he made by the art faculty. 



^L 



The student must also complete one of the 
field specialization apprenticeships at the 
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture in Mercerville, New Jersey. This 
requires the student to be at the Johnson 
Atelier for a period of between 16 and 23 1/2 
months. The student receives eight course 
units of credit at Lycoming College for 
successfully completing the field specializa- 
tion apprenticeship at Johnson Atelier. It is 
expected that the work for the apprenticeship 
component will be completed during the 
summers and the junior year. 

Admission to the B.F.A. degree program 
is on the basis of meeting the admission stan- 
dards of Lycoming College, and passing a 
portfolio review and interview by members 
of the Lycoming College Art Department. 

Ill 

DRAWING I 

Study of the human figure with gesture 
and proportion stressed. Student is made 
familiar with different drawing techniques 
and media. Some drawings from nature. 
Offered with Drawing II and III. 

115 

TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 

The basic fundamentals found in the two- 
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space, 
color, and composition are taught in relation- 
ship to the other two-dimensional arts. 
Perceptual theories and their relationships to 
what and why we see what we see in art are 
discussed with each problem. 

116 

HGURE MODELING I 

Understanding the figure will be ap- 
proached through learning the basic struc- 
tures and proportions of the figure. The 
course is conceived as a three-dimensional 
drawing class. At least one figure will be 
cast by each student. 



119 

CERAMICS I 

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it 
relates to function of vessels and the design 
parameters imposed by the characteristics of 
clay. The techniques of ceramics are taught 
to encourage expression rather than to 
dispense merely a technical body of 
information. 

212 

COLOR THEORY 

A study of the physical and emotional 
aspects of color. Emphasis will be placed on 
the study of color as an aesthetic agent for 
the artist. The color theories of Johannes 
Itten will form the base for this course with 
some study of the theories of Albert Munsell, 
Faber Birren, and Wilhelm Ostwald. 

220 

PAINTING I 

An introduction of painting techniques 
and materials. Coordination of color, value, 
and design within the painting is taught. 
Some painting from the figure. No limita- 
tions as to painting media, subject matter, or 
style. Prerequisite: Art 115 or consent of 
instructor. 

221 

DRAWING II 

Continued study of the human figure. 
Emphasis is placed on realism and figure- 
ground coordination with the use of value 
and design. Prerequisite: Art 111. 

Ill 

SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY 

THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES 

A survey of Western architectiu-e, sculp- 
ture, and painting. Emphasis is on the inter- 
relation of form and content and on the relat- 
edness of the visual arts to their cultural 
environment: Paleolithic Art, Near East, 
Egypt, Greece, Rome, and Medieval Europe. 



A 



223 

SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE 
RENAISSANCE THROUGH 
THE MODERN AGE 

A survey of Western architecture, sculp- 
ture, and painting. Emphasis is on the inter- 
relation of form and content and on the relat- 
edness of the visual arts to their cultural 
environment: 14th-20th centuries. 

225 
SCULPTURE I 

An introduction to the techniques, materi- 
als, and ideas of sculptiu^e. Clay, plaster, 
wax, wood, and other materials will be used. 
The course will be concerned with ideas 
about sculpture as expression, and with 
giving material form to ideas. 

226 

HGURE MODELING II 

Will exploit the structures and understand- 
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to produce 
larger, more complex figurative works. 
There will be a requirement to cast one of the 
works in plaster. Prerequisite: Art 116 and 
consent of instructor. 

227 

INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY 
Objectives of the course are to develop 
technical skills in the use of photographic 
equipment (cameras, films, darkroom, 
printmaker) and to develop sensitivity in the 
areas of composition, form, light, picture 
quality, etc. Each student must own (or have 
access to) a 35mm camera capable of full- 
manual operation. 

228 

PRINTMAKING I 

Introduction to the techniques of 
silkscreen, intaglio, monotype and lithogra- 
phy printing. One edition of at least six 
prints must be completed in each area. 
Prerequisite: Art 111 or 115 or consent of 
instructor. 



229 
CERAMICS II 

Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on 
use of the wheel and technical aspects such 
as glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequi- 
site: Art 119. 

311 

PRACTICUM IN LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Utilization of commercial design tech- 
niques and skills in an applied setting 
through work experience. Students will 
produce images and do layout work primarily 
with on-campus departments and offices. 
Students must take 311 concurrently with 
GCO 511, Layout and Design. One hour 
credit. Open only to students enrolled in 
GCO 511. 

312 

PRACTICUM IN TYPOGRAPHIC 

COMPOSITION 

Utilization of commercial design tech- 
niques and skills in an applied setting through 
work experience. Students will produce 
images and do layout work primarily with 
on-campus departments and offices. Students 
must take 312 concurrently with GCO 512. 
Typographic Composition. One hour credit. 
Open only to students enrolled in GCO 512. 

330 

PAINTING II 

Emphasis is placed on individual style and 
technique. Artists and movements in art are 
studied. No limitations as to painting media, 
subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: 
Art 220. 

331 

20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 

Stylistic developments in Europe from 
1880 to the present, including Cubism, 
Fauvism, Expressionism, Dada, and Surreal- 
ism. Picasso, Matisse, Kandinsky, and 
Mondrian are among the major artists 
studied. 



A 



332 

AMERICAN ART OF 
THE 20TH CENTURY 

The art of the United States from about 
1880 to the present, with emphasis on the 
innovations of Americans in painting, 
sculpture and architecture, and on the mean- 
ing and historical roots of contemporary art. 

333 

19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN 
AND AMERICAN ART 
The art of Western Europe and the United 
States from 1780-1900, with emphasis on 
painting in France. Those artists to be 
studied include David and Goya, Delacroix, 
Courbet, The Impressionists, Turner, Homer, 
Cole and Eakins. 

334 

ART OF THE RENAISSANCE 

The art of Italy and Northern Europe from 
1300-1530, with emphasis on the painters 
Giotto, Masaccio, Leonardo da Vinci, 
Raphael, Titian, Van Eyck, and Durer, the 
sculptors Ghiberti, Donatello and Mich- 
elangelo, and the architects Brunelleschi and 
Alberti. 

335 

SCULPTURE II 

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 225). 
Emphasis is on advanced technical process. 
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture 
will be done in the school foundry. Prerequi- 
site: Art 225. 

336 

ART OF THE BAROQUE 

Seventeenth-century painting and sculp- 
ture in Italy and the Netherlands with 
emphasis on Bernini, Poussin, Rubens, and 
Rembrandt, and with special attention given 
to the expressive, narrative, painterly, and 
tactile styles present in their art. 



337 
PHOTOGRAPHY II 

To extend the skills developed in Photog- 
raphy I (Art 227) by continued growth in 
technical expertise including instruction in 
the use and capabilities of large format view 
cameras. Emphasis is placed on conceptual 
and aesthetic aspects of photography. 
Prerequisite: Art 227. 

338 
PRINTMAKING II 

Further study of the techniques of 
silkscreen, intaglio, monotype, and lithogra- 
phy printing with emphasis on multi plate 
and viscosity printing. Two editions of at 
least six prints must be completed in each of 
two areas. Prerequisite: Art 228. 

339 

WOMEN IN ART 

A survey of women artists from a variety 
of viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social, 
political and economic — which seeks to 
understand and integrate the contributions of 
women artists into the mainstream of the 
history of the art. No prerequisite. 

340 

COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 

Study of the techniques and aesthetics of 
color photography. Work will be directed 
towards the use of both color negative and 
color slide processes. Students will be 
required to learn the special requirements of 
photographing in both indoor and outdoor 
light conditions. A portfolio of color prints 
will be produced. Prerequisite: Art 227 
and 337. 

341 

LARGE FORMAT VIEW 
CAMERA PHOTOGRAPHY 

Study of the techniques and aesthetics of 
the large format view camera in Fine Art 
Photography. Emphasis will be placed on the 
experience of using the large format view 



A 



camera. Students will be encouraged to 
explore alternative photographic processes 
such as platinum printing, the gum bichro- 
mate process, etc. using the large negative 
produced. Prerequisities: Art 227 and 237. 

440 

PAINTING III 

Professional quality is stressed. There is 
some experimentation with new painting 
techniques and styles. 

441 

DRAWING III 

Continued study of human figure, individ- 
ual style, and professional control of drawing 
techniques and media are now emphasized. 

442 

SPECIAL PROJECT IN COMMERCIAL 
DESIGN 

Concentrated research, preparation and 
execution of a series of projects in commer- 
cial design utilizing the traditional studio 
tools including airbrush, water-based medi- 
ums, colored pencils, and pen and ink. The 
following skills are involved: illustration, 
paste-up, typesetting, overlays, lettering and 
layout. Prerequisite: GCO 511, 512 or 
consent of instructor. 

443 

COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR 
COMMERCIAL DESIGN 

Concentrated research, preparation and 
execution of a series of projects in commer- 
cial design utilizing computer imaging. 
Students will learn to generate original 
moving and still images in color using 
existing graphic creation software and 
peripheral devices, such as digitalizing 
cameras, digitalizing drawing devices, 
printers, and slide producers. Prerequisitie: 
CGO 511,512 or consent of instructor. 



445 

SCULPTURE III 

In Sculpture III the student is expected to 
produce a series of sculptures that follow a 
conceptual and technical line of develop- 
ment. Prerequisite: Art 116, 225, and 335. 

446 

STUDIO RESEARCH 

Independent research in an elective studio 
area, conducted under the supervision of the 
appropriate faculty member, includes 
creation of work which may be incorporated 
in the senior group exhibition. Student works 
in private studio assigned by the department 

447 

ART HISTORY RESEARCH 

Independent research, conducted under 
the supervision of the appropriate faculty 
member, includes the research and writing of 
a thesis, to be presented to a committee of 
Art Department faculty. 

148, 248, 348 and 448 
ART COLLOQUIUM 

A non -credit seminar in which faculty, 
students and invited professionals discuss and 
critique specific art projects. Required of all 
students majoring in art. Taken each 
semester. Meets 2-4 times each semester. 
Pass/Fail. Non-credit seminar. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the 
art nouveau, lithography, photography, 
pottery, problems in illustration, and water- 
color. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



A 




Graphic Arts 

1 hrough special arrangements, the fol- 
lowing courses offered at Pennsylvania 
College of Technology are available only to 
Art majors in Commercial Design. The Penn 
College courses are taken as part of the 
student's schedule and are listed with Lycom- 
ing's offerings during registration periods. 

511 

LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and tech- 
niques used in preparation of copy for 
reproduction; paste-up and color separation 
overlays. 3 cr. 

512 

TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION 
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and 
practice in the care and use of 
composing machines, both hot (mechanical) 
and cold (photo). 3 cr. 



Astronomy 
And Physics 

Associate Professor: Erickson 
Assistant Professors: Fisher (Chairperson), 
Wolfe 

1 he department offers two majors. The 
major in astronomy is specifically designed 
to train students in the field of planetarium 
education; it also may serve as a basis for 
earning state certification as a secondary 
school teacher of general science. The major 
in physics can prepare students for graduate 
work in physics, astronomy, and related 
physical sciences, for the cooperative 
program in engineering, for state certification 
as secondary school teachers of physics, or 
for technical positions in industry. 

Astronomy 

1 he major in astronomy requires courses 
in astronomy, physics, chemistry and 
mathematics. The astronomy courses include 
Astronomy 111 and five additional courses 
numbered Astronomy 112 or higher; at least 
four of these five additional courses must be 
numbered Astronomy 230 or higher. Other 
required courses are Physics 225-226, 
Chemistry 110-111 or 330-331, and Mathe- 
matics 128-129. Astronomy majors are also 
required to register for four semesters of 
Astronomy 349 and 449 (non-credit collo- 
quia). The following courses are recom- 
mended: Philosophy 223 and 333, Physics 
333, and Art 227. 

A minor in astronomy consists of a grade 
of C or better in both Astronomy 111 and 
Physics 225 plus any three additional courses 
selected from Physics 226 or astronomy 
courses numbered 200 or higher. 



A 



104 

FIELD GEOLOGY 

A methods course introducing the field 
techniques needed to study the geology 
of an area. May or summer term only. 

107 

OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY 
A methods course providing the opportunity 
to make a variety of astronomical 
observations, both visually and photographic- 
ally, with and without telescopes. 
The planetarium is used to familiarize the 
student with the sky at various 
times during the year and from different 
locations on earth. May or summer term 
only. 

101 

PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B) 
111 

PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A) 

A summary of current concepts of the 
universe from the solar system to distant 
galaxies. Describes the techniques and 
instruments used in astronomical research. 
Presents not only what is reasonably well 
known about the universe, but also considers 
some of the major unsolved problems. 
Astronomy 101 and 111 share the same three 
hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory 
each -week. HI has one additional hour each 
week for more advanced mathematical 
treatment of the material. Credit may not be 
earned for both 101 and 111. Corequisite for 
111: Mathematics 107 or consent of 
instructor. 

102 

EARTH SCIENCE (B) 
112 

EARTH SCIENCE (A) 

A study of the physical processes that 
continually affect the planet Earth, shaping 
our environment. Describes how past events 
and lifeforms can be reconstructed from 
preserved evidence to reveal the history of 



oiu- planet from its origin to the present. 
Emphasizes the ways in which geology, 
meteorology, and oceanography interrelate 
with man and the environment. Astronomy 
102 and 112 share the same three hours of 
lecture and two hours of laboratory each 
week. 112 has one additional hour each 
week for more advanced mathematical 
treatment of the material. Credit may not be 
earned for both 102 and 112. Corequisite for 
112: Mathematics 107 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

103 

METEOROLOGY (B) 
113 

METEOROLOGY (A) 
The general properties of the atmosphere and 
their measurements will be discussed in terms 
of basic physical laws. The large scale 
processes that create a suitable climate for 
life on Earth are discussed as well as the 
smaller scale processes that must be taken 
into account in scientific weather prediction. 
Astronomy 103 and 112 share the same three 
hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory 
each week. 113 has one additional hour each 
week for more advanced mathematical 
treatment of the material. Credit may not be 
earned for both 103 and 113. Corequisite for 
113: Mathematics 107. Alternate years. 

114 

MANNED SPACE FLIGHT I 

Traces the beginnings of rocketry and 
spaceflight capability from Sputnik (1957) 
through the conclusion of the Apollo moon 
landings (1972). Extensive use of NASA 
video and other audio-visual aids. Examina- 
tion of scientific, engineering and political 
motivations. When taken in May term, must 
be scheduled with Astronomy 115. Not for 
distribution. Alternate years. Half unit. 



A 



115 

MANNED SPACE FLIGHT II 

Examines manned spaceflight from 
Skylab missions (1973-74) through ApoUo- 
Soyuz Test Project, early Space Shuttle 
missions, to current U.S. and Soviet space 
efforts. Extensive use of NASA video. 
Examination of scientific, engineering, and 
political motivations. When taken in May 
Term, must be scheduled with Astronomy 
114. Not for distribution. Alternate years. 
Half unit. 

230 

PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES 

A methods course covering major aspects 
of planetarium programming, operation 
and maintenance. Students are required to 
prepare and present a planetarium show. 
Upon successfully completing the course, 
students are eligible to become planetarium 
assistants. Three hours of lecture and 
demonstration and three hours of practical 
training per week. Prerequisite: A grade of 
C or better in Astronomy 101 or HI. 
Alternate years. 

243 

PLANETARY SCIENCE 

A comparative survey of the various 
classes of natural objects that orbit the sun, 
including the major planets, their satellites, 
the minor planets, and comets. Topics 
include meteorological processes in atmos- 
pheres, geological processes that shape 
surface features, internal structures, the role 
of spacecraft in the exploration of the solar 
system, and clues to the origin and dynamic 
evolution of the solar system. Four hours of 
lecture per week. Prerequisites: A grade of 
C or better in Astronomy 111 or Astronomy 
112 or Physics 225. Alternate years. 

344 

RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special 
theory of relativity and an introduction to the 



general theory. Topics include: observational 
and experimental tests of relativity, four- 
vectors, tensors, space-time curvature, 
alternative cosmological models, and the 
origin and future of the universe. Four hours 
of lecture per week. Prerequisites: Astron- 
omy 111 and Physics 225. Alternate years. 
Cross-listed as Physics 344. 

445 

STELLAR EVOLUTION 

The physical principles governing the 
internal structure and external appearance of 
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and 
transport within stars. The evolution of stars 
from initial formation to final stages. The 
creation of chemical elements by nucleosyn- 
thesis. Four hours of lecture per week. 
Prerequisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of 
Astronomy A) and Physics 226 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus 11). Alternate years. 

446 

STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE 

The motion of objects in gravitational 
fields. Introduction to the n-body problem. 
The relation between stellar motions and the 
galactic potential. The large scale structure 
of galaxies in general and of the Milky Way 
Galaxy in particular. Four hours of lecture 
per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 111 
(Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 225 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I). 
Alternate years. 

349 & 449 

ASTRONOMY AND 
PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for 
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy 
and physics offers students a chance to meet 
and hear active scientists in astronomy, 
physics, and related scientific areas talk 
about their own research or professional 
activities. In addition, majors in astronomy 
and physics must present two lectures, one 



^^ 



given during the junior year and one given 
during the senior year, on the results of a 
literature survey or on individual research. 
Students majoring in this department are 
required to attend four semesters during the 
junior and senior years. A letter grade will 
be given when the student gives a lecture. 
Otherwise the grade will be P/F. Students in 
the Cooperative Program in Liberal Arts and 
Engineering are required to attend two 
semesters and present one lecture during their 
junior year. Non-credit course. One hour 
per week. Cross-listed as Physics 349 & 449. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of astronomy. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 

Physics 

1 he major in physics requires courses in 
physics, chemistry and mathematics. The 
required physics courses must include 
Physics 225, 226, 331, 332 and four addi- 
tional courses numbered Physics 333 or 
higher. Up to two courses chosen from 
Astronomy 111, 112, 113,243,445 and 446 
may substitute for two of the four physics 
electives. Other required courses are 
Chemistry 110-111 or 330-331, and Mathe- 
matics 128-129. Physics majors are also 
required to register for four semesters of 
Physics 349 and 449 (non-credit coUoquia). 
The following courses are recommended: 
Mathematics 231 and 238, Computer Science 
125 (all three required for the cooperative 
engineering program and by many graduate 
schools), and Philosophy 223 and 333. 

A minor in physics consists of a grade C 
or better in both semesters of the Physics 
225-226 sequence, Physics 331, Physics 332, 



and one additional course selected from 
physics courses numbered 300 or higher. 

106 

ENERGY ALTERNATIVES 

A physicist's definition of work, energy, 
and power. The various energy sources 
available for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear 
fission and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and 
geothermal. The advantages and disadvan- 
tages of each energy conversion method, 
including availability, efficiency, and 
environmental effects. Present areas of 
energy research and possible future develop- 
ments. Projections of possible future energy 
demands. Exercises and experiments in 
energy collection, conversion, and utilization. 
May or summer term only. 

225-226 

FOJNDAMENTALS OF PHYSICS I-II 

A mathematically rigorous introduction to 
physics designed for majors in physics, 
astronomy, chemistry and mathematics. 
Topics include mechanics, thermodynamics, 
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, and 
modem physics. Five hours of lecture and 
recitation and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Corequisite: Math 128-129 (Calculus 
I and 11). With consent of department, 
Math 109 may substitute for Math 128-129 as 
a prerequisite. 

331 

CLASSICAL MECHANICS 

An analytical approach to classical me- 
chanics. Topics include: kinematics and 
dynamics of single particles and systems of 
particles, gravitation and other central forces, 
moving reference frames, and Lagrangian 
and Hamiltonian formulations of mechanics. 
Four hours of lecture and three hours of 
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Mathe- 
matics 129 and a grade ofC or better in 
Physics 225. 



A 



332 
ELECTROMAGNETIS M 

A theoretical treatment of classical 
electromagnetism. Topics include: electro- 
statics, magnetostatics, electric and magnetic 
potentials, electric and magnetic properties of 
matter. Maxwell's equations, the electromag- 
netic field, and the propagation of electro- 
magnetic radiation. Four hours of lecture 
and three hours of laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisite: Math 129 and a grade ofC or 
better in Physics 226. 

333 
OPTICS 

Geometrical optics, optical systems, 
physical optics, interference, Fraunhofer 
and Fresnel diffraction, and coherence and 
lasers will be covered. Three hours of lecture 
and three hours of laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: Physics 226 and Mathematics 
128 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

336 

MATHEMATICAL 
METHODS OF PHYSICS 

Solution of ordinary linear differential 
equations using power and Laplace trans- 
forms, nonlinear differential and coupled 
differential equations, Fourier analysis using 
both trigonometric and complex exponential 
functions, complex variables, eigenvalue 
problems, infinite dimensional vector spaces, 
partial differential equations, boundary value 
problem solutions to the wave equation, 
heat flow equation and Laplace's equation. 
Prerequisites: Math 231 and 238. 
Alternate years. 

337 

THERMODYNAMICS AND 

STATISTICAL MECHANICS 

Classical thermodynamics will be pre- 
sented, showing that the macroscopic 
properties of a system can be specified 
without a knowledge of the microscopic 
properties of the constituents of the system. 



Then statistical mechanics will be developed, 
showing that these same macroscopic 
properties are determined by the microscopic 
properties. Four hours of lecture and 
recitation per week. Prerequisites: Physics 
226 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II) 
and Mathematics 129 (Calculus II). 
Alternate years. 

338 

MODERN PHYSICS 

Thorough investigation of changes in the 
classical understanding of space and time 
together with those of energy and matter that 
led to the time development of relativistic 
and quantum mechanical theories. Topics 
include: introduction to special relativity, 
blackbody radiation, the postulation of 
the photon and quantization, atomic spectra, 
interactions of matter and energy, Bohr 
model of the atom, concepts of symmetry, 
and development and applications of the 
Schrodinger equation. Four hours of lecture 
and one-three hour laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: Mathematics 129 and a grade 
ofC or better in Physics 226. 

339 

SOLID STATE PHYSICS 

Topics include crystalline structures, 
periodic potentials, band structure, free 
electron model, semiconductor physics, 
electromagnetic and thermal properties of 
solids, superconductivity, and superfluidity. 
Four hours of lecture and three hours of 
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Physics 
332 and Math 129 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

344 

RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special 
theory of relativity and an introduction to the 
general theory. Topics include: observational 
and experimental tests of relativity, four 
vectors, tensors, space-time curvature, 
alternative cosmological models, and the 



A 



origin and future of the universe. Four hours 
of lecture per week. Prerequisites: Astron- 
omy 111 and Physics 225. Alternate years. 
Cross-listed as Astronomy 344. 

439 

INTRODUCTION TO 
QUANTUM MECHANICS 

Basic concepts and formulation of quan- 
tum theory. The free particle, the simple 
harmonic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and 
central force problems will be discussed. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
perturbation theory will be covered. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequisite: 
Either Physics 226 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus II) or Chemistry 331 (Physical 
Chemistry II). and Mathematics 231 (Differ- 
ential Equations). Cross-listed as 
Chemistry 439. 

447 

NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS 
The course will consider properties of 
nuclei, nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear 
reactions (including fission and fusion), and 
properties of elementary particles. The 
interactions of nuclear particles with matter 
and the detection of nuclear particles will be 
covered. It will be shown how observed 
phenomena lead to theories on the nature of 
fundamental interactions, how these forces 
act at the smallest measiu^able distances, and 
what is expected to occur at even smaller 
distances. Four hours of lecture and recita- 
tion and two hours of laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: Physics 226 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus II), Mathematics 129, 
and either Physics 338 (Modern Physics) or 
Chemistry 110. Alternate years. 

349 & 449 

ASTRONOMY AND 
PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for 
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy 
and physics offers students a chance to meet 



and hear active scientists in astronomy, 
physics and related scientific areas talk about 
their own research or professional activities. 
In addition, majors in astronomy and 
physics must present two lectures, one given 
during the junior year and one given during 
the senior year, on the results of a literature 
survey or on individual research. Students 
majoring in this department are required to 
attend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be P/F. Students in the Coop- 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and Engi- 
neering are required to attend two semesters 
and present one lecture during their junior 
year. Non-credit course. One hour per week. 
Cross-listed as Astronomy 349 & 449. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in physics work off campus under 
the supervision of professional physicists 
employed by local industries or hospitals. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of physics. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 





Biology 



Professor: Angstadt (Chairperson) 
Associate Professors: Diehl, Gabriel, 

Zaccaria, Zimmerman 
Visiting Instructor: Hartzel 

A major consists of eight biology 
courses, including 110-111, 221, 222, 223, 
224, and 225. In addition, juniors and seniors 
majoring in Biology are required to register 
for Biology 349/449 (non-credit colloquium) 
during all semesters on campus. With 
departmental consent. Biology 226 may be 
substitutedfor Biology 221. Only two 
courses numbered below 2(X) may count 
toward the major. Departmental internships 
cannot be used to fulfill the eighth required 
course. In addition, three units of chemistry 
and two units of mathematical science are 
required. The chemistry requirement must 
include at least one unit of organic chemistry 
chosen from Chemistry 1 15, 220, or 221. 
The mathematical sciences courses must be 



chosen from Computer Science 108, 
125 and MathemaUcs 103, 109, 127, 128 or 
above. Certain specific exceptions to the 
core program will be made for three-year 
students enrolled in cooperative programs. 
Such exceptions are noted under the particu- 
lar cooperative program described in the 
Academic Program chapter of the catalog. 
Students interested in these programs should 
contact the program director before finalizing 
their individual programs. Credit may not be 
earned for both Biology 101 and 1 10 or for 
both Biology 102 and 1 1 1. Consent of 
instructor may replace Biology 1 10-1 1 1 as a 
prerequisite for all biology courses. 

A minor in Biology requires the comple- 
tion of four upper-level (200's or higher) 
courses, with their appropriate prerequisites. 
At least two of these must be from the 200' s 
series of courses. A minor with a special 
name (e.g.. Environmental Science) may be 
designed by an individual. 

101-102 

PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY 

An investigation of biological principles, 
including ecological systems, form and 
function in selected representative organisms 
(especially man), cell theory, molecular 
biology, reproduction, inheritance, adaption, 
and evolution. The course is designed 
primarily for students not planning to major 
in the biological sciences. Three hours of 
lecture and one two-hour laboratory 
per week. 

110-111 

INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the study of biology 
designed for students planning to major in the 
biological sciences. Major topics considered 
include the origin of life, cellular respiration 
and photosynthesis, genetics, development, 
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior, 
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. 



A 



113-114 

HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 

Using the organ- systems approach, the 
course is an introduction to the human 
body — its anatomy, physiology, and normal 
development — with particular attention to 
structure and function at all levels of its 
biological organization (molecular through 
organismal). Three hours of lecture, and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi- 
site: Chemistry 115 or Chemistry 220 or 
consent of instructor. 

Ill 

MICROBIOLOGY 

A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is 
given to the identification and physiology of 
microorganisms as well as to their role in 
disease, their economic importance, and 
industrial applications. Three hours of 
lecture and two two-hour laboratory periods 
per week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. 
Not open to students who have received 
credit for Biology 226. 

222 
GENETICS 

A general consideration of the principles 
governing inheritance, including treatment of 
classical, molecular, cytological, physiology, 
microbial, human, and population genetics. 
Three hours of lecture and two two-hour 
laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 110-111. 

lli 

ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 

The mechanisms and functions of animal 
systems, including the autonomic, endocrine, 
digestive, cardio-vascular, respiratory, renal, 
nervous, and reproductive systems. Mam- 
malian physiology is stressed. Three hours of 
lecture and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite : Biology 110-111. 



224 

ECOLOGY 

The study of the principles of ecology 
with emphasis on the role of chemical, 
physical, and biological factors affecting the 
distribution and succession of plant and 
animal populations and communities. 
Included will be field studies of local habitats 
as well as laboratory experimentation. 
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 110-111. 

225 

PLANT SCIENCES 

A survey of the structure, development, 
function, classification, and use of plants and 
related organisms. The study will comprise 
four general topic areas: form, including 
morphology and anatomy of plants in growth 
and reproduction; function, concentrating on 
nutrition and metabolism f)eculiar to photo- 
synthetic organisms; classification systems 
and plant identification, and human uses of 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 110-111. 

226 

MICROBIOLOGY FOR 
THE HEALTH SCIENCES 

A study of microorganisms with emphasis 
given to their taxonomy and their role in 
various aspects of human infectious disease. 
Mechanisms for treating and preventing 
infectious diseases will be presented. Labo- 
ratory to include diagnostic culture proce- 
dures, antibiotic sensitivity testing, serology, 
anaerobic techniques and a study of hemo- 
lytic reactions. Three hours of lecture and 
four hours of laboratory per week. Prerequi- 
site: One year of introductory level biology, 
one year of chemistry or consent of instruc- 
tor. Not open to students who have received 
credit for Biology 221. 



J^ 



328 

AQUATIC BIOLOGY 

A field-oriented course dealing with fresh- 
water ecosystems. Studies will include a 
survey of the plankton, benthos, and fish — 
as well as the physical and chemical charac- 
teristics of water that influence their distribu- 
tion. Several local field trips and a one-week 
trip to a field station will familiarize students 
with the diversity of habitats and the tech- 
niques of limnologists. Alternate May terms. 
Prerequisites: Biology 110-111. 

329 

TROPICAL MARINE BIOLOGY 

A field oriented course where students 
study the creatures of the fringing reefs, 
barrier reefs, lagoons, turtlegrass beds and 
mangrove swamps at a tropical marine 
laboratory. Studies will include survey of 
plankton, invertebrates, and fish as well as 
the physical and chemical characteristics 
that influence their distribution. 
Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alternate 
May terms. 

330 

COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 
OF VERTEBRATES 

Detailed examination of the origins, struc- 
ture, and functions of the principal organs of 
the vertebrates. Special attention is given to 
the progressive modification of organs from 
lower to higher vertebrates. Three hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. 
Alternate years. 

334 

INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 

Comparative study of the invertebrate 
phyla with emphasis on phylogeny, physiol- 
ogy, morphology, and ecology. Two three- 
hour lecturel laboratory periods per week. 
Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alternate 
years. 



335 

CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 

Physiochemical background of cellular 
function: functions of membrane systems 
and organelles; metabolic pathways; bio- 
chemical and cellular bases of growth, 
development and responses of organisms. 
Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 110-111 and a year of chemistry. 
Alternate years. 

336 

EVOLUTION 

The study of the origin and modification 
of life on earth. Topics discussed include 
molecular evolution, population genetics, 
gene flow, natural selection, sexual selection, 
kin selection, neutral theory, extinction, co- 
evolution, and the evolution of man. Four 
hours of lecture per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 110-111 or consent of the instructor. 
Alternate years. 

339 

MEDICAL GENETICS 

This course is concerned with the relation- 
ships of heredity to disease. Discussions will 
focus on topics such as chromosomal 
abnormalities, metabolic variation and 
disease, somatic cell genetics, genetic 
screening, and immunogenetics. Laboratory 
exercises will offer practical experiences in 
genetic diagnostic techniques. Prerequisite: 
Biology 101-102 or 110-111. May term only. 

342 

ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

A study of causation, function, evolution, 
and biological significance of animal behav- 
iors in their normal environment and social 
contexts. Three hours of lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory each week. Prerequi- 
site: Biology 110-111. Alternate years. 



A 



346 

VIROLOGY 

An introduction to the study of viruses. 
The course will cover virus anatomy and 
reproduction, diseases caused by viruses, 
modem treatments of viral infections and 
viral vaccines produced by recombinant DNA 
and other technologies. Course content will 
also include a description of how viruses are 
used as tools for genetic engineering and for 
studying cellular processes like membrane 
signal transduction, regulation of genetic 
expression and oncogenesis (cancer). Four 
hours of lecture per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 110-111 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

347 
IMMUNOLOGY 

The course introduces concepts concern- 
ing how pathogens cause disease and host 
defense mechanisms against infectious 
diseases. Characterization of and relation- 
ships between antigens, haptens, and antibod- 
ies are presented. Serological assays will 
include: agglutination, precipitations, 
immunofluorescence, immunoeletrophoresis, 
and complement fixation. Other topics are: 
immediate and delayed hypersensitivities (i.e. 
allergies such as hay fever and poison ivy), 
immunological renal diseases, immunohema- 
tology (blood groups, etc), hybridome 
technology, the chemistry and function of 
complement, autoimmunity, and organ graft 
rejection phenomena. Three hours of 
lecture, one three-hour laboratory, and one 
hour of arranged work per week. Prerequi- 
site: Biology 110-111. Alternate years. 

403 

FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS 

A methods course for students preparing 
to teach biology. Sources and methods 
of collecting and preserving various plant and 
animal materials. Summer term only. 



431 

fflSTOLOGY 

A study of the basic body tissues and the 
microscopic anatomy of the organs and 
structures of the body which are formed from 
them. Focus is on normal human histology. 
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
110-111. Alternate years. 

433 

ECONOMIC AND 
SYSTEMATIC BOTANY 

Structure and classification of plants with 
emphasis on those species, particularly food 
and drug plants, having significance for 
human affairs. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Biology 110-111, Biology 225. 
Alternate years. 

440 

PARASITOLOGY AND 
MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY 

The biology of parasites and parasitism. 
Studies on the major groups of animal 
parasites and anthropod vectors of disease 
will involve taxonomy and life cycles. 
Emphasis will be made on parasites of 
medical and veterinary importance. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 110- 
111. Alternate years. 

441 

VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY 

A study of the development of vertebrates 
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus. 
Particular attention is given to the chick and 
human as representative organisms. Two 
three-hour lecture/laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. 
Alternate years. 



A 



444 

BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of 
carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; 
and biochemical control mechanisms, 
including allosteric control, induction, 
repression, signal transduction as well as the 
various types of inhibitive control mecha- 
nisms. Three hours of lecture, one three- 
hour laboratory and one hour of arranged 
work per week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 
220-221 or Chemistry 115, or consent of 
instructor. Cross-listed as Chemistry 444. 
Alternate years. 

445 

RADIATION BIOLOGY 

A study of the effects of ionizing and 
nonionizing radiations on cells, tissues and 
organisms. Consideration will be given to 
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien- 
cies elucidate the nature of radiation damage. 
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
110-111, one year of chemistry. Alternate 
years. 

446 

PLANT ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
A study of plant physiology as a function 
of plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships an 
environmental factors will be examined from 
a background of the structure and develop- 
ment of cells, tissues, organs, and whole 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology 110-111. Biology 225. Alternate 
years. 

448 

ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This course begins with a survey of the 
role of the endocrine hormones in the 
integration of body functions. This is 
followed by a study of the control of 
hormone synthesis and release, and a consid- 



eration of the mechanisms by which 
hormones accomplish their effects on target 
organs. Two three-hour lecture/laboratory 
periods per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
110-111. Alternate years. 

349 & 449 

BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM 

This course offers the student a chance to 
become familiar with research in the Biologi- 
cal Sciences using techniques such as 
meeting and talking with active researchers, 
reading and critically analyzing the current 
literature, and discussing the ideas and 
methods shaping Biology. Students will be 
required to read and analyze specific papers, 
actively participate in discussions. Students 
majoring in this deparunent are required to 
enroll during all semesters spent on campus 
in the junior and senior years. The grade will 
beP/F. Non-credit course. One hour per 
week. Prerequisites: Biology majors with 
junior or senior class standing. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Recent samples of internships in the de- 
partment include ones with the Department 
of Environmental Resources, nuclear medi- 
cine or rehabilitative therapies at a local 
hospital. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Departmental studies are experimentally 
oriented and may entail either lab or 
field work. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 
Examples of recent honors projects have 
involved stream analysis, gypsy moth 
research, drug synthesis and testing. 



A 



Business 
Administration 



Associate Professor: Weaver (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Stemgold 
Instructors: Henninger, Roberts 
Lecturer: Larrabee 

1 o graduate with a major in business ad- 
ministration, a student must complete 
one of two tracks: 

Track I — Business Management 

This track is designed to educate students 
in the functions of today's profit and non- 
profit organizations. The program provides a 
well-balanced preparation for a wide variety 
of careers, including general administration, 
personnel administration, commercial 
banking, investments and portfolio manage- 
ment, security analysis, corporate financial 
management, general marketing, sales, 
product management, advertising, retail 
merchandising, and production and manufac- 
tiuing management. 

Required courses are Business 110, 111, 
223, 228, 329, 338, 339, 440, 441; Mathe- 
matics 103. Business 332 or 443 may be 
substituted for Business 329 and Business 
340 may be substituted for Business 339. 
Accounting 110 may be substituted for 
Business 110 if the student is transferring 
into the business administration major, but 
duplicate credit will not be granted. 

Majors are encouraged to take Business 
335, 336; Computer Science 108; Economics 
1 10, 111; Mass Communication 211, 323; 
Mathematics 109; Philosophy 216; and 
Psychology 225. Majors are also encouraged 
to take a foreign language. The additional 
elective offerings are intended to add depth 
in the areas of finance, marketing and 
management. 




Track II — Management Science 

This track is designed to train students in 
the quantitative aspects of business admini- 
stration. It provides excellent undergraduate 
preparation for graduate study in manage- 
ment science, operations research, and 
quantitative business administration. The 
program also provides a solid preparation for 
careers in production control, systems 
analysis, research, forecasting, industrial and 
technical sales and any of the functional 
areas of business where quantitative training 
would be an added qualification. 

Required courses are Business 1 10, 111, 
223,338,339,446; Economics 110, 111, 
441; Mathematics 103, 112, 128, 129, 338; 
and Computer Science 108. Accounting 110 
may be substituted for Business 110 if the 
student is transferring into the business 
administration major. 

Minors 

1 he Business Administration Depart- 
ment offers two minors. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor in 



j3^ 



Marketing: Business 228, 329, 332, 445, and 
443 or 448. A minor in Finance requires the 
completion of Business 338, 339, 340, and 
Economics 220, 441, or Accounting 225. 

110 

HNANCIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the art of measuring, 
communicating, and interpreting financial 
activity. Recording, classifying and summa- 
rizing business transactions, the interpretation 
of accounts, and the preparation of financial 
statements are studied. Not open to students 
who have received credit for Accounting 110. 

Ill 

MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the various compo- 
nents of managerial accounting. Emphasis is 
placed on managerial problem solving 
techniques and the analysis of the results. 
Accounting systems, costing procedures, 
cost- volume profit relationships, managerial 
control processes and the use of computers as 
aids to decision-making are studied. Students 
will gain hands-on experience with various 
computer applications of managerial account- 
ing. Prerequisite: Business 110 or Account- 
ing 110. 

223 

QUANTITATIVE BUSINESS ANALYSIS 

Techniques of quantitative analysis useful 
in making business decisions. Topics 
include: decision theory, inventory models, 
network models, forecasting, and other 
selected applications. Students will be 
introduced to computer applications of the 
quantitative models. Prerequisite: Mathe- 
matic 103 or consent of instructor. 

228 

MARKETING PRINCIPLES 

A study of the methods used by business 
and nonprofit organizations to design, price, 
promote and distribute their products and 
services. Topics include new product 



development, advertising, retailing, consumer 
behavior, marketing strategy, ethical issues in 
marketing and others. Readings, case 
studies, library assignments and team 
research projects. 

329 

MARKETING STRATEGY 

A study of the methods used by business 
and nonprofit organizations to analyze 
and select target markets, and then to develop 
strategies for gaining and maintaining these 
customers. Topics include competitive 
strategy, market segmentation, product 
positioning, business demographics and 
marketing-related financial analysis. Read- 
ings, case studies, hbrary assignments and 
computer exercises. Prerequisites: Business 
228 and Math 103, or consent of instructor. 

332 
ADVERTISING 

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of 
promotion. Techniques of analysis and 
control in the use of advertising and publicity 
as tools in developing business strategy. 
Prerequisite: Business 228 or consent of 
instructor. 

335 

LEGAL PRINCIPLES I 

Lectures and analysis of cases on the 
nature, sources, and fundamentals of the law 
in general, and particularly as relating to 
contracts, agency, and negotiable instru- 
ments. Open only to juniors and seniors. 

336 

LEGAL PRINCIPLES II 

Lectures on the fundamentals and history 
of the law relating to legal association, real 
property, wills, and estates. Open only to 
juniors and seniors. 



^k. 



338 

HNANCIAL MANAGEMENT I 

An introduction to working capital man- 
agement and financial analysis and planning. 
Topics are covered through readings, cases 
and problem solving in the areas of decisions 
on current asset and liability structures, cash 
and marketable securities, accounts receiv- 
ables, inventory management and control, 
spontaneous financing, short-term borrowing, 
ratio and financial statement analysis, source 
and use statements, cash flow forecasting, 
and financial statements forecasting. Pre- 
requisites: Mathematics 103, Business 110, 
111, and 223; or consent of instructor. 

339 

HNANCIAL MANAGEMENT II 

A study of capital asset structure and 
long-term financial decisions. Topics are 
covered through readings, cases, and problem 
solving in the areas of capital budgeting, 
including risk and required rates of return, 
leveraging in the firm, concepts of capital 
structures, dividend policy, external financ- 
ing, term and lease financing, long-term debt, 
equity securities, convertible securities and 
warrants. Prerequisite: Business 338 or 
consent of instructor. 

340 

INVESTMENTS 

An introduction to the financial sector of 
the economy and the structure and functions 
of financial markets and the agencies 
involved; brokerage houses and stock 
exchanges; the various types of investments 
available. Techniques used to evaluate 
financial securities. Also covered are recent 
developments in investment theory. Pre- 
requisite: Business 338 or consent of 
instructor. 

439 

BUSINESS PRACTICUM 

This course provides students with 
practical work experience with local compa- 



nies and organizations. Students work 10-12 
hours per week for their sponsor organiza- 
tions, in addition to attending a weekly 
seminar on management topics relevant to 
their work assignments. Since enrollment is 
limited by the available number of positions, 
students must apply directly to the business 
department before preregistration to be 
eligible for the course. Majors only 
and consent of instructor. 

440 

MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 

Structural characteristics and functional 
relationships of a business organization as 
well as the problems encountered in coordi- 
nating the internal resources of a firm. 
Emphasis on administrative efficiency and 
procedures. 

441 

BUSINESS POLICIES 

Planning, organization, and control of 
business operations; setting of goals; 
coordination of resources, development of 
policies. Analysis of strategic decisions 
encompassing all areas of a business, and the 
use and analysis of control measures. Em- 
phasis on both the internal relationship of 
various elements of production, finance, 
marketing, and personnel, and the relation- 
ship of the business entity to external stimuli. 
Readings, cases, and games. Prerequisite: 
Business 223, 228, 329. 338, 339, and 440, or 
consent of instructor. Seniors only. 

442 

PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the managerial prob- 
lems of recruiting, selecting, training, and 
retraining the human resources of the firm. 
Emphasis is placed on the interrelationship of 
personnel policies with management objec- 
tives and philosophies in such areas as fringe 
benefits, wage and salary policies, union 
activities, and health and safety. 



A 



443 

RETAIL MANAGEMENT I 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
retailing firm. Competitive strategy develop- 
ment through store location, layout, adminis- 
tration organization, buying, and pricing. 
Cases, reading, and papers. Prerequisite: 
Business 228 or consent of instructor. 

445 

MARKETING RESEARCH 

This is a study of the principles and prac- 
tices of Marketing Research, The focus is on 
the development and application of Market- 
ing Research Studies. Topics covered 
include selection of a research design, project 
planning and scheduling, data specification 
and gathering, quantitative methods to 
analyze data, interpretation of data, and 
research report writing. Reading, cases, and 
research project. Mathematics 103 and 
Business 228 or consent of instructor. 

446 

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the planning, organiza- 
tion, and controlling of operations in a 
production facility. The course also incorpo- 
rates quantitative techniques and computer 
applications used in the production and 
operations management environment. Topics 
include capacity and layout planning, facility 
location analysis, job design and work 
measurement, production scheduling, materi- 
als requirement planning models, and quality 
controls. Students will engage in the actual 
design of an inventory status file and MRP 
system. Prerequisite: Business 223 or 
consent of instructor. 

447 

CREATIVE ADVERTISING 

A workshop concerned with theme, copy 
and effective presentation of advertisements 
for print media, radio, and direct mail. 
Primarily an exploration of creativity through 
analysis of works of artists and writers with 



application to practical advertising, and 
tailored to the interests of individual students. 
May term. Prerequisite: Business 332 or 
consent of instructor. 

448 

SALES SEMINAR 

The role of selling in the economy. The 
art of creative selling; application of theories 
from the behavioral sciences to selling 
through the analysis of sales situations and 
techniques. Prerequisite: Business 228 or 
consent of instructor. 

449 

MANAGING THE SMALL BUSINESS 

How the potential businessman proceeds 
in establishing, operating, and profiting from 
a small business operation. Considered and 
analyzed are such aspects as marketing, 
managing, financing, promoting, insuring, 
establishing, developing, and staffing the 
small retail, wholesale service, and manufac- 
turing firm. May term. Prerequisite: 
Business 111, 228, and 338 or consent of 
instructor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typical examples are marketing analysis 
for a paper products firm, planning a branch 
store, hotel and real estate management, 
banking and insurance. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 
Examples of recent studies are: the 
economic impact of a college on a commu- 
nity; a marketing strategy for a local firm 
entering the consumer market. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 

A recent project was a study of the 
evolution of anti-trust legislation in the 
United States. 



^Sl 



Chemistry 

Professor: Franz (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Berkheimer, 
McDonald, Wolfskill 



A major in chemistry consists of Chem- 
istry 110-11 1, 220-221, 330-331, 332 and 
333; Physics 225-226; Mathematics 128, 129 
and one of the following courses: Mathemat- 
ics 103, 231, 238, 332, or Computer Science 
125. Mathematics 23 1 and 238 and French 
or German are strongly recommended for 
students planning on graduate study in chem- 
istry. To be certified in secondary education, 
chemistry majors must also pass two biology 
courses numbered 1 10 or higher. 

The Department is approved by the 
American Chemical Society (ACS) to certify 
those students whose programs meet or 
exceed requirements established by the ACS. 
Students who wish to earn ACS certification 
must complete the major described above, as 
well as Chemistry 443 and two courses from 
Chemistry 440, 442, 447, and 480 (or 490). 
Students who complete the ACS -certified 
degree are eligible for admission as members 
to the American Chemical Society following 
graduation. 

A minor in Chemistry requires completion 
of four courses numbered 220 or higher; at 
least one must be taken from each of the 
following groups: Group A (220-221, 440, 
442, 444, 447) and Group B (226 or 332, 
330-331, 333, 439, 443). Named minors in 
specialized areas may be designed by 
students with departmental approval. 

108 

CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES 

An introduction to the principles of 
inorganic chemistry. Topics include atomic 
and molecular structure, nomenclature, gases, 
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equilib- 
rium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiometry. 
The approach is primarily descriptive with 



illustrations drawn mostly from the health 
sciences. Along with Chemistry 115, this 
course is designed for those students who 
require only two semesters of chemistry, and 
is not intended for students planning to enroll 
in chemistry courses numbered 200 or above. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, and 
one three-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: High school algebra or 
Math 005. Not open for credit to students 
who have received credit for Chemistry 110. 

110 

GENERAL CHEMISTRY I 

A quantitative introduction to the con- 
cepts and models of chemistry. Topics 
include stoichiometry, atomic and molecular 
structure, nomenclature, bonding, thermo- 
chemistry, gases, solutions, and chemical 
reactions. The laboratory introduces the 
student to methods of separation, purifica- 
tion, and identification of compounds accord- 
ing to their physical properties. This course 
is designed for students who plan to major in 
one of the sciences. Three hours lecture, one 
hour discussion and one three-hour labora- 
tory period each week. Prerequisite: 
Placement in Chemistry 110 is determined in 
part by a student's score on the mathematics 
placement examination. Not open for credit 
to students who have received credit for 
Chemistry 108, except by permission of the 
Chemistry Department. 

HI 

GENERAL CHEMISTRY II 

A continuation of Chemistry 110, with 
emphasis placed on the foundations of 
analytical, inorganic, and physical chemistry. 
Topics include kinetics, general and ionic 
equilibria, acid-base theory, electrochemistry, 
thermodynamics, nuclear chemistry, coordi- 
nation chemistry, and descriptive inorganic 
chemistry of selected elements. The labora- 
tory treats aspects of quantitative and qualita- 
tive inorganic analysis. Three hours lecture, 
one hour discussion, and one three-hour 



^m. 



laboratory period each week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 110 or consent of the Chemistry 
Department. 

115 

BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A descriptive study of the compounds of 
carbon. This course will illustrate the 
principles of organic chemistry with material 
relevant to students in medical technology, 
biology, nursing, forestry, education and the 
humanities. Topics include nomenclature, 
alkanes, arenes, functional derivatives, amino 
acids and proteins, carbohydrates and other 
naturally occurring compounds. This course 
is designed for students who require only one 
semester of organic chemistry. Three hours 
lecture, one hour discussion, and one three- 
hour laboratory period each week. Prerequi- 
site: Chemistry 108 or 110. Not open for 
credit to students who have received credit 
for Chemistry 220. 

220-221 

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A systematic study of the compounds of 
carbon, including both aliphatic and aromatic 
series. The laboratory work introduces the 
student to simple fundamental methods of 
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis. 
Three hours lecture and one four-hour 
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 111. 

226 

CLINICAL ANALYSIS 

A presentation of selected wet-chemical 
and instrumental methods of quantitative 
analysis with an orientation toward clinical 
applications in medical technology. Topics 
include: general methods and calculations; 
solutions; titrations; photometric analyses 
(colorimetric, atomic absorption, flame 
emission); electrochemical methods (ion- 
selective electrodes, coulometry), automa- 
tion. Lecture, recitation, and laboratory 
daily. Prerequisite: Chemistry 110-111 or 



consent of instructor. May not be taken for 
credit following Chemistry 332. May 
term only. 

330-331 

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental principles of 
theoretical chemistry and their applications. 
The laboratory work includes techniques in 
physiochemical measurements. Three hours 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 111, 
Mathematics 129, and one year of physics 
or consent of instructor. 

332 

ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental methods of 
gravimetric, volumetric and elementary 
instrumental analysis together with practice 
in laboratory techniques and calculations of 
these methods. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 111 or consent 
of instructor. 

333 

ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A study of modem theories of atomic and 
molecular structure and their relationship to 
the chemistry of selected elements and their 
compounds. Three hours lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory period each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 330, Mathematics 
129, and one year of physics or consent of 
instructor. 

439 

INTRODUCTION TO 
QUANTUM MECHANICS 

After presenting the origin, basic con- 
cepts, and formulation of quantum mechanics 
with emphasis on its physical meaning, the 
free particle, simple harmonic oscillator, and 
central-force problems will be investigated. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
perturbation theory will be covered. The 



A 



elegant operator formalism of quantum 
mechanics will conclude the course. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 231, either Chemistry 
321 or Physics 226, and consent of instruc- 
tor. Cross-listed as Physics 439. 

440 

ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

Theory and application of modem 
synthetic organic chemistry. Topics may 
include oxidation-reduction processes, 
carbon-carbon bond forming reactions, 
functional group transformations, and multi- 
step syntheses of natural products (antibiot- 
ics, antitumor agents, and antiviral agents). 
Three hours lecture and one four-hour lab- 
oratory period. Prerequisite: Chemistry 221. 

442 

SPECTROSCOPY AND 
MOLECULAR STRUCTURE 

Theory and application of the identifica- 
tion of organic compounds. Special empha- 
sis will be placed on the utilization of 
spectroscopic techniques (iH-NMR,i3 C- 
NMR, IR, UV-VIS, and MS). Three hours 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisites: Chemistry 221, 
Chemistry 331, or consent of instructor. 

443 

ADVANCED ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of advanced analytical methods 
with emphasis on chromatographic, electro- 
chemical, and spectroscopic methods of 
instrumental analysis. Three hours lecture 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 331 and 332 
or consent of instructor. 

444 

BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of 
carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; 
and biochemical control mechanisms. 



including allosteric control, induction, 
repression, signal transduction as well as the 
various types of inhibitive control mecha- 
nisms. Prerequisite: Chemistry 221 or 115 
or consent of instructor. Cross-listed as 
Biology 444. 

447 

POLYMER CHEMISTRY 

An introduction to the synthesis, charac- 
terization, and applications of high molecular 
weight materials, i.e., macro-molecules. 
Special emphasis will be given to synthetic 
polymer systems. Three hours lecture, one 
four-hour lab per week. Prerequisites: Chem- 
istry 221 and 330, or consent of instructor. 

348 & 448 

CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM 

A seminar in which faculty, students and 
invited professional chemists discuss their 
own research activities or those of others 
which have appeared in recent chemical 
literature. Prerequisite: Three semesters of 
non-credit Chemistry Colloquium taken 
during the junior and senior years. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

The student will ordinarily work under 
supervision in an industrial laboratory and 
submit a written report on the project. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

The student will ordinarily work on a 
laboratory research project and will write a 
thesis on the work. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 

The student will ordinarily work on a 
laboratory research project with emphasis 
being on the student's showing initiative and 
making a scholarly contribution. A thesis 
will be written. 



JSIl 




Criminal Justice 

Assistant Professor: Strauser (Coordinator) 

1 his major is designed to acquaint 
students with the American criminal justice 
system and to provide an understanding of 
the social, psychological, philosophical, and 
political contexts within which the system of 
criminal justice functions. Its aim is to 
develop students' intellectual and scientific 
skills in raising and attempting to answer 
important questions about the system of 
justice and its place in society. The program 
offers opportunity for intern experience in the 
field, and prepares for careers in the areas of 
law enforcement, probation and parole, 
prisons, and treaunent services. 

The major has two tracks. Track I 
prepares for careers in law enforcement. 
Track II prepares for careers in corrections. 



Track I - Law Enforcement. 

The major consists of 10 courses, distrib- 
uted as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal justice 
(three courses): 

Introduction to the Criminal Justice System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 115) 
Introduction to Law Enforcement 
(Sociology and Anthropology 223) 
The American Prison System (Sociology 
and Anthropology 339) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context of the 
justice system (seven courses): 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthropology 
300) and either Juvenile Delinquency 
(Sociology and Anthropology 221) or 
Racial and Cultural Minorities (Sociology 
and Anthropology 334) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 116) 
(one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 200), Afro- American History 
(History 230) or United States Social and 
Intellectual History Since 1877 (History 
443) (one course) 

Law and Society (Political Science 335) 
and Civil Rights and Liberties (Political 
Science 331) (two courses) Philosophical 
Issues in Criminal Justice (Philosophy 218) 
(one course) 

C. Internship or practicum in law enforce- 
ment. (Recommended but not required 
for the major) 

Track II - Corrections. 

The major consists of 10 courses, distrib- 
uted as follows: 
A. Professional courses in criminal justice 

(three courses): 

Introduction to the Criminal Justice System 

(Sociology and Anthropology 115) 

The American Prison System (Sociology 

and Anthropology 339) 

Introduction to Human Services (Sociology 

and Anthropology 222) 



^^ 



B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context of the 
justice system (seven courses); 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthropology 
300) and either Juvenile Delinquency 
(Sociology and Anthropology 221) or 
Racial and Cultural Minorities (Sociology 
and Anthropology 334) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 116) 
(one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 200), Afro- American History 
(History 230) or United States Social and 
Intellectual History Since 1877 (History 
443) (one course) 

Law and Society (Political Science 335) 
and Civil Rights and Liberties (Political 
Science 331) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal Justice 
(Philosophy 218) (One course) 

C. Internship or practicum in corrections. 
(Recommended but not required for the 
major). Prerequisite: Mathematics 103, 
Psychology 431, and Psychology 239. 
These prerequisites may be waived in 
certain cases by the coordinating 
committee. 

Majors should seek advice concerning 
course selection from members of the 
coordinating committee and should note 
course prerequisites in planning their 
programs. 

A minor in Criminal Justice consists of 
five courses. Required courses include: 
Soc 115, Introduction to Criminal Justice; 
and any four other courses in the Criminal 
Justice major listed above, at least three of 
which must be numbered 200 or above. To 
receive credit for a minor in Criminal 
Justice, a student must maintain a 
minimum 2.0 cum in courses completed 
for the minor. 




Economics 



Professor: Opdahl 
Assistant Professor: Madresehee 
(Chairperson) 

1 he major has two tracks. Track I is 
designed for the student whose primary 
interest lies in business management; Track 
II is designed to provide a broad understand- 
ing of economic, social, and business 
problems. In addition to preparing students 
for a career in business or government, this 
track provides an excellent background for 
graduate or professional studies. 

Track I - Managerial Economics requires 
Economic 1 10, 1 11, 332, and either 330 or 
441; Business 110 and 111 or Accounting 
110 and 220; Business 338 and 339, plus two 
electives from Economics 220, 225, 229, 
230, 331, 335, 337, 440, 443, and Business 



A 



440. Business 340 (Investments) may be sub- 
stituted for Business 339 (Financial 
Management II). 

Track II - General Economics requires 
Economics 110 and 111, 331, 440, 330 or 

441, and three other courses in economics. 
Depending on their academic and career 
interests, students are encouraged to select a 
minor in another department such as political 
science, philosophy, or history. 

In addition, the following courses are 
recommended: all majors - Math 103 and 
Business 223: majors planning graduate 
work - Math 1 12 and 128; Track II majors - 
Business 1 10 and 1 1 1 or Accounting 1 10 
and 220. 

A minor in Economic requires the 
completion of Economics 110 and 111 and 
three other economics courses numbered 200 
or above, or any four economics courses 
numbered 200 or above. 

110 

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS I 

Macroeconomics deals with problems of 
the economic system as a whole. What 
influences the level of national income and 
employment? What is inflation and why do 
we have it? What is the role of government 
in a modern capitalistic system? How does 
business organize to produce the goods and 
services we demand? How are the American 
financial and banking systems organized? 
What is the nature of American unionism? 
What are the elements of government finance 
and fiscal policy? 

Ill 

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS II 

This course focuses upon microeconomics 
and selected current economic problems. It 
deals with the relatively small units of the 
economy such as the firm and the family. 
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses how 
business firms decide what and how much to 



produce and how goods and services are 
priced in different types of markets. Also 
considers such problems as economic growth, 
international trade, poverty, discrimination, 
ecology, and alternative economic systems. 

220 

MONEY AND BANKING 

Covers business fluctuations and mone- 
tary and fiscal policy; the financial organiza- 
tion of society; the banking system; credit 
institutions; capital markets, and international 
financial relations. Prerequisite: 
Economics 110. 

Ill 

COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS 

A comparative analysis of the underlying 
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the 
performance of selected economic systems. 
Alternate years. 

IIA 

URBAN PROBLEMS 

The application of economic theory to the 
study of significant social, political, and 
economic problems associated with urbaniza- 
tion, including poverty, employment, educa- 
tion, crime, health, housing, land use and the 
environment, transportation, and public 
finance. Analysis of solutions offered. 
Alternate years. 

225 

ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

A study of the relationship between 
environment decay and economic growth, 
with particular reference to failures of the 
price and property-rights systems; application 
of cost/benefit analysis, measures aimed at 
the creation of an ecologically viable 
economy. 



A 



226 

DEVELOPMENT OF LESS 
DEVELOPED COUNTRffiS 

A study of the theories and problems of 
capital accumulation, allocation of resources, 
technological development, growth, planning 
techniques, and institutions and international 
relations encountered by the developing 
nations. Alternate years. 

229 

BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING 
An introduction to the natiu^e and history 
of business fluctuations, the tools used in 
aggregate analysis, theories that seek to 
explain the cycle, and techniques used in 
forecasting economic activity. Prerequisite: 
Economics 110 or permission of the instruc- 
tor. Alternative years. 

230 

ECONOMETRICS 

Econometric models provide one of the 
most useful and necessary sets of tools for 
decision making. By using a variety of 
modem statistical methods, econometrics 
helps us to estimate economic relationships, 
test different economic behaviors, and 
forecast different economic variables. Pre- 
requisites: Mathematic 103, Economics 110 
and HI, or consent of the instructor. 
Alternate years. 

330 

INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory regarding consumer demand, produc- 
tion costs and theory, profit maximization, 
market structures, and the determinants of 
returns to the factors of production. Pre- 
requisites: Economics 110 and 111. 
Alternate years. 

331 

INTERMEDL\TE MACROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory and practice with regard to business 



fluctuation, national income accounting, the 
determination of income and employment 
levels, and the use of monetary and fiscal 
policy. Prerequisites: Economics 110 and 
111. Alternate years. 

332 

GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY 

An analytical survey of government's 
efforts to maintain competition through 
antitrust legislation; to supervise acceptable 
cases of private monopoly through public 
utility regulation and via means of regulatory 
commissions, and to encourage or restrain 
various types of private economic activities. 
Prerequisites: Economics 110 and 111 or 
consent of instructor. 

335 

LABOR PROBLEMS 

The history of organized labor in the 
United States, including the structure of 
unions, employers' opposition to union, the 
role of government in labor-management re- 
lations, the economic impact of unions. 
Alternate years. 

337 

PUBLIC FINANCE 

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the 
public sector, including the development, 
concepts, and theories of public expenditures, 
taxation, and debt at all levels of American 
government. Includes also the use of fiscal 
policy as an economic control device. 
Prerequisite: Economics 110 and 111 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

440 

HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 

A discussion of the origins, development, 
and significance of the economic ideas 
embodied in the works of Smith, Marx, 
Schumpeter, Keynes, and others. Prerequi- 
sites: Economics 110 and 111 or consent of 
instructor. Alternative years. 



^^ 



441 

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

The application of economic theory and 
methodology to the solution of business 
problems. Subjects include: optimizing 
techniques, risk analysis, demand theory, 
production theory, cost theory, linear pro- 
gramming, capital budgeting, market struc- 
tures, and the theory of pricing. Prerequi- 
sites: Economics 110 and 111. Some under- 
standing of differential calculus is 
recommended. 

443 

INTERNATIONAL TRADE 

A study of the principles, theories, 
development, and policies concerning 
international economic relations, with 
particular reference to the United States. 
Subjects covered include: U.S. commercial 
policy and its development, international 
trade theory, tariffs and other protectionist 
devices, international monetary system and 
its problems, balance of payments issues. 
Alternative years. Prerequisites: Economics 
110 and 111. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically off campus in business, bank- 
ing, or government, supervised by assigned 
employee of sponsoring organization. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Superior students may select independent 
study in various courses, particularly in 
preparation for graduate school. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 




Education 



Assistant Professors: Conrad (Chairperson), 

Hungerford 
Visiting Instructor: Bossert 
Part-time Instructors: Shivetts, Mosser, 

Salvatori, Straub 

1 he Education Department offers Penn- 
sylvania approved teacher certification pro- 
grams in elementary and secondary educa- 
tion, as well as a school nurse certification 
program. 

Student seeking secondary certification 
must complete Education 200 and Psychol- 
ogy 338, as prerequisites to the professional 
semester (Education 446, 447, 449), as well 
as the necessary subject area courses. 
Students may earn secondary certification in 
one or more of the following areas: Art 
(K-12). biology, chemistry, English, French 
(K-12), general science, German (K-12), 
mathematics, music (K-12), physics, 
school nurse (K-12), social studies, and 
Spanish (K-12). 



A 



Students seeking elementary certification 
must complete Education 200, Psychology 
338, Mathematics 205, Education 000, 341, 
342, 343, and 344 as prerequisite to the 
professional semester (Education 445, 447 
and 448). 

Students interested in the teacher- 
education program should refer to the 
Teacher Education Handbook, which 
specifies the current requirements for cert- 
ification. Early consultation with a member 
of the Education Department is strongly 
recommended. Application for the profes- 
sional semester must be made during the 
spring semester of the junior year. The 
Department of Education admits to the 
professional semester only those applicants 
who are in good academic standing, have 
satisfactorily completed the participation 
requirements, have paid the student teaching 
fee, and have received a positive evaluation 
based upon: (a) letters from the student's 
major department; (b) a screening interview 
conducted by the Education Department; and 
(c) a writing sample from the student. Major 
departments have different criteria for their 
recommendations. Therefore, the student 
should consult with the chairperson of the 
major department about those requirements. 

Additional teacher intern program 
information can be found on page 28. 

000 

SEMINAR IN ART, MUSIC, 
PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Each elementary student teacher attends a 
series of 24 seminars conducted prior to 
student teaching, during the fall semester of 
the senior year. These seminars, conducted 
by certified public school personnel, empha- 
size activities and knowledge which are 
helpful in the self-contained elementary 
classroom. Non-credit course. 



200 

INTRODUCTION TO THE 
STUDY OF EDUCATION 

A study of teaching as a profession with 
emphasis on the economic, social, political, 
and religious conditions which influence 
American schools and teachers. Considera- 
tion is given to the school environment, the 
curriculum, and the children with the 
intention that students will examine more ra- 
tionally their own motives for entering the 
profession. 

232 

INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA 

AND COMMUNICATIONS 

A study of the value, design, construction, 
and application of the visual and auditory 
aids to learning. Practical experience in the 
handling of audio-visual equipment and 
materials is provided. Application of audio- 
visual techniques. Application of the visual 
and auditory aids to learning. Students will 
plan and carry out actual teaching assign- 
ments utilizing various A-V devices. 

239 

PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM 

An examination of the various curricula of 
the public schools and there relationships to 
current practices. Special attention will be 
given to the meaning and nature of the 
curriculum, the desirable outcomes of the 
curriculum, conflicting and variant concep- 
tions of curricula content, modem techniques 
of curricular construction, criteria for the 
evaluation of curricula, the curriculum as a 
teaching instrument Emphasis will be 
placed upon the curriculum work within the 
teaching field of each individual. 

341 

TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

Studies and experiences to develop a basic 
understanding of the structure, concepts, and 
processes of anthropology, economics, 



A 



geography, history, political science, and 
sociology as they relate to the elementary 
school social-science curriculum. Practical 
applications, demonstrations of methods, and 
the development of integrated teaching units 
using tests, reference books, films, and other 
teaching materials. Observation and 
participation in Lycoming County elementary 
schools. Prerequisites: Education 200 and 
Psychology 338 or consent of instructor. 

342 

TEACfflNG SCIENCE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

Science methods and materials interpret- 
ing children's science experiences and 
guiding the development of the scientific 
concepts. A study of the science content of 
the curriculum, its material, and use. Obser- 
vation and participation in Lycoming County 
elementary schools. Prerequisite: Education 
200 and Psychology 338 or consent of 
instructor. 

343 

TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS AND 
CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. 

A course designed to consider the princi- 
pal means of communication, oral and 
written, including both practical and creative 
uses. Attention will be given to listening, 
speaking, written expression, linguistics and 
grammar, spelling, and handwriting. Stress 
will be placed upon the interrelatedness 
of the language arts. Children's literature 
will be explored as a vehicle for developing 
creative characteristics in children and for 
ensuring an appreciation of the creative 
writing of others. Observation and participa- 
tion in Lycoming County elementary schools. 
Prerequisite: Education 200 and Psychology 
338 or consent of instructor. 



344 

TEACHING READING IN 

THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A basic course in the philosophy and 
rationale for the implementation of an 
elementary developmental-reading program 
from kindergarten through sixth grade. 
Emphasis is upon designing a reading 
instructional program which reflects the 
nature of the learning process and recognizes 
principles of child development through 
examination of the principles, problems, 
methods, and materials used in elementary 
reading programs. Observation and partici- 
pation in Lycoming County elementary 
schools. Prerequisite: Psychology 338, 
Education 200. or consent of instructor. 

The Elementary Professional Semester 

The following courses comprise the 
Elementary Professional Semester: 

Education 445 Methods of Teaching in the 
Elementary School 

Education 447 Problems in Contemporary 
American Education 

Education 448 Student Teaching in the 

Elementary School 

445 

METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE ELE- 
MENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

The course emphasizes the relationship 
between the theoretical studies of physical, 
social and cognitive development and the 
elementary classroom environment. Particu- 
lar consideration will be given to the appro- 
priate age and developmental level of the 
students with an emphasis upon selection and 
utilization of methods in all the elementary 
subject areas, including art and music. 
Specific attention is given to the development 
of strategies for structuring lesson plans, for 
maintaining classroom control, and for 
overall classroom management. Direct 



A 



application is made to the individual student- 
teaching experience. Prerequisites: Mathe- 
matics 105, Education 341,342, 343, and 
344, and pre-student teaching participation. 

447 

PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

Seminar on the issues, problems, and 
challenges encountered by teachers in the 
American public schools, especially those 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

448 

STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

Professional experience under the supervi- 
sion of a selected cooperating teacher in a 
public elementary school in Lycoming 
County. Student teachers are required to 
follow the calendar of the school district to 
which they are assigned. Two units 
maximum. 

Students are considered full time when 
enrolled in the Professional Semester. Those 
students needing an additional course must 
comply with the standards stated in the 
College catalog. 

The Secondary Professional Semester 

The following courses comprise the Sec- 
ondary Professional Semester: 



Education 446 



Education 447 



Education 449 



Methods of Teaching in the 

Secondary School 

Problems in Contemporary 

American Education 

Student Teaching in the 

Secondary School 



446 

METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

A study of materials, methods, and tech- 
niques with emphasis on the student's 
major. Stress is placed on the selection and 
utilization of visual and auditory aids to 
learning. Students teach demonstration 
lessons in the presence of the instructor and 
the members of the class and observe 
superior teachers in Lycoming County 
secondary schools. Prerequisite: Education 
200, Psychology 338, and pre-student teach- 
ing participation. 

447 

PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

Seminar on the issues, problems, and 
challenges encountered by teachers in the 
American public schools, especially those 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

449 

STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

Professional laboratory experience under 
the supervision of a selected cooperating 
teacher in a public secondary school in 
Lycoming County. Student teachers are 
required to follow the calendar of the school 
district to which they are assigned. 
Two units maximum. 

Students are considered full time when 
enrolled in the Professional Semester. Those 
students needing an additional course must 
comply with the standards stated in the 
College catalog. 



A 




English 



Professors: Jensen (Chairperson), Rife 
Assistant Professors: Austin, Bidlake, 

Hawkes, Moses 
Part-time Instructors: Keller, Logue 

1 he department offers two programs 
leading to the major in English: 

Track I - English Major in Literature 

This track is designed for students who 
choose English as a liberal arts major that 
prepares them for a wide range of career 
options; for students who choose English as 
their subject area for elementary certification 
or who wish to earn secondary certification in 
English; for students who wish to improve 
their verbal and analytic ability in prepara- 
tion for a specific career, such as technical 
writing, business, or law; and for students 
who intend to pursue graduate study in 
British or American literature. 



A minimum often courses is required for 
Track I. Required courses are English 217, 
220, 221, 222, and 223; two courses selected 
from English 311, 312, 313, 314, and 315; 
one from English 335 and 336; and two 
electives from among courses numbered 215 
and above. 

Students who wish to earn secondary 
certification must complete a minimum of 
twelve courses in English, Required courses 
in English are 217, 220, 221, 222, 223, 335, 
336, and 338; three courses selected from 
31 1 , 312, 3 13, 3 14, and 315; and one elective 
from among courses numbered 215 and 
above. Required courses outside English are 
Education 200, 446, 447, and 449; Psychol- 
ogy 110 and 338; and Theatre 100. 

Students who intend to pursue graduate 
study in British or American literatiu^e should 
complete the twelve English courses speci- 
fied for secondary certification. 

Track II - English Major 
in Creative Writing 

This track is designed for students who 
aspire to careers as professional writers, as 
editors, and as publishers; for students who 
plan to continue studies in an MFA or MA 
program; or for students who would like to 
discover their creative potential while 
pursuing a fundamental liberal arts education. 

A minimum of eleven courses is required 
for Track II. Required courses are English 
225 and 240; three courses selected from 
English 220, 221, 222, and 223; one from 
English 311, 312, 313, 314 and 315; one 
from English 331 and 332; one from English 
335 and 336; two from English 341, 342, 
441, and 442 (note prerequisites); and one 
from English 411 and 412. 

The department offers two minors in 
English: 

Literature: Five courses in literature at the 
200 level or above, at least 
three of which must be num- 
bered 300 or above. 



A 



Writing: Five courses, four of which are 
chosen from English 217, 240, 
321,322, and 338; plus one 
writing-intensive course in 
literature at the 300 level. 

049 

DEVELOPMENTAL 
READING AND WRITING 

Classroom and workshop instruction in 
basic reading and writing skills. Emphasis on 
reading comprehension, spelling, grammar, 
and sentence structure; and on organizing and 
writing the detailed paragraph and expository 
theme. Required study skills lab offered 
through Academic Resource Center. 

One unit grade of "P" will be assigned 
when the student has successfully completed 
all of the work in the course. Required of, 
and limited to, those who have not been 
exempted from English 049. 

106 

COMPOSITION 

Extensive practice in analytical writing. 
Special emphasis on developing the compos- 
ing skills needed to articulate and defend a 
position in various situations requiring the 
use of written English. 

215 

INTRODUCTION TO 
LITERARY INTERPRETATION 

Practice in the methods of close reading 
and formal analysis. Identification of 
primary elements and structures of literary 
representation. Literature chosen for study 
will vary. Prerequisite: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. 

Ill 

CRITICAL WRITING SEMINAR 

Brief introduction to criticism as a 
discipline, followed by workshop training in 
writing critical papers on the major literary 
genres. Prerequisite: Grade ofC + or better 
in English 106 or consent of instructor. 



220 

BRITISH LITERATURE I 

Literary forms, themes, and authors from 
the Anglo-Saxon period through the 18th 
century. Emphasis on such writers as 
Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton, 
Swift, Pope, and Johnson; representative 
works from Beowulf \o Bumey's Evelina. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of in- 
structor. 

Ill 

BRITISH LITERATURE II 

Literary movements and authors from the 
beginnings of Romanticism to the end of the 
19th century. Particular emphasis on such 
writers as Wordsworth, Shelley, Keats, 
Tennyson, Browning, Carlyle, Arnold, 
Hardy, and Yeats. Prerequisite: English 106 
or consent of instructor. 

222 

AMERICAN LITERATURE I 

Survey of American literature from the 
beginning of the Civil War, with major 
emphasis on the writers of the Romantic 
period: Poe, Emerson, Thoreau, Hawthorne, 
Melville, Dickinson, and Whitman. Pre- 
requisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. 

223 

AMERICAN LITERATURE II 

Survey of American literature from the 
Civil War to the present, emphasizing such 
authors as Twain, James, Crane, Hemingway, 
Faulkner, Frost, Eliot, Stevens, O'Neill, and 
Williams. Prerequisite: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. 

lis 

CLASSICAL LITERATURE 

A study, in translation, of Greek and 
Roman works that have influenced Western 
writers. Literary forms studied include epic, 
drama, satire, and love poetry. Writers 



A 



studied include Homer, Aeschylus, So- 
phocles, Euripides, Virgil, Juvenal, Horace, 
Lucretius, and Ovid. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. 

240 

INTRODUCTION TO 
CREATIVE WRITING 

Workshop discussions, structured exer- 
cises, and readings in contemporary literature 
to provide practice and basic instruction in 
the writing and evaluation of poetry and 
fiction. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent 
of instructor. 

311 

MEDIEVAL LITERATURE 

Readings in Old and Middle English 
poetry and prose from Bede's Ecclesiastical 
History to Malory's Arthurian romance. 
Study of lyric, narrative, drama, and romance 
with emphasis on the cultural context from 
which these forms emerge. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

312 

RENAISSANCE LITERATURE 

An examination of themes and literary 
forms of the Renaissance. Authors studied 
will include Donne, Erasmus, Marlowe, 
More, Shakespeare, Skelton, Sidney, Spenser, 
and Surrey. Prerequisite: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

313 

RESTORATION AND 
18TH-CENTURY LITERATURE 

Consideration of selected themes, writers, 
or modes of Restoration and 18th-century 
literature (1660-1800) with emphasis on the 
social, political, and intellectual life of that 
era. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 



314 

ROMANTIC LITERATURE 

Concentrated study in the writers, texts, 
and themes of the Romantic period (1789- 
1832) with emphasis on the social, political, 
and intellectual life of that era. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

315 

VICTORIAN LITERATURE 

Concentrated study in the writers, texts, 
and themes of the Victorian period (1832- 
1901) with emphasis on the social, political, 
and intellectual life of that era. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

321 

ADVANCED WRITING: 
TECHNICAL AND PROFESSIONAL 

A course providing practice in report and 
technical writing, proposals, and other areas 
where competence will be expected in the 
business and scientific worlds. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

322 

ADVANCED WRITING: 

THE CREATIVE ESSAY 

A course in which students from all disci- 
plines learn to explore and define themselves 
through the essay, a form used to express the 
universal through the particular and the 
personal. Readings will include essayists 
from Montaigne to Gould. Prerequisite: 
Grade ofC+ or better in English 106 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



A 



331 

20TH-CENTURY FICTION 

Examination of the novels and short 
fiction of such major writers as Conrad, 
Woolf, Joyce, Faulkner, Fowles, and Na- 
bokov, with special emphasis on the relation- 
ship of their works to concepts of modernism. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. 

332 

20TH-CENTURY POETRY 

Studies in the themes and visions of 
modem and contemporary poets including 
Yeats, Eliot, Stevens, Frost, Moore, Lowell, 
Bishop, and Rich. Prerequisite: English 106 
or consent of instructor. 

333 

THE NOVEL 

An examination of British and American 
works from the 18th century to the present, 
focusing on the novel's ability — since its 
explosive inception — to redefine its own 
boundaries. Prerequisite: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

334 

WOMEN AND LITERATURE 

An examination — literary, social, and 
historical — of selected British and Ameri- 
can literature by women, designed to identify 
those elements which distinguish women's 
particular contribution to the literary canon. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

335 
CHAUCER 

A study of the major works with emphasis 
on The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and 
Criseyde. Some attention to language study 
and to the traditions out of which Chaucer's 
works arose. Prerequisite: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



336 

SHAKESPEARE 

A study of representative plays in the 
context of Shakespeare's life and times. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

338 

LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS OF 
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 

Introduction to methods of analyzing 
spoken and written English. Classroom 
work supported by weekly tutorials, in which 
the student gains practical experience in 
identifying, diagnosing, and correcting basic 
communications problems. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

341 

POETRY WORKSHOP I 

An intermediate workshop focusing on the 
writing of poetry and methods of analysis. 
Prerequisite: Grade ofB of better in English 
240 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

342 

nCTION WORKSHOP I 

An intermediate course in the writing of 
short fiction in a workshop environment, 
where the student is trained to hear language 
at work. Emphasis on characterization and 
story. Prerequisite: Grade ofB or better in 
English 240 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

411 

FORM AND THEORY: POETRY 

Principles and meter, rhyme, formal 
structure, and traditional and contemporary 
poetic forms will be studied through read- 
ings, discussion, and exercises. Designed to 
enhance skills in both practical criticism and 



A 



in creative writing, this course will pay par- 
ticular attention to theories concerned with 
the relationship between form and content in 
poetry. Prerequisite: English 240 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

412 

FORM AND THEORY: HCTION 

An exploration of such fictional forms as 
drama, short story, novella, tale, yam, novel 
and essay. Serious attention will be given to 
aesthetics and the role and responsibility of 
the writer in society. Prerequisite: English 
240 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

420 

SELECTED WRITERS 

An intensive study of no more than three 
writers, selected on the basis of student and 
faculty interest. Possible combinations 
include: Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner; 
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and 
Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and Dickens; 
Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence; Joyce and 
Yeats. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

All 

TOPICS IN LITERATURE 

Examination of a literary theme, idea, or 
movement as it appears in one or more types 
of literature and as it cuts across various 
epochs. Possible topics include: American 
Novelists and Poets of the Jazz Age and 
Depression; The Bible and Literature; Gothic 
Tradition in American Literature; Mystery 
and Detective Fiction; The Hero in Litera- 
ture. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

441 

POETRY WORKSHOP II 

An advanced workshop in the writing of 
poetry. Students will receive intensive anal- 
ysis of their own work and acquire experi- 
ence in evaluating the work of their peers. 
Prerequisite: English 341. Alternate years. 



442 

nCTION WORKSHOP II 

An advanced course in the writing of short 
fiction. Emphasis on the complexities of 
voice and tone. The student will be encour- 
aged to develop and control his or her 
individual style and produce publishable 
fiction. Prerequisite: English 342. 
Alternate years. 

449 

ADVANCED CRITICISM 

Reading and discussion in the theory and 
history of criticism. Examination of both 
traditional and contemporary ideas about the 
value and nature of literary expression and its 
place in human culture generally. Work in 
the course includes practical as well as theo- 
retical use of the ideas and methods of 
critical inquiry. Prerequisite: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Department provides internships in 
editing, legal work, publishing, and technical 
writing. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Recent studies include the role of Penn- 
sylvania in the fiction of John O'Hara; the 
changing image of women in American art 
and literature (1890-1945); the hard-boiled 
detective novel; contemporary women 
writers; and Milton's use of the Bible in 
Paradise Lost. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 

Recent projects include "The Function of 
the Past in the Fiction of William Faulkner" 
and "Illusion, Order, and Art in the Novels of 
Virginia Woolf" 



A 




Foreign 
Languages and 
Literatures 



Associate Professors: Maples, MacKenzie 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Buedel 
Visiting Instructor: Falk 



Otudy 



of foreign languages and litera- 
tures offers opportunity to explore broadly 
the varieties of human experience and 
thought. It contributes both to personal and 
to international understanding by providing 
competence in a foreign language and a 
critical acquaintance with the literature and 
culture of foreign peoples. A major can serve 
as entree to careers in business, industry, 
government, publishing, education, journal- 
ism, social agencies, translating, and writing. 



It prepares for graduate work in literature or 
linguistics and the international fields of 
politics, commerce, law, health, and area 
studies. 

French, German, and Spanish are offered 
as major fields of study. The major consists 
of at least eight courses numbered 111 
or above. Majors seeking teacher certifica- 
tion and students planning to enter graduate 
school are advised to begin study of a second 
foreign language. The department encour- 
ages the development in breadth of programs, 
including allied courses from related fields or 
a second major, and also individual or 
established interdisciplinary majors combin- 
ing interest in several literatures or area or 
cross-cultural studies; for example. Interna- 
tional Studies, 20th Century Studies, the 
Major in Literature. Majors, teacher certifi- 
cation candidates, and all students are 
encouraged to spend at least a semester of 
study abroad by applying to one of the many 
programs available. The department main- 
tains a file of such programs. 

Courses taught in English: Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures 225 and 338. 

Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 

225 

CONTINENTAL LITERATURE 

A study of such major continental authors 
as Cervantes, Dostoevsky, Chekhov, Dante, 
Ibsen, Proust, Gide, Kafka, Hesse, Goethe, 
Sartre, Camus, Brecht, and lonesco. Works 
read in English translation will vary and be 
organized around a different theme or topic; 
recent topics have been existentialism, 
modernism, drama, the Weimar era, and 20th 
century Scandinavian and German prose 
writers. Prerequisite: None. May be 
repeated for credit with consent of instructor . 
May be accepted toward the English major 
with consent of the Department of English. 



A 



338 

FOREIGN LANGUAGE: 

SYSTEMS AND PROCESS 

Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool 
for language learning and teaching. Discus- 
sion and application of language teaching 
techniques, including work in the language 
laboratory. Designed for future teachers of 
one or more languages and normally taken in 
the junior year. Students should arrange 
through the Department of Education to 
fulfill in the same semester the requirements 
of a participation experience in area schools. 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 

French 

A major consists of a minimum of eight 
courses numbered 111 or above, including at 
least two from 402, 412, 423, and 427. In 
addition, all majors who wish to be certified 
for teaching must pass courses 221-222, and 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 338 (the 
latter course with a C or better). 

A minor in French consists of at least four 
courses numbered 221 and above. Courses 
1 1 1 and 112 may be counted toward the 
minor, but then the minor must consist of at 
least five courses, three of which must be 
numbered 200 and above. 

101-102 

ELEMENTARY FRENCH 

The aim of the course is to acquire the 
fundamentals of the language with a view to 
using them. Regular practice in speaking, 
understanding, and reading. 

111-112 

INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 

Review and development of the funda- 
mental of the language for immediate use in 
speaking, understanding, and reading with a 
view to building confidence in self-expres- 
sion. Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent. 



221-222 

FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Further training in speaking, listening 
comprehension, reading, and writing. In- 
cludes extensive work in grammar. Pre- 
requisite: French 112 or equivalent. 

228 

MODERN FRANCE 

A course designed to familiarize students 
with political and social structure and cultural 
attitudes in contemporary French society. 
Material studied may include such documents 
as newspaper articles, interviews and 
sociological surveys, and readings in history, 
religion, anthropology, and the arts. Some 
attention to the changing education system 
and the family and to events and ideas which 
have shaped French society. May include 
some comparative study of France and the 
United States. Prerequisite: French 221 
or consent of instructor. 

402 

FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800 

Major authors and movements from the 
Medieval, Renaissance, Classical and En- 
lightenment periods. Includes the chanson de 
geste, Villon, Montaigne, Comeille, Racine, 
Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau. Prerequi- 
site: French 222 or 228 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

412 

FRENCH LITERATURE 
OF THE 19TH CENTURY 

The dimensions of the Romantic sensibil- 
ity: Musset, Hugo, Vigny, Balzac, Stendhal. 
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of 
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry of 
Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine, and Ma- 
larme'. Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



A 



423 

MODERN FRENCH THEATRE 

Major trends in French drama from the 
turn of the century to Existentialism and the 
Theatre of the Absurd, Giraudoux, Anouilh, 
Sartre, Camus, Beckett, lonesco. Genet, 
Adamov, and others. Prerequisite: French 
222 or 228 or consent of instructor. 

All 

FRENCH LITERATURE OF 

THE 20TH CENTURY 

Representative poets and novelists of 
modem France. Readings selected form the 
works of authors such as Proust, Gide, 
Aragon, Giono, Mauriac, Celine, Malraux, 
Saint-Exupery, Camus, the "new novelists" 
(Robbe-Grillet, Butor, Sarraute, Le Cle'zio), 
and the poetry of ApoUinaire, Valery, the 
Surrealists (Breton, Reverdy, Eluard, Char), 
Saint- John Perse, Supervielle, Pfevert, and 
others. Some attention to works of French- 
speaking African writers. Prerequisite: 
French 222 or 228 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

441 

ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Intensive practice for advanced students 
who wish to improve further their spoken and 
written French. Includes work in oral 
comprehension, phonetics, pronunciation, 
oral and written composition, and translation. 
Prerequisite: One course from French 402, 
412, 423, 427 or consent of instructor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Examples of recent studies in French 
include translation, existentialism, the 
classical period, enlightenment literature, and 
Saint-Exupery. 



490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 

German 

A. major consists of a minimum of eight 
courses numbered 11 1 or above. One unit of 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 225 may 
be included in the major with permission. 
German 431 or German 441 is required of all 
majors. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching must pass German 323 and 325. In 
addition to the eight courses for the major 
they must also pass Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 338 with a grade of C or better. 
All majors are urged to enroll in History 416, 
Music 336, Political Science 220 and 
Theatre 335. 

A minor in German consists of at least 
four courses numbered 200 and above. 
Courses 111 and 1 12 may be counted toward 
the minor, but then the minor must consist of 
at least five courses, three of which must be 
numbered 200 and above. 

101-102 

ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen- 
tals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, under- 
standing, and reading. 

111-112 

INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 

Review and development of fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in speak- 
ing, understanding, and reading with a view 
to building confidence in self-expression. 
Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. 

221-222 

COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW 
AND LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

A two-semester course designed to review 
and develop skills in speaking, listening, 



A 



writing and reading. Grammar and vocabu- 
lary building are stressed with intensive 
review, writing practice and some reading on 
contemporary issues in German-speaking 
countries. As the course progresses, greater 
emphasis is placed on speaking, listening 
comprehension, and translation. 
Some attention is given to the development 
of the language and its relationship to 
English. Prerequisite: German 112 or 
equivalent. 

323 

SURVEY OF GERMAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION I 
Designed to acquaint the student with 
important periods of German literature, 
representative authors, and major cultural 
developments in Germany, Austria, and 
Switzerland. The course deals with Uterature 
and culture from the Early Middle Ages 
through the 18th century. Prerequisite: 
German 222 or consent of instructor. 

325 

SURVEY OF GERMAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION II 
Designed to acquaint the student with 
important periods of German literature, 
representative authors, and major cultural 
developments in Germany, Austria, and 
Switzerland. The course deals with literature 
and culture from the 19th century to the 
present. Prerequisite: German 222 or 
consent of instructor. 

411 

THE NOVELLE 

The German Novelle as a genre relating to 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

421 

GERMAN POETRY 

A study of selected poets or the poetry of 
various literary periods. Possible topics 



include: Romantic poetry, Heine, Rilke, and 
Benn. Prerequisite: German 323 or 325 or 
consent of instructor. 

431 

GOETHE 

A study of the life and works of Goethe. 
Goethe's significance in the Classical period 
and later. Readings in the major works. 
Prerequisite: German 323 or 325 or consent 
of instructor. 

433 

CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA 

The development of das klassische Drama 
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe, 
Kleist, and Schiller. Prerequisite: German 
323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

441 

CONTEMPORARY 
GERMAN LITERATURE 

Representative poets, novelists and 
dramatists of contemporary Germany, 
Switzerland and Austria covering the period 
from 1945 to the present. Readings selected 
from writers such as: Borchert, Boll, Brecht, 
Benn, Frisch, Durrenmatt, Bichsel, Handke, 
Walser, Grass and others. Prerequisite: 
German 323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Examples of recent studies in German 
include Classicism, Germanic 
Mythology, Hermann Hesse, the dramas of 
Frisch and Durrenmatt. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



A 



Greek 

vjreek is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Languages 
requires the completion of Greek 221, 222 
and Hebrew 221 and 222. 

101-102 

NEW TESTAMENT 
GRAMMAR AND READINGS 

Fundamentals of New Testament Greek 
grammar and readings of selected passages of 
the Greek text. Alternate years. 

Ill 

READINGS IN THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS 

A comparative study of the synoptic 
tradition in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 102 
or equivalent. Alternate years. 

Ill 

READINGS IN THE PAULINE EPISTLES 
Selected readings from the letters of Paul 
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 221 or equiva- 
lent. Alternate years. 

Hebrew 

xlebrew is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Languages 
requires the completion of Greek 221, 222 
and Hebrew 221 and 222. 

101-102 

OLD TESTAMENT 
GRAMMAR AND READINGS 

Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew 
grammar and readings of selected passages of 
the Hebrew text. Alternate years. 

Ill 

READINGS IN OLD 
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected narrative portions of the Old Testa- 
ment with special attention being given to 



exegetical questions. The text read varies 
from year to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 102 
or equivalent. Alternate years. 

Ill 

READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC BOOKS 

AND WISDOM LITERATURE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy 
and wisdom literature with special attention 
being given to exegetical questions. The text 
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite: 
Hebrew 221 or equivalent. Alternate years. 



Spanish 



A major consists of eight courses num- 
bered 1 1 1 or above. Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 338 does not count toward the 
major. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching in secondary school must pass 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 338 
(grade of C or better) and Spanish 418. 

A minor in Spanish consists of at least 
four courses numbered 200 and above. 
Courses 1 1 1 and 1 12 may be counted toward 
the minor, but then the minor must consist of 
at least five courses, three of which must be 
numbered 200 and above. 

101-102 

ELEMENTARY SPANISH 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen- 
tals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, under- 
standing, and reading. 

111-112 

INTERMEDIATE SPANISH 

Review and development of fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in speak- 
ing, understanding, reading and writing with 
a view to building confidence in self-expres- 
sion. Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or 
equivalent. 



A 



221-222 

COMPREHENSIVE REVffiW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

This course consists of a thorough review 
of grammar, drills for oral comprehension 
and expression, discussion of readings and 
the writing of compositions. It is designed to 
develop the student's ability to read, write 
and converse in Spanish with confidence. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 112 or equivalent. 

311 

HISPANIC CULTURE 

To introduce students to the Spanish- 
speaking people — their values, customs and 
institutions, with reference to the geographic 
and historical forces governing present-day 
Spain and Spanish America. Prerequisite: 
Spanish 222 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

323 

SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE 

AND CIVILIZATION 

Designed to acquaint the student with 
important periods of Spanish literature, 
representative authors, and major socio- 
economic developments. The course deals 
with the literature from the beginning to the 
present. Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

325 

SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN 

LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 

Designed to acquaint the student with 
important periods of Spanish-American 
literature, representative authors, and major 
socio-economic developments. The course 
deals with the literature, especially the essay 
and poetry, from the 16th century to the 
present. Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



418 

ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Intensive practice for advanced students 
who wish to improve further their spoken and 
written Spanish. Includes work in oral 
comprehension, pronunciation, oral and 
written composition, and translation. Pre- 
requisite: One Spanish course at the 300' s 
level or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

424 

SPANISH LITERATURE 
OF THE GOLDEN AGE 

A study of representative works and 
principal literary figures in the poetry, prose, 
and drama of the 16th and 17th centuries. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 323, 325, or consent of 
instructor. 

426 

MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE 

Readings of important works of drama, 
poetry, and prose from the major periods of 
the 19th and 20th century Spanish and Latin- 
American literature. Prerequisite: Spanish 
323, 325, or consent of instructor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Recent studies include literary, linguistic, 
and cultural topics and themes such as urban 
problems as reflected in the modem novel. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



A 




History 



Professors: Larson (Chairperson), Piper 
Associate Professor: Morris 

A. major consists of 10 courses, includ- 
ing 1 10, 1 1 1, and 449. At least seven courses 
must be taken in the department . The 
following courses may be counted toward 
fulfilling the major requirements: American 
Studies 200, Political Science 439, Religion 
226 and 228. Other appropriate courses 
outside the department may be counted upon 
departmental approval. For history majors 
who student teach in history, the major 
consists of nine courses. In addition to the 
courses listed below, special courses, 
independent study, and honors are available. 
Special courses recently taught and antici- 
pated include a biographical study of Euro- 
pean Monarchs, the European Left, the 
Industrialization and Urbanization of Modem 
Europe, Utopian Movements in America , the 
Peace Movement in America, The Vietnam 



War, and American Legal History. History 
majors are encouraged to participate in the 
internship program. 

Three minors are offered by the Depart- 
ment of History. The following courses are 
required to complete a minor in American 
History: History 125, 126, and three courses 
in American history numbered 200 and 
above. A minor in European History 
requires the completion of History 110, 111 
and three courses in European history 
numbered 200 and above. To obtain a minor 
in History (without national or geographical 
designation), a student must complete six 
courses in history, of which three must be 
chosen from History 110, 111, 125, and 126 
and three must be history courses numbered 
200 and above. 

105 

SELECTED THEMES IN 
WESTERN CIVILIZATION 

A survey of the political, economic, 
social, and cultural values and institutions in 
Western Civilization from the time of 
classical Greece to the present. One-half unit 
of credit. (Not open to students who have 
had History 110 and 111). 

110 

EUROPE 1500-1815 

An examination of the political, social, 
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe 
and its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1500 to 1815. 

Ill 

EUROPE 1815-PRESENT 

An examination of the political, social, 
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe 
and its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1815 to the present 

120 

LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY 

An examination of the native civilization, 
the age of discovery and conquest, Spanish 
colonial policy, the independence move- 



A 



ments, and the development of modem 
institutions and governments in Latin 
America. Alternate years. 

125 

UNITED STATES HISTORY 1601-1877 

A study of the men, measures, and 
movements which have been significant 
in the development of the United States be- 
tween 1607 and 1877. Attention is paid 
to the problems of minority groups as well as 
to majority and national influences. 

126 

UNITED STATES 
HISTORY 1877-PRESENT 

A study of men, measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in the 
development of the United States since 1877. 
Attention is paid to the problems of minority 
groups as well as to majority and national 
influences. 

210 

ANCIENT HISTORY 

A study of the ancient western world, 
including the foundations of the western 
tradition in Greece, the emergence and 
expansion of the Roman state, its experience 
as a republic, and its transformation into the 
Empire. The course will focus on the social 
and intellectual life of Greece and Rome as 
well as political and economic changes. 
Alternate years. 

212 

MEDIEVAL EUROPE 
AND ITS NEIGHBORS 

The history of Europe from the dissolution 
of the Roman Empire to the mid- 15th 
century. The course will deal with the 
growing estrangement of western Catholic 
Europe from the Byzantium and Islam, 
culminating in the Crusades; the rise of the 
Islamic Empire and its later fragmentation; 
the development and growth of feudalism; 
the conflict of empire and papacy, and the 
rise of the towns. Alternate years. 



216 

FRENCH REVOLUTION 
AND NAPOLEON 

An analysis of the political, social, and 
intellectual background of the French Revo- 
lution, a survey of the course of revolutionary 
development, and an estimate of the results 
of the Napoleonic conquests and 
administraUon. Prerequisite: History 110 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

218 

EUROPE IN THE ERA OF 
THE WORLD WARS 

An intensive study of the political, 
economic, social, and cultural history of 
Europe from 1900-1945. Topics include the 
rise of irrationalism, the origins of the First 
World War, the Communist and Fascist 
Revolutions, and the attempts to preserve 
peace before 1939. Prerequisite: History 111 
or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

219 

CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 

An intensive study of the political, 
economic, social, and cultural history of 
Europe since 1945. Topics include the post- 
war economic recovery of Europe, the 
Sovietization of Eastern Europe, the origins 
of the Cold War, decolonization, and the 
flowering of the welfare state. Prerequisite: 
History 111 or consent of instructor. 

222 

HISTORY OF WORLD WAR II 

A comprehensive examination of World 
War II emphasizing the effect of ideological, 
economic, and political forces on the formu- 
lation of military strategy and the conduct of 
operation; the nature and extent of the 
expansion of government powers; and the 
experience of war from the perspective of 
ordinary civilians and military alike. Does 
not count toward distribution. 



A 



226 

COLONIAL AMERICA AND 
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA 

The establishment of British settlements 
on the American continent, their history as 
colonies, the causes and events of the 
American Revolution, the critical period 
following independence, and proposal and 
adoption of the United States Constitution. 
Alternate years. 

230 

AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY 

A study of the experiences and participa- 
tion of Afro- Americans in the United States. 
The course includes historical experiences 
such as slavery, abolition, reconstruction, and 
urbanization. It also raises the issue of the 
development and growth of white racism, and 
the effect of this racism on contemporary 
Afro- American social, intellectual, and 
political life. Alternate years. 

244 

20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 

This course begins with the Progressive 
Era and includes the political, economic, and 
social developments in the 20th centiuy. 
Emphasis will be placed on the domestic and 
international demands which have faced the 
United States in the period following World 
Warn. 

310 

WOMEN IN HISTORY 

An examination of the social, political , 
economic and intellectual experience of 
women in the Western World from ancient 
times to the present. May be taken for either 
one-half unit (section 310A) or full unit (sec- 
(tion 310B); declared majors and prospective 
majors should take the full-unit course, 310B. 

316 

CONFLICT IN WESTERN CIVILIZATION 
An in-depth study of the changing nature 
of war and its relationship to the development 



of Western Civilization since the end of the 
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be 
placed on the role of war in the development 
of the modem nation state and the origins and 
nature of total war. Alternate years. 

320 

DIPLOMATIC HISTORY 
OF EUROPE SINCE 1789 

A survey of the development of the 
European-states system and the relations 
between the European states since the 
beginning of the French Revolution. Pre- 
requisite: History HI or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

322 

THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND 

NATIONALISM., EUROPE 1848-1870 

An in-depth investigation of the crucial 
"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe from 
the revolutions of 1848 through the unifica- 
tion of Germany. The course centers on the 
struggles for power within the major states of 
Europe at this time, and how the vehicle of 
nationalism was used to bring about one type 
of solution. Alternate years. 

328 

AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON 

The theme of the course is the emergence 
of the political and social characteristics that 
shaped modem America. The personalities 
of Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall, John 
Randolph, Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson 
receive special attention. Special considera- 
tion is given to the first and second party 
systems, the decline in community cohesive- 
ness, the westward movement, and the 
growing importance of the family as a unit of 
social organization. Alternate years. 

332 

CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 

The problems and events leading to war, 
the political and military history of the war, 
and the bitter aftermath to the Compromise 
of 1877. 



A 



340 

20TH CENTURY UNITED 
STATES RELIGION 

The study of historical and cultural 
developments in American society which 
relate to religion or what is commonly called 
religion. This involves consideration of the 
institutional and intellectual development of 
several faith groups as well as discussion of 
certain problems, such as the persistence of 
religious bigotry and the changing modes of 
church-state relationships. Alternate years. 

416 

HISTORY OF REFORMATION THOUGHT 
A study of the ideas and systems of ideas 
propounded prior to the Reformation, but 
which are historically related to its inception, 
and of the ideas and systems of ideas in- 
volved in the formulation of the major 
Reformation Protestant traditions, and in the 
Catholic Reformation. Included are the ideas 
of the humanists of the Reformation Era. 
Alternate years. 

418 

HISTORY OF RENAISSANCE THOUGHT 

A study of the classical, humanist, and 
scholastic elements involved in the develop- 
ment of the Renaissance outlook on views 
and values, both in Italy and in Northern 
Europe. The various combinations of social 
and political circumstances which constitute 
the historical context of these intellectual 
developments will be noted. Alternate years. 

442 

UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual 
experience of the United States from its 
colonial antecedents through reconstruction. 
Among the topics considered are Puritanism, 
transcendentalism, community life and 
organization, education, and social-reform 
movements. Prerequisites: 7wo courses 
from History 125, 126, 230, or consent of 
instructor. 



443 

UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877 

A study of the social and intellectual 
experience of the United States from recon- 
struction to the present day. Among the 
topics considered are social Darwinism, 
pragmatism, community life and organiza- 
tion, education and social reform movements. 
Prerequisite: Two courses form History 125, 
126, 230 or consent of instructor. 

449 

HISTORICAL METHODS 

This course focuses on the nature and 
meaning of history. It will open to the 
student different historical approaches and 
will provide the opportunity to explore these 
approaches in terms of particular topics and 
periods. Majors are required to enroll in this 
course in either their junior or senior year. 
The course is open to other students who 
have two courses in history or consent 
of instructor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically, history interns work for local 
government agencies engaged in historical 
projects or for the Lycoming County Histori- 
cal Museum. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Recent topics include studies of the 
immigration of American blacks, 
political dissension in the Weimer republic, 
Indian relations before the American Revolu- 
tion, and the history of Lycoming County. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



A 



International 
Studies 

Professor: Larson (Coordinator) 

1 he major is designed to integrate an 
understanding of the changing social, politi- 
cal, and historical environment of Europe 
today with study of Europe in its relations to 
the rest of the world, particularly the United 
States. It stresses the international relations 
of the North Atlantic community and offers 
the student opportunity to emphasize either 
European studies or international relations. 
The program provides multiple perspectives 
on the cultural traits that shape popular 
attitudes and institutions. Study of a single 
country is included as a data-base for com- 
parisons, and study of its language, as a basis 
for direct communication with its people. 

The program is intended to prepare a 
student either for graduate study or for 
careers which have an international compo- 
nent. International obligations are increas- 
ingly assumed by government agencies and a 
wide range of business, social, religious, and 
educational organizations. Opportunities are 
found in the fields of journalism, publishing, 
communications, trade, banking, advertising, 
management, and tourism. The program also 
offers flexible career preparation in a variety 
of essential skills, such as research, data 
analysis, report writing, language skills and 
the awareness necessary for dealing with 
people and institutions of another culture. 
Preparation for related careers can be 
obtained through the guided selection of 
courses outside the major in the areas of 
business, economics, foreign languages and 
literatures, government, history, and interna- 
tional relations or through a second major. 
Students should design their programs in 
consultation with members of the Committee 
on International Studies. 





1 


^h" 


-H;5-i'F^' 


CSBSJK^ 


iBHH 


"^ \) ' ^ 


f\ 


jk J 


!• ^ 


! 1 




1 '^ 



By completing six to eight additional 
courses in the social sciences (which include 
those courses needed to complete a major in 
economics, history, political science, or 
sociology/anthropology) and the required 
program in education, student can be certi- 
fied for the teacher education program in 
social studies. By completing a major in the 
foreign language (five or more courses) and 
the education program, students can be 
certified to teach that language. The Interna- 
tional Studies program also encourages 
participation in study-abroad programs, as 
well as the Washington and United Nations 
semesters. 

The major includes 1 1 courses selected as 
follows: 

International Relations Courses - Four or 
two courses (if two, then four must be taken 
from Area Courses). Courses within this 
group are designed to provide a basic 
understanding of the international system and 



A 



of Europe's relations with the rest of the 
world. Political Science 225 is required. 

Political Science 225: World Politics 
Economic 443: International Trade 
History 320: European Diplomatic History 
Political Science 439: American Foreign 
Policy 

Area Courses - Four or two courses (if two 
then four must be taken from International 
Relations Courses). Courses within this 
group are designed to provide a basic under- 
standing of the European political, social, and 
economic environment. History 111 and 
Economics 221 are required. 

History 111: Europe 181 5-Present 
Economics 221: Comparative Economic 

Systems 
Political Science 220: European Politics 
History 218: Europe in the Era of the 

World Wars 
History 219: Contemporary Europe 

National Courses 

Language - Two courses one language. 

French 221, plus one course numbered 222 or 

above (except 228) 

German 221, plus one course numbered 222 

or above 

Spanish 221, plus one course numbered 222 

or above (except 311) 

Country - One course. The student must 
select, according to his or her language 
preparation, one European country which will 
serve as a social interest area throughout the 
program. The country selected will serve as 
the base for individual projects in the major 
courses wherever possible. 

France - French 228: Modem France 
Germany - History N80: Topics in 

German History 
Spain - Spanish 311: Hispanic Culture 



Elective Course - One course which should 
involve further study of some aspect of the 
program. Appropriate courses are any area or 
international relations courses not yet taken. 
History 110, 316; Economic 226; Political 
Science 326, 327, 438; related foreign- 
literature courses counting toward the fine- 
arts requirement and internships. 

Senior Seminar 

449 

SENIOR SEMINAR 

A one-semester seminar, taken in the 
senior year, in which students and several 
faculty members will pursue an integrative 
topic in the field of international studies. 
Students will work to some extent independ- 
ently. Guest speakers will be invited. The 
seminar will be open to qualified persons 
from outside the major and the College. 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 




Literature 

Associate Professor: Maples (Coordinator) 

i his major recognizes literature as a 
distinct discipline beyond national boundaries 
and combines the study of any two literatures 
in the areas of English, French, German, and 
Spanish. Students can thus explore two 
literatures widely and intensively at the upper 
levels of course offerings within each of the 
respective departments while developing and 
applying skills in foreign languages. The 
major prepares students for graduate study in 
either of the two literatures studied or in 
comparative literature. 

The major requires at least six literature 
courses, equally divided between the two 
literatures concerned. The six must be at the 
advanced level as determined in consultation 
with advisors (normally courses numbered 
200 and above in English and 400 and above 
in foreign languages). In general, two of 
the advanced courses in each literatiu^e 
should be period courses. The third course, 
taken either as a regular course or an inde- 
pendent study, may have as its subject 
another period, a particular author, genre, or 
literary theme, or some other unifying 
approach or idea. Beyond these six, the 
major must include at least two additional 
courses from among those counting toward a 
major in the departments involved. Any 
prerequisite courses in the respective depart- 
ments (for example: English 106, French 
221-222 or 228, German 221-222, Spanish 
221-222) should be taken during the fresh- 
man year. Students should design their 
programs in consultation with a faculty 
member from each of the literatures con- 
cerned. Programs for the major must be 
approved by the departments involved. 




Mass 
Communication 

Assistant Professor: Nason (Chairperson), 
Smith, Wild 

1 he major in Mass Communication 
recognizes the need for a liberal arts founda- 
tion and includes selected courses from the 
Departments of Art, Business Administration, 
History, Philosophy, Political Science, 
Psychology and Sociology/Anthropology. 
The major combines a core of Mass Commu- 
nication courses with one of three profes- 
sional tracks: Advertising/Public Relations, 
Broadcast Journalism, and Journalism. 
Emphasis is placed on developing an under- 
standing of the cultural and historical roles of 
the mass media and on developing the 
communicative skills necessary for careers in 
the media. 

Students majoring in Mass Communica- 
tion must complete the Core Curriculum 



A 



and one professional track. Each track 
requires a combination of theory, production, 
and writing courses. 

A minor in Mass Communication consists 
of Mass Communication 110, 211,215 and 
three of the following courses: Mass Com- 
munication 224, 329, 330, 331, 470. 

I. THE CORE CURRICULUM 
REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS 



Mass Comm 215 

MassComm 110 

Mass Comm 211 

Mass Comm 330 

MassComm 331 

Pol Sci 448 

Mass Comm 247, 
248, 249 (one credit 



Introduction to 

Media Writing 

Introduction to Mass 

Communication 

Fundamentals of Oral 

Communication 

Theories and Issues in 

Mass Communication 

Mass Media Law 

and Regulation 

Public Opinion 

and Polling* 

Practicum in Mass 

each) Communication 



♦Business 445 (Marketing Research), Psychology 
224 (Social Psychology) or Sociology 447 
(Research Methods in Sociology) may be substi- 
tuted. These courses require departmental 
prerequisites or consent of individual instructors. 

Students must complete the requirements 
of one of the following professional tracks: 

Track I • Advertising/Public Relations 

Business 228 Marketing Management I 

Business 332 Advertising 

Mass Comm 325 Writing for Business and 

Public Relations 

One of the following writing courses: 

Mass Comm 323 Writing for Special 

Audiences 
Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism 

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 



Two of the following production courses: 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Mass Comm 218 Radio Programming 

and Production 
Mass Comm 224 Television Production 

Track II - Journalism 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism 

Pol Sci 111 State and Local Government 

One of the following additional 
writing courses: 

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 

Mass Comm 334 Public Affairs Reporting 

One of the following courses: 



History 126 

Philosophy 115 

Sociology 227 
Sociology 334 



United States History, 

1877 -present 

Philosophy and 

Public Policy 

Social Problems* 

Racial and Cultural 

Minorities* 



♦Requires prerequisite or consent of instructor 
Track III - Broadcast Journalism 



MassComm 218 

Mass Comm 224 
Mass Comm 329 
Mass Comm 334 



Radio Programing 

and Production 

Television Production 

Broadcast Journalism 

Public Affairs Reporting 



Pol Sci 111 



State and Local Government 



One of the following courses: 

History 126 United States History 

1877-present 

Philosophy 115 Philosophy and 

Public Policy 

Sociology 227 Social Problems* 

Sociology 334 Racial and Cultural 

Minorities* 

♦Requires a prerequisite or consent of instructor 



A 



110 

INTRODUCTION TO MASS 
COMMUNICATION 

Theories of the process of mass communi- 
cation and introduction to the mass media; 
attention will be given to problems of 
censorship and media ethics. Analysis of the 
mass media's impact on society; emphasis 
will be placed on the social, psychological, 
and political implications of the media's 
shaping influence on man and institutions. 

211 

FUNDAMENTALS OF 
ORAL COMMUNICATION 

The dynamics of oral communication. 
The development of elementary principles of 
simple oral communication through lectures, 
prepared assignments in speaking, and 
informal class exercises. Utilizes video-tape 
sequences for feedback to students. 

215 

INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA WRITING 

Analysis of and practice in the basic forms 
of media writing: the elements of lead, style 
and structure. Frequent workshop sessions 
for detailed critiques and discussion of 
student writing. Prerequisites: A grade ofC 
or better in English 106 or consent of the 
instructor. 

218 

RADIO PROGRAMMING 
AND PRODUCTION 

Contemporary broadcast programming 
techniques including station scheduling, 
program development and analysis, and 
implementation in real and hypothetical 
situations. Emphasis on management 
functions. 

224 

TELEVISION PRODUCTION 

Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and 
business aspects of video programs. Study 
and use of basic equipment to produce 
standard formats on videotape. 



226 

LITERATURE, FILM AND TELEVISION 

The relationship between the conventions 
of literature, film and television with empha- 
sis on examination of representative works. 
Media comparison to reveal the problems of 
adaptation. Prerequisite: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. 

247-249 

PRACTICUM IN MASS 
COMMUNICATION 

Utilization of mass communication prin- 
ciples, techniques and skills in an applied 
setting through work experience, primarily 
with campus media. Students will write, 
produce and report news for print (Mass 
Comm 247), radio (Mass Comm 248) and 
television (Mass Comm 249) outlets. One- 
hour credit. P/F grade. One may be repeated 
once for credit. Limit of one hour credit per 
semester. Prerequisite: Consent of the 
instructor. 

323 

WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES 

Intensive practice in writing with a 
purpose and in presenting information related 
to the student's interests to different kinds of 
audiences. Includes training in the use of 
graphics and in library research applicable to 
defined topics and audiences. Designed for 
Mass Communication students but open to 
others. Prerequisite: A grade of C or better 
in Mass Communication 215 or consent of 
instructor. 

325 

WRITING FOR BUSINESS 

AND PUBLIC RELATIONS 

Analyzing media and audiences for public 
relations and business purposes; planning, 
designing, and writing business rep)orts and 
procedures; press relations and publicity 
methods; the news feature and publicity 
release. Includes training in library research 
related to business communications and 



^k. 



public relations. Prerequisite: A grade ofC 
or better in Mass Communication 215 or 
consent of instructor. 

PRIlSrr JOURNALISM 

Techniques in reporting news and trends 
at the local, regional, county levels; emphasis 
on writing the longer news and feature 
article, the editorial, and the investigative 
news story. Prerequisite: A grade ofC or 
better in Mass Communication 215 or 
consent of the instructor. 

329 

BROADCAST JOURNALISM 

Study of, and practical experience in, the 
news gathering process for electronic media. 
Emphasis on covering the local story from 
the small-station perspective. Students in the 
course are responsible for writing, producing, 
editing and broadcasting newscasts for 
WRLC-FM. The course also looks at the 
special ethical problems of electronic news 
coverage. Prerequisites: Mass Communica- 
tion 215 and Mass Communication 218 or 
consent of instructor. 

330 

THEORIES AND ISSUES 

IN MASS COMMUNICATION 

An analysis of current theories dealing 
with mass communication systems and the 
behavior and attitudes of, and effects on, 
their audiences. The course also examines 
contemporary mass media issues with an em- 
phasis on developing critical thinking skills. 
Prerequisites: Mass Communication 110. 

331 

MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 




considered. Cross-listed as Political Science 
436. Prerequisite: Junior and senior 
standing or consent of instructor. 

334 

PUBLIC AFFAIRS REPORTING 

A workshop course in the reporting of 
public affairs at the local level. The course 
will investigate the relationship between 
journalists and government through reporting 
assignments at local municipalities. Prerequi- 
site: A grade ofC or better in Mass Commu- 
nication 215 or consent of 
instructor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns usually work off campus in a field 
related to their communication sequence. 
Prerequisite: Four semesters of Mass 
Communication Practicum or consent of the 
instructor. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 
Studies involve research related to the 
communication sequence of the student. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



A 



Mathematical 
Science 

Associate Professors: Haley, Sprechini 
Assistant Professors: DeSilva (Chairperson), 

Golshan, Weida, Yan 
Part-time Instructors: Davis, Murphy, 

Abercrombie, Collins 

1 he Department of Mathematical Sci- 
ences offers major and minor programs in 
computer science and mathematics. 

Computer Science 

A major in computer science consists of 
11 courses: Mathematics 116, 128, and 129, 
and Computer Science 125, 246, 247, 321, 
344, 445, and two other computer science 
courses numbered 320 or above. Recom- 
mended extradepartmental courses: Philoso- 
phy 225, and Psychology 337. In addition to 
the regular courses listed below, special 
courses are occasionally available. 

A minor in computer science consists of 
Math 1 16, Computer Science 125, 246, 247, 
and two other computer science courses 
numbered 220 or above. 

101 

MICROCOMPUTER FILE MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to a file-management 
system, i.e. a database system that uses a 
single file, in the MS-DOS environment. 
One-half unit. This course may not be used 
to meet distribution requirements. 

108 

MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM-SOLVING 
WITH MICROCOMPUTERS 

An introduction to the use of microcom- 
puter-based, integrated software in solving 
problems from mathematics and related 
areas. Included are uses of spreadsheet, data- 




base and graphics functions to analyze, solve, 
and display solutions to problems from the 
areas of number theory, algebra, geometry, 
statistics, and the mathematics of business 
and finance. Emphasis is given to the 
processes involved in mathematical model- 
ing. Laboratory experience is included using 
current software. Prerequisite: Credit for or 
exemption from Mathematics 005. 

125 

INTRODUCTION TO 
COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Introduction to programming. Topics 
include algorithms, program structure, and 
computer configuration. Laboratory experi- 
ence is included, most recently using Pascal 
and the Karel simulation package. Prerequi- 
site: Credit for or exemption from Mathe- 
matics 005. 

246 

PRINCIPLES OF 
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 

Principles of effective programming, 
including structiu"ed programming, stepwise 
refinement, assertion proving, style, debug- 
ging, control structure, decision tables, finite 
state machines, recursion, and encoding. 
Utilities most recently used include SVS 
Pascal, the UNIX operating system, C, and 
Shell programming. Prerequisite: A grade 
ofC or better in Computer Science 125 or 
consent of instructor. 



^S^ 



247 

DATA STRUCTURES 

Representation of data and algorithms 
associated with data structures. Topics 
include representation of lists, trees, graphs 
and strings, algorithms for searching and 
sorting. Prerequisite: A grade ofC or better 
in Computer Science 246 or consent of in- 
structor. Corequisite: Mathematics 116. 

321 

INTRODUCTION TO 
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 

Topics from the theory of interpolation; 
numerical approaches to approximation roots 
and functions, integration, systems of 
differential equations, linear systems, matrix 
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 and 
Mathematics 129; Mathematics 130 strongly 
recommended. 

344 

MACHINE LANGUAGE 

Principles of machine language program- 
ming; computer organization and representa- 
tion of numbers, strings, arrays, and list 
structures at the machine level; interrupt 
programming, relocatable code, linking 
loaders; interfacing with operating systems. 
Prerequisite: A grade ofC or better in 
Computer Science 246 or consent of 
instructor. 

345 

INTRODUCTION TO 
COMPUTER GRAPHICS 

An introduction to graphics hardware and 
software with emphasis on the mathematics 
necessary to represent, transform, and display 
images of two and three dimensional objects. 
Laboratory exercises will be designed to 
explore the capabilities of the graphics 
system and to test the students' understanding 
of the principles discussed in class. Pre- 
requisite: Computer Science 246 and either 



Computer Science 247 or permission of the 
instructor; Mathematics 130 recommended. 
Alternate years. 

349 

DATABASE SYSTEMS 

External storage structures, hashed files, 
indexed files; relational, network, and 
hierarchical data models; relational algebra 
and the relational calculus; design theory for 
relational databases; query optimization; 
concurrent operations; database protection. 
Prerequisite; Computer Science 247. Alter- 
nate years. 

445 

SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 

The emphasis in this course is on the 
algorithms used in programming the various 
parts of a computer system. These parts 
include assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt 
processors, input/output schedulers, processor 
and job schedulers, and memory managers. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247 and 344. 

446 

COMPILER CONSTRUCTION 

The emphasis in this course is on the 
construction of translators for programming 
languages. Topics include lexical analysis, 
block structure, grammars, parsing, program 
representation, and run-time organization. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247. 
Alternate years. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (SEE INDEX) 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



^^ 



Mathematics 

A. major mathematics consists of 10 unit 
courses in the mathematical sciences and four 
semesters of non-credit colloquia: Computer 
Science 125, Mathematics 128, 129, 130, 
234, 238, 432, 434, and two other mathemat- 
ics courses numbered 220 or above, one of 
which may be replaced by mathematics 
courses numbered 220 or above, one of 
which may be replaced by Mathematics 112, 
1 16, or 214; four semesters of Mathematics 
339 or 449 taken during the junior and senior 
years. 

Majors are required to attend the colloquia 
during their junior and senior years (339 and 
449 respectively). See the course description 
of Mathematics 339-449 for further informa- 
tion regarding the colloquium requirement. 

Students seeking secondary certification 
in mathematics are required to complete 
Mathematics 330, 336, and either 103 or 332, 
and are advised to enroll in Philosophy 217. 
Also, all majors are advised to elect Philoso- 
phy 225 and 333, Physics 225 and 226. 

In addition to the regular courses listed 
below, special courses are occasionally 
available. 

A minor in Mathematics consists of 
Mathematics 128, 129, 234, 238, and two 
additional courses numbered 130 or above. 

005 

INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA 
A self-paced study of arithmetic and 
decimal numeral, fractions, the real number 
line, factoring, solutions to linear and 
quadratic equations, graphs of linear and 
quadratic functions, expressions with rational 
exponents, algebraic functions, exponential 
functions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE 
IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED 
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS 
DEPARTMENT. One-half unit of credit. 



103 

INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 
Topics include tabular and graphical descrip- 
tive statistics, discrete and continuous 
probability distributions. Central Limit 
Theorem, one and two sample hypotheses 
tests, analysis of variance, chisquared tests, 
nonparametric tests, linear regression and 
correlation. Other topics may include index 
numbers, time series, sampling design, and 
experimental design. Course also includes 
some use of a microcomputer. Prerequisite: 
Credit for or exemption from 
Mathematics 005. 

106 

COMBINATORICS 

An introduction to the analysis of count- 
ing problems. Topics include permutations, 
combinations, binomial coefficients, inclu- 
sion/exclusion principle, and partitions. The 
nature of the subject allows questions to be 
posed in everyday language while still 
developing sophisticated mathematical 
concepts. Prerequisite: Credit for or exemp- 
tion from Mathematics 005. 

109 

APPLIED ELEMENTARY CALCULUS 
An intuitive approach to the calculus 
concepts with applications to business, 
biology, and social-science problems. Not 
open to students who have completed Mathe- 
matics 128. Prerequisite: Credit for or 
exemption form Mathematics 005. 

112 

HNITE MATHEMATICS 
FOR DECISION MAKING 

An introduction to some of the principal 
mathematical models, not involving calculus, 
which are used in business administration, 
social sciences, and operations research. The 
course will include both deterministic models 
such as graphs, networks, linear program- 
ming and voting models, and probabilistic 



A 



models such as Markov chains and games. 
Prerequisite: Credit for or exemption from 
Mathematics 005. 

116 

DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 

An introduction to discrete structures. 
Topics include equivalence relations, parti- 
tions and quotient sets, mathematical 
induction, recessive functions, elementary 
logic, discrete number systems, elementary 
combinatorial theory, and general algebraic 
structures emphasizing semi-groups, groups, 
lattices. Boolean algebras, graphs and trees. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 or 
consent of instructor. 

Ill 

PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS 
The study of polynomial, rational, 
exponential, logarithmic, and trigonometric 
functions, their graphs and elementary 
properties. This course is an intensive 
preparation for students planning to take 
Calculus (Math 128- 129), those in the 
Scholars Program, or those whose major 
specifically requires Precalculus. Prerequi- 
site: Credit for or exemption from Mathe- 
matics 005. 

128-129 

CALCULUS WITH 
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY I & II 

Differentiation and integration of alge- 
braic and trigonometric functions, conic 
sections and their applications, graphing 
plane curves, applications to related rate and 
external problems, areas of plane regions, 
volumes of solids of revolution, and other 
applications; differentiation and integration 
of transcendental functions, parametric equa- 
tions, polar coordinates, infinite sequences 
and series, and series expansions of func- 
tions. Prerequisite for 128: Exemption from 
or a grade ofC or better in Mathematics 127. 
Prerequisite for 129: exemption from or a 
grade ofC or better in Mathematics 128 or 
consent of instructor. 



130 

INTRODUCTION TO MATRIX ALGEBRA 

Systems of linear equations and matrix 
arithmetic. Points and hyperplanes infinite 
dimensional geometries. Bases and linear 
independence. Matrix representations of 
linear mappings. The fixed point problem. 
Special classes of matrices. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 127 or its equivalent. 

205 

MATHEMATICS IN 
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 

This course is intended for prospective 
elementary school teachers and is required of 
all those seeking elementary certification. 
Topics include systems of numbers and 
numeration, computational algorithms, 
environmental and transformation geometry 
measurement, and mathematical concept 
formation. Observation and participation in 
Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 338 and credit for 
or exemption from Mathematics 005. Core- 
quisite: Any education course numbered 341 
or above which is specifically required for 
elementary certification. 

214 

MULTIVARIABLE STATISTICS 

The study of statistical techniques 
involving several variables. Topics include 
multiple regression and correlation, one-and 
two-way analysis of variance, analysis of 
covariance, analysis of two- and three-way 
contingency tables, and discriminate analysis. 
Other topics may include cluster analysis, 
factor analysis and canonical correlations, 
repeated measure designs, time series analy- 
sis, and nonparametric methods. Course also 
includes extensive use of a statistical package 
(currently BMDP). Prerequisite: A grade of 
C or better in Mathematics 103 or its 
equivalent. 



A 



231 

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

A study of ordinary differential equations 
and linear systems. Solution techniques 
include: reduction of order, undetermined 
coefficients, variation of parameters, Laplace 
transforms, power series, and eigenvalues and 
eigenvectors. A brief discussion of numeri- 
cal methods may also be included. Prerequi- 
site: A grade ofC or better in Mathematics 
129; Mathematics 130 recommended. 

233 

COMPLEX VARIABLES 

Complex numbers, analytic functions, 
complex integration, Cauchy's theorems and 
their applications. Corequisite: Mathematics 
238. Alternate years. 

234 

FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 

Topics regularly included are the nature of 
mathematical systems, essentials of logical 
reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set 
theory. Other topics frequently included are 
approaches to the concepts of infinity and 
continuity, and the construction of the real 
number system. The course serves as a 
bridge form elementary calculus to advanced 
courses in algebra and analysis. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 129 or consent of instructor. 

238 

MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS 

Algebra, geometry, and calculus in 
multidimensional Euclidean space; n-tuples, 
matrices; lines, planes, curves surfaces; 
vector functions of a single variable, accel- 
eration, curvature; functions for several vari- 
ables, gradient; line integrals, vector fields, 
multiple integrals, change of variable, areas, 
volumes; Green's theorem. Prerequisites: A 
grade ofC or better in Mathematics 129, 
Mathematics 130 or consent of instructor. 



321 

INTRODUCTION TO 
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 

Topics from the theory of interpolation; 
numerical approaches to approximating roots 
and functions, integration, systems of 
differential equations, linear systems, matrix 
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 and 
Mathematics 129; Mathematics 130 strongly 
recommended. 

330 

TOPICS IN GEOMETRY 

An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean 
geometry, and an introduction to related 
geometries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 128. 
Alternate years. 

332-333 

MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I-II 
A study of probability, discrete and 
continuous random variables, expected 
values and moments, sampling, point 
estimation, sampling distributions, interval 
estimation, test of hypotheses, regression and 
linear hypotheses, experimental design 
models. Corequisite: Mathematics 238. 
Alternate years. 

336 

CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS 
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 

A coiu^se designed for mathematics majors 
who are planning to teach at the secondary 
level. Emphasis will be placed on the 
mathematics that form the foundation of 
secondary mathematics. Ideas will be 
presented to familiarize the student with the 
various curriculum proposals, to provide for 
innovation within the existing curriculum, 
and to expand the boundaries of the existing 
curriculum. Open only to junior and senior 
mathematics majors enrolled in the secon- 
dary-education program. Alternate years. 



^SV 



338 

OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

Queuing theory, including simulations 
techniques, optimization theory, including 
linear programming, integer programming, 
and dynamic programming; game theory, 
including two-person zero-sum games, 
cooperative games, and multiperson games. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 112 or Mathe- 
matics 130. Alternate years. 

432 

REAL ANALYSIS 

An introduction to the rigorous analysis of 
the concepts of real variable calculus in the 
setting of normed spaces. Topics from: 
topology of the Euclidean plane, complete- 
ness, compactness, the Heine-Borel theorem; 
functions on Euclidean space, continuity, 
uniform continuity, differentiability; series 
and convergence; Riemann integral. Pre- 
requisite: Mathematics 234 and 238. 

434 

MODERN ALGEBRA 

An integrated approach to groups, rings, 
fields, and vector spaces and functions which 
preserve their structure. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 130 and 234. 

438 

SEMINAR 

Topics in modern mathematics of current 
interest to the instructor. A different topic is 
selected each semester. This semester is 
designed to provide junior and senior mathe- 
matics majors and other qualified students 
with more than the usual opportunity for con- 
centrated and cooperative inquiry. Prerequi- 
site: Consent of instructor. One-half unit of 
credit. This course may be repeated for 
credit. 

339 & 449 

MATHEMATICS COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for 
junior and senior mathematics majors offers 



students a chance to hear presentations on 
topics related to, but not directly covered in 
formal mathematics courses. Students are 
required to attend coUoquia each semester of 
their junior (339) and senior (449) years. 
Mathematics majors must present two 
lectures, one during the junior year and one 
during the senior year. A letter grade will be 
given in semesters in which the student gives 
a presentation, otherwise the grade will 
be P/F. Seniors are strongly encouraged to 
give their presentations during the fall 
semester. Students applying for the profes- 
sional semester in education are required to 
give the first presentation before the eighth 
week of the fall semester of their junior year, 
and the second presentation before the eighth 
week of the fall semester of their senior year. 
With Departmental approval, students will be 
required to take three semesters of 339 or 
449; such approval is granted only in extraor- 
dinary circumstances and will require the 
student to give one presentation in each of 
the three semesters. Noncredit course. One 
hour per week. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



^ti. 



Military Science 

1 he U.S. Army Reserve Officer Training 
Corps (R.O.T.C.) program is offered to 
Lycoming College students in cooperation 
with Bucknell University. The introductory 
courses are taught on Lycoming's campus and 
the program provides transportation to 
Bucknell University for the advanced 
courses. Details of the R.O.T.C. program can 
be found on page 31. 

Oil 

INTRODUCTION TO ROTC 

The course is designed to acquaint the 
student with the ROTC program and with the 
Army as a potential employer after gradu- 
ation. Students will learn about the Army's 
history, organization, equipment, and role in 
the nation. Students will also learn some 
fundamental mihtary skills, customs and 
traditions. No credit. 

012 

INDIVIDUAL MILITARY SKILLS 

The course expands upon the skills 
learned in the previous semester. Several 
classes will be held at the rifle range to 
develop marksmanship skills. There will also 
be training in radio communication and first 
aid skills. No credit. 

021 

LAND NAVIGATION 

Students will learn how to use military 
topographic maps and reference systems. 
The course includes theory and practical 
exercises in navigating using compass, map 
terrain association. There will also be some 
instruction and practice in military writing 
and briefing skills. No credit 

022 

LEADERSHIP THEORY 

The focus is on leading a small group of 
individuals. The course examines the role of 
the leader, military leadership concept. 



personal character, decision making, imple- 
menting decisions, motivation and supervi- 
sion. The course also includes instruction 
and practice on conducting performance- 
oriented training. No credit. 

031 

APPLIED LEADERSHIP 

The student serves as a small unit leader 
in the ROTC organization. Student leader- 
ship is evaluated and developed. The student 
has some responsibilities to care for and train 
younger cadets. Instruction on small (infan- 
try) unit tactics is used as a vehicle to provide 
students a variety of leadership challenges. 
No credit. 

032 

SMALL UNIT TACTICS 

The course requires planning and practic- 
ing tactical operations at small unit level. 
Students continue to apply/develop leader- 
ship skills in increasingly complex situations. 
Topics include preparation of orders, offense, 
defense, reconnaissance, patrolling, fire 
support, and airmobile operations. No credit 

041 

MENTORING AND MANAGING 

The student serves as a cadet officer in 
the ROTC organization and plans and 
organizes several major training activities. 
Course work includes delegating and con- 
trolling, setting objectives, making leadership 
assessments, counseling, supervising, and 
evaluating. No credit 

042 

PROFESSIONALISM AND ETHICS 

The student serves in a different leader- 
ship position and continues to develop and 
apply the skills learned in the previous 
semester. The course also examines military 
officership as a profession and the ethical be- 
havior expected of an officer. The course 
also also serves to prepare the student for an 
initial assignment as an Army lieutenant 
No credit. 



Music 



Associate Professors: Boerckel 

(Chairperson), Thayer 
Instructor: Janda 
Part-time Instructors: Bailey, Clark, Grube, 

Lakey, Leidhecker, Lipscomb, 

Nacinovich, Russell, Smolensky, Steele, 

Truitt, and White 

1 he music major is required to take a 
balanced program of music theory, history, 
applied music and ensemble. A minimum of 
eight courses (exclusive of all ensemble, 
applied music and instrumental and vocal 
methods courses) is required and must 
include Music 110, 111, 220, 221, 335, and 
336. Each major must participate in an 
ensemble (Music 167, 168, and/or 169) and 
take one hour of applied music per week for a 
minimum of four semesters including the 
entire period in which the individual is 
registered as a music major (see Music 160- 
169). The major must include at least one- 
half hour of piano in the applied program 
unless a piano proficiency test is requested 
and passed. Anyone declaring music as a 
second major must do so by the beginning of 
the junior year. 

Music majors seeking certification in 
music education (K-12) must also take 
Psychology 110 and 338; Education 200 and 
the Professional Semester; Music 261-7, 331, 
332, 446 and pass the piano proficiency 
examination. Students who wish to obtain 
certification in music education should 
consult with the department as soon as 
possible, preferably before scheduling classes 
for the freshman year. 

The Music Department recommends that 
non-majors select courses from the following 
list to meet distribution requirements: Music 
116, 117; Music 128; Music 113 or Music 
224 in combination with 116, 117, or 128. 




Student recitals offer opportunities to gain 
experience in public performance. Music 
majors and other students qualified in 
performance may present formal recitals. 

110-111 

MUSIC THEORY I AND II 

A two- semester course open to all 
students. An examination of the fundamental 
components and theoretical concepts of 
music. The student will develop musician- 
ship through application of applied skills. 
(Music 110 is prerequisite to Music 111). 

113 

MUSIC OF TODAY 

Non-technical survey of styles, techniques 
and contents of music produced since 1950, 
with emphasis on developments in electronic 
music. Leading figures of major contempo- 
rary movements in music, literature and the 
visual arts and their works will be presented 
and discussed in relation to musical culture. 



iffik. 



The course will include some practical 
exposure to the electronic music studio and 
recording techniques. 

116 

INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 

A basic course in the materials and 
techniques of music. Examples drawn from 
various periods and styles are designed to 
enhance perception and appreciation through 
careful and informed listening. 

117 

SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC 

A chronological survey of music in 
Western civilization from Middle Ages to the 
present. Composers and musical styles are 
considered in the context of the broader 
culture of each major era. 

128 

AMERICAN MUSIC 

An introductory survey of all types of 
American music from pre-Revolutionary 
days to the present. Categories to be covered 
are folk music of different origins, the 
development of show music into Broadway 
musicals, serious concert music for large and 
small ensembles, jazz and various popular 
musics from "Tin Pan Alley" to Rock to New 
Wave. Alternate years. 

135-136 

INTRODUCTION TO DANCE I AND II 

An introduction to the techniques of basic 
movement and interpretation in ballet, jazz, 
and modem dance. Classes include improvi- 
sation and choreography. Prerequisite for 
Music 136: Music 135 or consent of instruc- 
tor. One-half unit of credit each. Not open 
to students who have received credit for 
Theatre 135-136 or Theatre 235-236. 

137 

fflSTORY OF THE DANCE I 

A survey of classical ballet from the 
Ballets de cour of 17th century France to the 



present with emphasis on the contributions of 
Petipa, Fokien, Cecchetti, and Balanchine. 
One-half unit of credit. Not open to students 
who have received credit for Theatre 137 
or 138. 

138 

HISTORY OF THE DANCE II 

A survey of the forms of dance, excluding 
classical ballet, as independent works of art 
and as they have reflected the history of 
civilization from primitive times to the 
present. Prerequisite: Music 137 or consent 
of instructor. One-half unit of credit. Not 
open to students who have received credit for 
Theatre 137 or 138. 

220-221 

MUSIC THEORY III AND IV 

A continuation of the integrated theory 
coiu"se moving toward newer uses of music 
materials. Prerequisite: Music 111. 

224 

ELECTRONIC MUSIC I 

A non-technical introduction to electronic 
music and MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital 
Interface) for the major and non-major alike. 
The course traces the development of MIDI 
from its origin to present-day digital 
synthesizers in combination with sequencing 
computers. 

225 

ELECTRONIC MUSIC II 

Further consideration of recording 
techniques. Use of microphones, multi-track 
recording, mixing, special effects devices and 
synchronization will be introduced. Students 
will take part in live recording of concerts 
and rehearsals of a variety of ensembles. 
Student projects will include complete 
recording sessions and the production of 
electronic music compositions utilizing 
classical studio techniques and real-time 
networks. Prerequisite: Music 224 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



235-236 

INTERMEDIATE DANCE I AND II 

Studies of the techniques of basic move- 
ment and interpretation in ballet, jazz and 
modern dance at the intermediate level. 
Classes include improvisation and choreogra- 
phy. Prerequisite for Music 235: Music 136 
or consent of instructor. Prerequisite for 
Music 236: Music 235 or consent of instruc- 
tor. One-half unit of credit each. Not open 
to students who have received credit for 
Theatre 135-136 or Theatre 235-236. 

330 
COMPOSITION I 

Creative writing in smaller vocal and 
instrumental forms. Students identify and 
use the techniques employed by major 
composers of the 20th century. Prerequisite: 
Music 111 or consent of instructor. 

331 

CONDUCTING 

A study of the fundamentals of conducting 
with frequent opportunity for practical 
experience. The College music organizations 
serve to make performance experience 
possible. Prerequisite: Music 110-111 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

332 

TEACHING MUSIC IN THE SCHOOLS 

Methods and materials of teaching music 
in the schools with emphasis on curriculum 
development and procedures for choral and 
instrumental ensembles at the elementary and 
secondary levels. Course work will include 
observation of music classes in elementary 
and secondary schools in the greater Wil- 
liam sport area. Alternate years. 

335 

HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I 

The development of musical styles and 
forms from Gregorian chant through Mozart, 
including composers from the medieval. 



Renaissance, baroque and early classical, 
romantic and modem eras. 

336 

HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II 

The development of musical styles and 
forms from Beethoven to the present, includ- 
ing composers from the late classical, 
romantic and modem eras. 

339 

ORCHESTRATION 

A study of modem orchestral instmments 
and examination of their use by the great 
masters with practical problems in instmmen- 
tation. the College Music Organizations 
serve to make performance experience 
possible. Prerequisite: Music 110-111 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

440 

COMPOSITION II 

Creative writing in larger vocal and 
instrumental forms, students write more 
extended works in order to develop and 
individual style of composition. Prerequi- 
site: Music 330 or consent of instructor. 

442 

PROJECTS IN ELECTRONIC MUSIC 

Digital techniques of Electronic Music 
production. Notation systems for electronic 
music. Aesthetics of electronic music. 
Students will use the full resources of the 
studio to complete original compositions and 
will study, prepare and present works by 
major composers of electronic music. 
Prerequisite: Music 225 or consent of 
instructor. 

445 

SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC 

The intensive study of a selected area of 
music literature, designed to develop research 
techniques in music. The topic is announced 



at the Spring pre-registration. Sample topics 
include: Beethoven, Impressionism, Vienna 
1900-1914. Prerequisite: Music 116, 117 or 
221 or consent of instructor. 

446 

RECITAL 

The preparation and presentation of a full- 
length public recital, normally during the 
student's senior year. Prerequisite: 
Approval by the department. May be 
repeated for credit. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 

Applied Music and 
Ensemble 

1 he study of performance in piano, 
harpsichord, voice, organ, strings, guitar, 
brass, woodwinds, and percussion is designed 
to develop sound technique and a knowledge 
of the appropriate literature for the instru- 
ment. Student recitals offer opportunities to 
gain experience in public performance. 

Credit for applied music courses (private 
lessons) and ensemble (choir, orchestra and 
band) is earned on a fractional basis. One 
half-hour lesson per week earns one-half hour 
credit. Ensemble credit totals one-half hour 
credit if student enrolls for one or two 
ensembles (for more information, see course 
descriptions below). When scheduling please 
note that an applied course or ensemble 
should not be substituted for an academic 
course, but should be taken in addition to the 
normal four academic courses. 

Extra fees apply for private lessons 
(Music 160-166) as follows: $150 per 
semester for a half-hour lesson per week. 



$300 per semester for a half-hour lesson per 
week. Private lessons are given for 13 
weeks. 160 Piano or Harpsichord, 161 
Voice, 162 Strings or Guitar, 163 Organ, 164 
Brass, 165 Woodwinds, 166 Percussion. 

167 

ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE 

The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra 
allows students with significant instrumental 
experience to become members of this 
regional ensemble. Participation in the 
W.S.O. is contingent upon audition and the 
availabiUty of openings. Students are 
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble 
credit per semester. A student who is 
enrolled in orchestra only should register for 
Music 167B (one hour credit). A student 
may belong to two ensembles, choosing 
either Choir or Concert Band as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music 167 A (1/2 hour credit) or Music 169A 
(1/2 hour credit). 

168 

CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR) 

Participation in the College choir is 
designed to enable any student possessing at 
least average talent an opportunity to study 
choral technique. Emphasis is placed upon 
acquaintance with choral literature, tone 
production, diction, and phrasing. Students 
are allowed a maximum of one hour of 
Ensemble credit per semester. A student who 
is enrolled in Choir only should register for 
Music 168B (one hour credit). A student 
may belong to two ensembles, choosing 
either Orchestra or Concert Band as the 
second group. Such a student will then 
register for Music 168 A (1/2 hour credit) plus 
either Music 167 A (1/2 hour credit) or Music 
169A (1/2 hour credit). If a student has audi- 
tioned and been selected for the twenty voice 
Chamber Choir (no credit available), he/she 
should register for Music 168C. 




169 

CONCERT BAND 

The College Concert Band allows students 
with some instrumental experience to become 
acquainted with good band literature and 
develop personal musicianship through 
participation in group instrumental activity. 
Students are allowed a maximum of one hour 
of Ensemble credit per semester. A student 
who is enrolled in Band only should register 
for Music 169B (one hour credit). A student 
may belong to two ensembles, choosing 
either Orchestra or Choir as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music 169A (1/2 hour credit) or Music 168A 
(1/2 hour credit). 

INSTRUMENTAL AND 
VOCAL METHODS 

Instrumental and vocal methods classes 
are designed to provide students seeking 
certification in music education with a basic 
understanding of all standard band and 
orchestral instruments as well as a familiarity 
with fundamental techniques of singing. 

Music 261: Brass Methods (one hour credit) 
Music 262: Percussion Methods 

(one hour credit) 

Music 263 , 264 : S tring Methods I and II 

(one hour credit each) 

Music 265: Vocal Methods (one hour credit) 

Music 266,267: Woodwind Methods I and II 

(one hour credit) 



Near East Culture 
and Archaeology 

Professor: Guerra (Coordinator) 

1 he Near East culture and archaeology 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
acquaint students with the "cradle of Western 
civilization," both in its ancient and modem 
aspects. Majors will complete a minimum of 
eight to ten courses related to the Near East. 

Required courses are described in their 
departmental sections and include: 

1. Four courses in language and culture from: 
History and Culture of the Ancient 

Near East (Religion 228) 

History of Art (Art 222) 

Ancient History (History 210) 

Old Testament Faith and History (Religion 

113) 

Judaism and Islam (Religion 224) 

Two semesters of foreign language 

(Hebrew 101-102, or Greek 101-102) 

2. Two courses in archaeology from: 
Biblical Archaeology (Religion 226) 
Special Archaeology courses, such as 
independent studies or in May or summer 
terms in the Near East. 

3. Two courses in the cooperating depart- 
ments (art, history, political science, religion 
and sociology-anthropology) or related 
departments. These two courses, usually 
taken in the junior or senior years, can be 
independent study. Topics should be related 
either to the ancient or the modern Near East 
and must be approved in advance by the 
committee supervising the interdisciplinary 
program. The study of modem Arabic or 
Hebrew is encouraged. 

Other courses may be suggested by the 
supervisory committee within the limits of a 
10-course major. The number of courses 
taken within this program applicable toward 
fulfilling the College distribution require- 
ments will vary according to the selection of 
courses. 



iffiw 




Nursing 



Associate Professor: Parrish (Chairperson), 

Pagana 
Assistant Professors: Fulton, Ficca 
Instructors: Gray-Vickrey, Dill 
Visiting Instructor: Moore 
Part-time Instructors: Bird, Ingram, 

McKeegan, Potter 

•Students wishing to major in nursing will 
be admitted to the College under the usual 
admission procedures. Freshmen should 
follow the nursing curriculum plan for the 
freshman year in the sequence designated. 
To be considered for continuation in nursing, 
a minimum G.P. A. of 2.5 is required at 
completion of the freshman year. A supple- 
mentary application should be submitted to 
the Department of Nursing by January 30 of 
the freshman year. 



Registered Nurses 

1 he Department of Nursing offers an 
alternative curriculum for registered nurses 
within the existing BSN program. The goals 
of this alternative curriculum are to provide 
registered nurses with the opportunity to earn 
an educationally sound BSN degree while 
completing the degree requirements in as 
short a time period as possible, and to meet 
the unique needs of registered nurses. 
Nursing 300 and 310 are open only to 
registered nurses and are required as part of 
the alternative curriculum. Registered nurses 
may challenge for credit the following 
nursing courses: Nursing 220, the skills 
component of Nursing 221, the obstetrical 
component of Nursing 330, 331, 332, 333, 
334, and 440. For successful challenge of 
any clinical nursing course by registered 
nurses, a grade of C- or better is required; 
that is, 70% or 1.67 is required in both the 
theoretical and clinical components of the 
course. 

In addition, registered nurses in this 
program may challenge for credit any 
required nonnursing course provided that 
they obtain the permission of both the 
Deparmient of Nursing and the department in 
which that course is offered. These examina- 
tions may not be available for every required 
course. 

Additional information for registered 
nurses seeking the BSN is available from the 
Department of Nursing. Individual advise- 
ment is offered to all registered nurses. 

Clinical Learning Resources 

In addition to the College's new well- 
equipped Nursing Skills Lab, opportunity for 
self-learning is provided in the adjacent 
Learning Center which is equipped with 
electronic study carrels and audio-visual 
materials. 

A wide variety of health-care agencies in 
the surrounding area are utilized for clinical 
experiences. Cooperating hospitals and 



agencies include: Divine Providence Hospi- 
tal, Williamsport Hospital and Medical 
Center, Evangelical Hospital, Geisinger 
Medical Center, Leader Nursing Home and 
Rehabilitation Center, Danville State Hospi- 
tal, Pennsylvania Department of Health, 
Regional Home Health Services, Rose View 
Manor and The Williamsport Home. 

Expenses of the 
Nursing Program 

iStudents are responsible for their own 
transportation to assigned clinical areas. The 
student of nursing assumes all financial 
obligations listed in the section on fees in 
this bulletin including a $40 lab fee for each 
of the clinical nursing courses (Nursing 221, 
310, 330, 331, 332, 333, 440 and 441). 
Additional expenses include uniforms, 
name pin, watch with second hand, bandage 
scissors, stethoscope, blood pressure cuff, 
liability insurance, annual heath examina- 
tions, and standardized achievement tests. 

Students must also maintain annual Health 
Provider CPR certification as offered by the 
American Heart Association or American 
Red Cross. 

Major in Nursing 

1 he major in nursing consists of: 
Nursing 220, 221, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334, 
336, 435, 440, 441, 442, and nursing elective 
(420, 422, 430 or 443) or N80-N89. In 
addition, the following are prerequisites for 
specific nursing courses: Chemistry 108, 
115; Biology 113-114, 226; Psychology 110, 
117; Mathematics 103, and Computer 
Science elective CPTR 108, 125, or Math 
214. The religion/philosophy distribution 
requirement is met by the required courses: 
Philosophy 219 and Religion 120. The 
history/social science distribution require- 
ment is met by the required courses: Psy- 
chology 110 and 117. In addition, the 
student is required to take one course from 



among Sociology/ Anthropology 110, 114, 
220, 222, 224, 227, 228, 229, 331, 334, and 
335. The fine arts/foreign language distribu- 
tion requirement can be met by two courses 
in one department from among art, literature, 
music, or theatre; or by two courses in 
foreign language on the intermediate or 
higher course level. 

School Nurse Certification 

1 he Department of Nursing, in collabo- 
ration with the Department of Education, 
offers an additional curriculum for the 
Registered Nurse with a Bachelors degree (or 
a Lycoming College nursing student) who 
wishes to be certified as a school nurse. The 
goal of this program is to provide the RN 
with a Bachelors degree an opportunity 
for career mobility. Courses required for 
completion of the certification program 
consist of: Education 200 and 239, Philoso- 
phy 217, Psychology 338, and Nursing 420, 
422, 430, and 431. In addition, the following 
are prerequisites for specific courses: Psy- 
chology 110 and 117, Sociology****, and 
Nurs 220. 

Additional information for registered 
nurses seeking School Nurse Certification is 
available from the Department of Nursing. 
Individualized advisement is offered to all 
prospective School Nurse candidates. 

Policies Specific to Nursing 

In addition to the Lycoming College 
continuance policies, the following policies 
are specific to all declared majors in the 
Department of Nursing: 
1. A grade of C- or better is required in all 
clinical nursing courses to continue in the 
nursing program. These courses are Nursing 
221, 310, 330, 331, 332, 333, 440 and 441. 
Students who earn a grade of less than 70 
percent or 1 .67 in either the theoretical or 
clinical component of a nursing course will 
be required to repeat both components of the 



course before being permitted to continue in 
the nursing sequence. 

2. Policies regarding absence from classes or 
from the clinical portion of nursing courses 
are determined by the instructor(s) respon- 
sible for the course. No absence from the 
clinical portion of the course will be excused 
other than for illness or family emergency. 
In individual cases, student may make 
arrangements with instructors to be excused 
for extracurricular activities. Excessive 
absence for any reason will necessitate 
repeating the entire course. 

Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N. 
FRESHMAN YEAR 

Fall 

Chem. 108* (Inorganic Chemistry) 1 

Eng. 106 (Composition) 1 

Psych. 1 10*(Intro to Psych.) 1 

Fine ArtsA-ang 1 

Physical Education 

4 
Spring 

Chem. 115*(Brief Organic Chemistry) 1 

Eng. Elective 1 

Psych. 117*(Developmental Psych.) 1 

Fine ArtsA-ang 1 

Physical Education 

4 
SOPHOMORE YEAR 
Fall 

Bio. 113 (Anatomy and Physiology) 1 

Computer Science Elective** 
Nur. 220 (Concepts of Nutrition in 

Family Health) 0.75 

Rel. 120 (Death and Dying) 1 

3.75 
Spring 

Bio. 1 14 (Anatomy and Physiology) 1 

Math 103 (Intro, to Statistics) 1 

Bio. 226 (Microbiology for Health 

Sciences) 1 

Nur. 221 (Foundations of Professional 

Practice) 1.25 

4.25 



JUNIOR YEAR 
Fall 

Nur. 330 (Nursing Care of the 

Developing Family I) 1.5 

Nur. 332 (Nursing Care of the 

Adult I) 1.5 

Nur. 334 (Basic Concepts of 

Pharmacology and 

Therapeutics) 1 

4 
Spring 
Nur. 331 (Nursing Care of the 

Developing Family II) 1.5 

Nur. 333 (Nursing Care of the 

Adult II) 1.5 

3 
May Term 
Nur. 336 (The Nurse in the Social 

System) 1 

SENIOR YEAR 
Fall 

Nur. 435 (Nursing Research) 1 

Nur. 440 (Nursing Care of the 

Emotionally Troubled 

Individual & Family) 1.5 

Nursing Elective*** 0.5 

Guided Elective**** 1 

4 
Spring 
Nur. 441 (Comprehensive Nursing Care). .1.5 

Nur. 442 (Professional Issues) 0.5 

Phil. 219 (Ethical Issues in Biology 

and Medicine) 1 

Elective 1 

4 

♦Prerequisite to Sophomore year. 

**Student must select one course from CPTR 108, 125 
or Math 214. 

***Student must select one course from NUR 420, 422, 
430. 443. or N80-89. 

****Student must select one course from Soc. 1 10. 1 14, 
220. 222. 224. 227. 228. 229, 331, 334, or 335. Other 
courses may be approved on an individual basis. 

Requirement for Graduation 32 Units (128 
Credits). The student may take additional 
units for electives, independent study and/or 
honors. 



iroi 



220 

CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION 

IN FAMILY HEALTH 

Essentials of normal nutrition and their 
relationship to the health of individuals and 
families. These concepts serve as a basis for 
the development of an understanding of 
therapeutic application of dietary principles 
and the health professional's role and respon- 
sibility in this facet of client care. Three 
hours of lecture. 314 unit. Prerequisites: 
Chemistry 108, 115, or consent of instructor. 
Open to non-nursing majors. 

221 

FOUNDATIONS OF PROFESSIONAL 
NURSING PRACTICE 

Introduction of major theoretical elements 
underlying professional nursing practice. 
Focus on the concept of health and common 
health problems recognizing the multi- 
directional influence of the individual, 
family, and environment. In this first clinical 
course the student will utilize the nursing 
process in assisting clients to attain a maxi- 
mum level of functioning. Three house of 
lecture and five hours clinical laboratory. 
11/4 units. Prerequisites: Chemistry 108, 
115, Nursing 220, and Biology 113. Open to 
nursing majors only. 

300 

THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS 
OF PROFESSIONAL NURSING 

Theoretical concepts underlying profes- 
sional practice. Additional focus on health 
and common health problems, recognition of 
multi-directional influence of the individual, 
family, and environment. Two hour seminar. 
112 unit. Prerequisites: Successful comple- 
tion of Nursing 221 challenge examination; 
Chem 108. 115; Psych 110, 117; Bio 113. 
OPEN TO RNs ONLY. 

310 

PROCESSES ESSENTIAL 
TO NURSING PRACTICE 

Clinical course focusing on the incorpora- 
tion of nursing, group, interpersonal, and 



change processes; therapeutic communica- 
tion, family, health promotion and commu- 
nity concepts, physical assessment, collabora- 
tion, and teaching/learning principles in the 
community setting. 3/4 unit. Prerequisites: 
Successful completion of Nursing 330 and 
Nursing 332 challenge exams, Bio 114, and 
Bio 226. OPEN TO RNs ONLY. 

330-331 

NURSING CARE OF THE 
DEVELOPING FAMILY 

Examination of health and nursing needs 
of beginning and developing families. Initial 
emphasis on nursing needs of mothers and 
infants within the family unit as well as the 
common health problems of children through 
adolescence. Subsequent emphasis on 
nursing needs of children and mothers with 
health problems of acute and long term 
nature, the influence of illness on their 
development and the effect of illness on the 
family configuration. Three hours of lecture 
and 7 1/2 hours clinical laboratory. 1 1/2 
units. Prerequisite for Nursing 330: Nursing 
221 , Biology 114, 226. Prerequisite for 
Nursing 331: Nursing 330 and 334. 

332-333 

NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT 

Identification of adult health care needs 
and implementation of nursing activities 
based on an understanding of growth and 
development, pathophysiology, communica- 
tion skills, interpersonal dynamics, and 
psychosocial interventions. Three hours of 
lecture and 71/2 hours clinical laboratory. 
1 1/2 units. Prerequisite for Nursing 332: 
Nursing 221, Biology 114 and 226. Corequi- 
site: Nursing 334. Prerequisite for Nursing 
333: Nursing 332 and 334. 

334 

BASIC CONCEPTS OF PHARMACOLOGY 
AND THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals of pharmacology and thera- 
peutics are presented for the various classes 
of drugs. Relationships of pharmacological 
mechanisms to the affected biochemical and 



physiological processes. Interactions and 
toxicological aspects of drug therapy are 
reviewed. Four hours of lecture. 1 unit. 
Corequisite: Nursing 330, 332, or consent of 
instructor. Open to non-nursing majors. 

336 

THE NURSE IN THE SOCIAL SYSTEM 
Seminar discussions and clinical labora- 
tory using the hospital as a prototype. 
Theories of social systems. Examination of 
induction into the hospital system. Evalu- 
ation of standards of care. Focus on utiliza- 
tion of change theory. Twelve hours of 
lecture and 96 hours of clinical laboratory. 
1 unit. Prerequisites: Nursing 331,333, 
334. Required for the nursing major and 
offered only in May term. 

420 

HEALTH ASSESSMENT 

Identification and examination of methods 
for collecting and categorizing accurate data 
necessary for professional care. Emphasis is 
placed on the individual throughout the life 
span with identification of clinical and 
behavioral findings appropriate to each age 
group. Two hours of lecture for 112 unit. 
Two hours of lecture and a 5 hour clinical 
laboratory for 1 unit. Prerequisites: Senior 
standing or consent of instructor. 

All 

HEALTH EDUCATION 

Examination of learning theories appro- 
priate to all age groups. Discussion of the 
concepts and techniques necessary for 
assessment, planning, implementation and 
evaluation of the teaching/learning process. 
Emphasis will be placed on self-care. Two- 
hour lecture for 112 unit. Two-hour lecture 
and a 5 hour clinical laboratory for 1 unit. 
School Nurse candidates must take the one- 
unit course. Prerequisite: Senior standing 
or consent of instructor. 

430 

COMMUNITY HEALTH NURSING 

Overview of the role of the community 
health nurse in a variety of settings, e.g., 



industries, state health clinics, MHMR, 
school systems. Discussion of wellness 
promotion, availability of community 
resources, environmental health, prevention 
and treatment of communicable diseases, and 
group process with emphasis on communica- 
tion skills. Two hour lecture for 112 unit. 
Two hour lecture and a 5 hour clinical 
laboratory for 1 unit. School Nurse candi- 
dates must take the equivalent of one unit 
course. Prerequisite: Senior standing or 
consent of the instructor. 

431 

SCHOOL NURSE PRACTICUM 

Essentials of school health, school nursing 
and health promotion. These concepts serve 
as a basis for the development of an under- 
standing of the role of the school with the 
opportunity to function in the role of the 
school nurse. It is a course built on the 
culmination of knowledge obtained in 
previous nursing courses and nursing experi- 
ences. 210 hours clinical and seminar. 1 1/2 
unit. Prerequisite: OPEN TO SCHOOL 
NURSE CANDIDATES who have met all 
other requirements for certification and have 
obtained departmental approval. 

435 

RESEARCH IN NURSING 

Expansion of theoretical basis of research 
methodology with emphasis on analyzing, 
criticizing, and interpreting nursing research. 
Development of a research proposal focusing 
on a nursing problem. Four hours of lecture. 
1 unit. Prerequisite: Mathematics 103, 
Computer Science elective, and Nursing 
330 and 332 or consent of instructor. Open 
to non-nursing majors. 

440 

NURSING CARE OF THE 
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY 

Examination of disturbed human relation- 
ships with focus on intrapsychic, interper- 
sonal, and physiologic etiology. Emphasis on 



A 



advanced therapeutic nurse-patient relation- 
ships within context of family, community, 
and health care systems. Three hours of 
lecture and 7 112 hours clinical laboratory. 
1 1/2 hours clinical laboratory. 1 1/2 units. 
Prerequisite: Nursing 331, 333, 336. 

441 

COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE 

Culminating nursing course with focus on 
leadership and management skills in a choice 
of clinical settings. Seminars provide 
opportunities for students to share common- 
alities and unique aspects of professional 
practice. Three hours of lecture and 71/2 
hours of clinical laboratory. 1 1/2 units. 
Prerequisite: Nursing 336, 440. 

442 

PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 

An analysis of nursing issues in the 
context of the historical background of the 
profession, the social forces which influence 
nursing, and nursing's impact upon society. 
Two-hour seminar. 1/2 unit. Prerequisite: 
Senior standing or consent of instructor. 

443 

TOPICS IN NURSING 

Selected topic courses in nursing designed 
to permit students to pursue subjects which, 
because of their specialized nature, may not 
be offered on a regular basis. 1/2 unit. 
Prerequisite: Senior standing or consent of 
instructor. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY IN NURSING 

An opportunity to develop and implement 
an individual plan of study under faculty 
guidance. 1/2 unit. Prerequisite: Senior 
standing or consent of chairperson. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDIES FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 




Philosophy 

Associate Professors: Griffith, Whelan 
Assistant Professor: Herring (Chairperson) 

1 he study of philosophy develops a 
critical understanding of the basic concepts 
and presuppositions around which we 
organize our thought in science, religion, 
education, morality, the arts, and other 
human enterprises. 

A major in philosophy, together with 
appropriate other courses, can provide an 
excellent preparation for policy-making 
positions of many kinds, for graduate study in 
several fields, and for careers in education, 
law, and the ministry. The major in philoso- 
phy consists of eight courses numbered 110 
or above, including 438, 439, 449 and at least 
three other courses numbered 225 or above. 



mk. 



A minor in Philosophy consists of any 
four philosophy courses numbered 220 or 
above; or any five philosophy courses 
numbered 1 10 or above, three of which must 
be numbered 300 or above. Three more 
specialized minors are also available: a 
minor in Philosophy and Law consists of four 
courses from Philosophy 224, 225, 334, 335, 
449 or Independent Studies or five courses 
including any three courses from the preced- 
ing hst and any two courses from Philosophy 
115, 216, 218, 219; a minor in Philosophy 
and Science consists of four courses from 
Philosophy 223, 225, 331, 333, 449 or 
Independent Studies; a minor in the History 
of Philosophy consists of four courses from 
Philosophy 223, 224, 438, 439, 449 or 
Independent Studies. Since topics in Philoso- 
phy 449 and independent studies projects 
vary, these courses may be used to count 
toward a specialized minor only if they are 
approved in advance by the department. 

105 

PRACTICAL REASONING 

A general introduction to topics in logic 
and their application to practical reasoning, 
with primary emphasis on detecting fallacies, 
evaluating inductive reasoning, and under- 
standing the rudiments of scientific method. 

110 

INTRODUCTION TO 
PHILOSOPfflCAL PROBLEMS 

An introductory course designed to show 
the nature of philosophy by examination of 
several examples of problems which have 
received extended attention in philosophical 
literature. These topics often include the 
relation of the mind to the body, the possibil- 
ity of human freedom, arguments about the 
existence of God, the conditions of knowl- 
edge, and the relation of language to thought. 
Some attention is also given to the principles 
of acceptable reasoning. 



114 

PHILOSOPHY AND PERSONAL CHOICE 
An introductory philosophical examina- 
tion of a number of contemporary moral 
issues which call for personal decision. 
Topics often investigated include: the 
"good" life, obligation to others, sexual 
ethics, abortion, suicide and death, violence 
and pacifism, obedience to the law, the 
relevance of personal beliefs to morality. 
Discussion centers on some of the sugges- 
tions philosophers have made about how to 
make such decisions. 

115 

PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY 

An introductory philosophical examina- 
tion of the moral and conceptual dimension 
of various contemporary public issues, such 
as the relation of ethics to politics and the 
law, the enforcement of morals, the problems 
of fair distribution of goods and opportuni- 
ties, the legitimacy of restricting the use of 
natural resources, and the application of 
ethics to business practice. Discussion 
centers on some of the suggestions philoso- 
phers have made about how to deal with 
these issues. 

117 

PHILOSOPHY AND 

SUPERNATURAL PHENOMENA 

A critical examination of the philosophi- 
cal issues raised by near death and out of 
body experiences, ESP, time travel, reports of 
ghosts and spirits, astrology, prophecy, 
demon possession, faith healing, miracles, 
psychokinesis, and the like. Offered May and 
Summer terms only. 

216 

ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS 

An introductory philosophical examina- 
tion of a variety of moral problems that arise 
concerning the American business system. 
Included are a systematic consideration of 
typical moral problems faced by individuals 



^Bck 



and an examination of common moral criti- 
cisms of the business system itself. 

217 

PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 

IN EDUCATION 

An examination of the basic concepts 
involved in thought about education, and a 
consideration of the various methods for 
justifying educational proposals. Typical of 
the issues discussed are: Are education and 
indoctrination different? What is a liberal 
education? Are education and schooling 
compatible? What do we need to learn? 
Alternate years. 

218 

PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

An introductory examination of various 
philosophical issues and concepts which are 
of special importance in legal contexts. 
Discussion includes both general topics, such 
as the justification of punishment, and more 
specific topics, such as the insanity defense 
and the rights of the accused. Readings 
are arranged topically and include both 
classical and contemporary sources. 

219 

ETHICAL ISSUES IN 
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE 

A philosophical investigation of some of 
the ethical issues which arise as a result of 
contemporary medical and biological 
technology. Typical of these issues are 
euthanasia, behavior control, patient rights, 
experimentation on humans, fetal research, 
abortion, genetic engineering, population 
control, and distribution of health resources. 

223 

HISTORY OF SCIENCE 

AND METAPHYSICS 

An historical survey of the attempt to 
understand the physical universe. Particular 
attention is paid to common origins of 



philosophy and science in the works of the 
ancient Greek philosophers, to the question 
of how scientific and philosophical thinking 
differs from mythological and technological 
thinking, to the rationalism-empiricism 
dispute in science and metaphysics, and to 
the interaction between philosophy and 
science in formulating fundamental questions 
about the physical universe and in developing 
and criticizing concepts designed to answer 
them. Alternate years. 

224 

HISTORY OF SOCIAL AND 

POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

An historical survey of the most important 
social and political philosophers from 
Socrates to Marx. Special attention is paid to 
the relationship between ethics and politics as 
seen by Plato and Aristotle and to the social 
contract theories of Hobbes, Locke, and 
Rousseau. Alternate years. 

225 

SYMBOLIC LOGIC 

A study of modem symbolic logic and its 
application to the analysis of arguments. 
Included are truth-functional relations, the 
logic of prepositional functions, and deduc- 
tive systems. Attention is also given to 
various topics in the philosophy of logic. 

331 

PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE 

An examination of a variety of classical 
and contemporary philosophical questions 
about human nature. Among the questions 
typically considered are these: Is there such 
a thing as human nature? Are human beings 
different, in any fundamental way, from other 
animals? Are human beings free? Is human 
consciousness just a brain process? Are 
human beings inherently predisposed to evil? 
Are human beings biologically determined to 
be selfish or aggressive? Are the differences 
in achievement between men and women 



A 



biologically based? Prerequisite: Students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor' s permission. 

332 

PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 

A philosophical examination of religion. 
Included are such topics as the nature of 
religious discourse, arguments for and against 
the existence of God, and the relation 
between religion and science. Readings from 
classical and contemporary soiu^ces. Pre- 
requisite: Students without previous study in 
philosophy must have instructor' s permission. 
Alternate years. 

333 

PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE 

A consideration of philosophically 
important conceptual problems arising from 
reflection about natural science, including 
such topics as the nature of scientific laws 
and theories, the character of explanation, the 
import of prediction, the existence of "non- 
observable" theoretical entities such as 
electrons and genes, the problem of justifying 
induction, and various puzzles associated 
with probability. Prerequisite: Students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor' s permission. Alternate 
years. 

334 

CONTEMPORARY 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

A systematic philosophical investigation 
of the relation between human nature and the 
proper social and political order. Topics 
studied include the purpose of government, 
the nature of legitimate authority, the 
foundation of human rights, and the limits of 
human freedom. Emphasis is placed on the 
logic of social and political thought and on 
the analysis of basic principles and concepts. 
Prerequisite: Students without previous 
study in philosophy must have instructor's 
permission. 



335 

ETHICAL THEORY 

An inquiry concerning the grounds which 
distinguish morally right from morally wrong 
actions. Central to the course is critical 
consideration of the proposals and the 
rationales of relativists, egoists, utilitarians, 
and other ethical theorists. Various topics in 
metaethics are also included. Prerequisite: 
Students without previous study in philosophy 
must have instructor' s permission. 

438 

ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the ancient 
Greek philosophers, with particular emphasis 
on Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: Two 
courses in philosophy or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

439 

EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the Continental 
Rationalists (Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz), 
the British Empiricists (Locke, Berkeley, 
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: Two courses 
in philosophy or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

449 

DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR 

An investigation carried on by discussions 
and papers, into one philosophical problem, 
text, philosopher, or movement. A different 
topic is selected each semester. Recent 
topics include artificial intelligence, the 
ethics of research on human subjects, life 
after death, personal identity, and human 
rights. This seminar is designed to provide 
junior and senior philosophy majors and 
other qualified students with more than the 
usual opportunity for concentrated and 
cooperative inquiry. Prerequisite: Consent 
of instructor. This seminar may be repeated 
for credit. 



£s^ 




470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Recent independent studies in philosophy 
include Nietzsche, moral education, Rawls' 
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia, 
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



Physics 

(See Astronomy/Physics) 



Physical 
Education 

Associate Professor: Burch 
Assistant Professor: Whitehill 
Instructor: Holmes (Chairperson) 

Athletic Training Internship 

l^ycoming College established an ap- 
prenticeship program in 1979 after recogniz- 
ing two conditions: the importance of the 
care and prevention of athletic injuries by 
trained professionals, and the career's 
promising growth potential. 

To complete the internship students are 
required to take the four courses below as 
well as Biology 113 & 114 and Nursing 220. 
Students also are required to undergo 
practical work under the supervision of 
Lycoming's certified athletic trainer. Stu- 
dents are officially accepted into the Intern- 
ship program after successful completion of 
the first year of practical work and Athletic 
Training 110. 

Students who finish the Internship 
program become eligible to participate 
in the National Athletic Trainers Association 
(N.A.T.A.) Certification examination to earn 
the status of an N.A.T.A. certified trainer. 
This Internship program also allows the 
passing students to qualify for the State 
examination to become Class B athletic 
trainers under Pennsylvania Act 63 
P.S.S1310.1. Students interested in this 
program should contact the Physical Educa- 
tion Department. 

Athletic training classes do not count 
toward fulfilling graduation requirements 
except as the physical education requirements 
of two courses. 

110 

BASIC ATHLETIC TRAINING 

Covers the basics in prevention, evalu- 
ation, treatment, and rehabilitation of athletic 



iffiw 



injuries. Two lectures, one lab per week. 
Three credit hours. Prerequisite: CPR 
certification and Basic First Aid certification. 

215 

ANALYSIS OF HUMAN MOVEMENT 

Basic concepts of Kinesiology, the study 
of human movement, and Biomechanics, the 
study of mechanical aspects of human 
movement. Three lectures per week, project. 
Three credit hours. Prerequisite: Biology 
113 & 114. 

310 

ADVANCED ATHLETIC TRAINING 

A more in-depth course in injury evalu- 
ation, rehabilitation, and therapeutic modali- 
ties. Three lectures per week. Three credit 
hours. Prerequisite: A.T. 110. 

410 

EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY 

The study of the effects of exercise on the 
human body. Two lectures and one lab per 
week. Three credit hours. Prerequisite: 
Instructor approval. Alternate years. 

Physical Education 

101 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Coeducational physical education classes. 
Basic instructions in fundamentals, knowl- 
edge, and appreciation of sports that include 
swimming, tennis, volleyball, archery, 
soccer, golf, badminton, physical fitness, and 
other activities. Backpacking, cross-country 
and alpine skiing, jogging, modern dance, 
and cycling are offered on a contract basis. 
Beginning swimming is required for all non- 
swimmers. Students may select any activity 
offered. A reasonable degree of proficiency 
is required in the activities. Emphasis is on 
the potential use of activities as recreational 
and leisure-time interests. Two semesters of 
physical education (two hours per week) are 
required. All physical education classes are 
open to men and women. 




Political Science 



Professors: Giglio (Acting Chairperson), 

Roskin (On Leave) 
Part-time Instructor: Wolf 

1 he major is designed to provide a 
systematic understanding of government 
and politics at the international, national, 
state and local levels. Majors are encouraged 
to develop their faculties to make independ- 
ent, objective analyses which can be applied 
to the broad spectrum of the social sciences. 

Although the political science major is not 
designed as a vocational major, students with 
such training may go directly into govern- 
ment service, journalism, teaching, or private 
administrative agencies. A political science 
major can provide the base for the study of 
law, or for graduate studies leading to 
administrative work in federal, state, or local 
governments, international organizations, or 
college teaching. Students seeking certifica- 
tion to teach secondary school social studies 



A 



may major in political science but should 
consult their advisors and the education 
deparunent 

A major consists of eight political science 
courses, including PoUtical Science 116. 
Prospective majors are encouraged to register 
for this course during their freshman year. 
An exemption will be granted only if it 
strengthens the student's program. In addition 
to 1 16, students must take at least one course 
in each of five areas (A to E). Students are 
encouraged, also, to select a minor in another 
department in accordance with their aca- 
demic and career interests and in consultation 
with their departmental advisor. 

For non-majors, the department offers 
three minors: a minor in Political Science 
consists of any four courses numbered 200 or 
above from areas A to E; a minor in Foreign 
Ajfairs consists of four courses selected from 
Political Science 220, 225, 243, 326, 327, 
438 and 439; and a minor in Legal Studies 
consists of Political Science 331, 335, 436 
and one other course numbered 200 or above. 
Students are encouraged to consult with 
department members on the selection of a 
minor. 

116 

INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS 

An introductory course in political science 
that asks how and why people form political 
communities, what holds them together, and 
how political systems may either improve or 
damage themselves. Includes comparison of 
the U.S. with other countries and discussion 
of current political and public-poUcy issues. 

A. American Politics 

110 

GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS 
IN THE UNITED STATES 

An introduction to American national 
government which emphasizes both struc- 
tural-functional analysis and policy-making 
processes. In addition to the legislative, 
executive, and judicial branches of govern- 



ment, attention will be given to political 
parties and interest groups, elections and 
voting behavior, and constitutional rights. 
Recommended to all social science-education 
majors and to those students who have had 
inadequate or insufficient preparation in 
American government. 

HI 

STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 

An examination of the general principles, 
major problems, and political processes of 
the states and their subdivisions, together 
with their role in a federal type of 
government. 

223 

AMERICAN PRESIDENCY 

A study of the office and powers of the 
president with analysis of his major roles as 
chief administrator, legislator, political 
leader, foreign policy maker, and com- 
mander-in-chief. Special attention is given to 
those presidents who led the nation boldly. 
Subject to student demand, but offered 
at least once during a four-year cycle. 

B. Legal Studies 

331 

CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES 

What are our rights and liberties as 
Americans? What should they be? A frank 
discussion of the nature and scope of the 
constitutional guarantees. First Amendment 
rights, the rights of criminal suspects and 
defendants, racial and sexual equaUty, and 
equal protection of the laws. Students will 
read and brief the more important Supreme 
Court decisions. Prerequisite: Junior or 
senior standing or consent of instructor. 

335 

LAW AND SOCIETY 

An examination of the nature, sources, 
functions, and limits of law as an instrument 
of political and social control. Included for 
discussion are legal problems pertaining to 
the family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty, 



A 



and minority groups. Prerequisite: Junior or 
senior standing or consent of instructor. 

436 

MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Mass Communi- 
cation 331. Prerequisite: Junior or senior 
standing or consent of instructor. 

C. Applied Politics 

244 

THE POLITICAL FILM 

The great and enduring political questions 
presented in fiction movies, for classroom 
discussion and papers. Course draws from a 
library of cinema classics on videotape to 
probe political arrangements, power relation- 
ships, and the legal process. Alternate years. 

333 

BUREAUCRACY AND PUBLIC 

ADMINISTRATION 

What is bureaucracy? Why and how do 
bureaucracies arise? What has been the 
political impact of growth of bureaucracy in 
government? These questions, among others, 
will be considered in this examination of 
pubUc bureaucracies. This course is highly 
recommended to students planning to take an 
internship in city or county government 
through the political science department. 
Subject to student demand, but offered at 
least once during a four-year cycle. 

347 

WOMEN AND POLITICS 

The historical, philosophical, and 
practical context and conduct of women in a 
variety of political roles. This course 
considers both elective and nonelective 
activities, and includes analyses of women's 
issues currently on legislative and court 
agendas. Alternate years. 



448 

PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING 

A course dealing with the general topic 
and methodology of polling. Content 
includes exploration of the processes by 
which people's political opinions are formed, 
the manipulation of public opinion through 
the uses of propaganda, and the American 
response to politics and poUtical issues. 

D. Comparative Politics 

220 

EUROPEAN POLITICS 

A study of the political systems of Europe 
with emphasis on comparison and patterns of 
government. The course will review politics 
in Britain, France, West Germany, the Soviet 
Union, and other countries and attempt to 
find underlying similarities and differences. 

326 

POLITICAL CULTURES 

An exploration of the "people" aspects of 
political life in several countries. The way 
people interact with each other and with 
government, what they expect from the 
system, how they acquire their political 
attitudes and styles, and how these contribute 
to the type of government. Alternate years. 

438 

POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS 

The causes and possible cures for socio- 
political backwardness in Asia, Africa, and 
Latin America. Alternate years. 

E. International Relations 

225 

WORLD POLITICS 

Why is there war? An introduction to 
international relations with emphasis on the 
varieties of conflicts which may grow 
into war. 



VH^ 



243 

THE VIETNAM WAR 

The background and context of the war, 
how the United States got involved, the 
military lessons, and the war's impact on 
U.S. society, politics, and economy. Alter- 
nate years. 

327 

CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS 
The study of several current areas of 
international tension and conflict, including 
relations among the United States, Soviet 
Union, and China, plus the Middle East and 
whatever new danger spots arise over time. 
Alternate years. 

439 

AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 

The U.S. role in the world in geographic, 
strategic, historical, and ideological perspec- 
tives, plus an examination of the domestic 
forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate years. 

F. Special Programs 

470-479 

INTERNSHIPS (See index) 

Students may receive academic credit for 
serving as interns in structured learning 
situations with a wide variety of public and 
private agencies and organizations. Students 
have served as interns with the Public 
Defender's Office, the Lycoming County 
Court Administrator, and the Williamsport 
City government. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Current studies relate to elections — local, 
state, and federal — while past studies have 
included Soviet and world politics. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 




Psychology 

Professor: Hancock 
Associate Professors: Berthold 

(Chairperson), Ryan 
Assistant Professor: Balleweg 
Part-time Instructors: Dowell, Haddon 

1 he major provides training in both 
theoretical and applied psychology. It is 
designed to meet the needs of students 
seeking careers in psychology or other 
natural or social sciences. It also meets the 
needs of students seeking a better understand- 
ing of human behavior as a means of further- 
ing individual and career goals in other areas. 
Psychology majors and others are urged to 
discuss course selections in psychology with 
members of the department to help insure 
appropriate course selection. 

A major consists of 32 semester hours in 
psychology, including Psychology 1 10, 336, 
431, and 432. Statistics also is required. 

A minor in Psychology consists of 20 
semester hours in psychology including 
Psychology 110 and four other psychology 
courses (three of which must be numbered 
200 or above) which must be approved by the 
deparunent. 



101 
TOPICS 

Exploration of a specific basic or applied 
topic in psychology. Different topics will be 
explored different semesters. Potential topics 
include the psychology of disasters, applied 
behavioral psychology, and organizational 
psychology. The course is open to elemen- 
tary and advanced undergraduates. No Pre- 
requisites. One-half unit of credit. Maybe 
repeated once for credit with departmental 
permission. May not be used to satisfy 
distribution or major requirements. 

110 

INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
human and other animal behavior. Areas 
considered may include: learning, personal- 
ity, social, physiological, sensory, cognition, 
and developmental. 

112 

GROUP PROCESSES AND 
INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION 
An introduction to research and theories 
on small group formation, structure, and 
performance. Topics include group commu- 
nication, conformity, leadership, conflict, and 
decision-making. Emphasis will be placed 
upon applying principles of group dynamics 
to different types of groups. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor. 
May term only. 

116 

ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the patterns of deviant 
behavior with emphasis on cause, function, 
and treatment. The various models for the 
conceptualization of abnormal behavior 
are critically examined. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110. 

117 

DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

A study of the basic principles of human 
growth and development throughout the life 
span. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 



JmL 



118 

ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 

The study areas will include theories of 
adolescence; current issues raised by as well 
as about the "generation of youth"; research 
findings bearing on theories and issues of 
growth beyond childhood, and self- 
exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

224 

SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The scientific exploration of interpersonal 
communication and behavior. Topics include 
attitudes and attitude change, attraction and 
communication, social perception and social 
influence, prosocial and antisocial behavior 
and group processes. Prerequisites: 
Psychology 110. 

225 

INDUSTRIAL AND 
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 
The application of the principles and 
methods of psychology to selected industrial 
and organizational situations. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor. 

239 

BEHAVIOR MODinCATION 

A detailed examination of the applied 
analysis of behavior. Focus will be on the 
application of experimental method to the 
individual clinical case. The course will 
cover targeting behavior, base-rating, 
intervention strategies, and outcome evalu- 
ation. Learning-based modification tech- 
niques such as contingency management, 
counter-conditioning, extinction, discrimina- 
tion training, aversive conditioning, and 
negative practice will be examined. Pre- 
requisite: Psychology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

240 

PSYCHOLOGY OF ADULT 

PERSONAL ADJUSTMENT 

A study of psychological theories and 
research on coping with normal developmen- 
tal changes and common problems of adult- 



hood. Focus will be upon adult transitions, 
stress management, intimate relationships, 
sexuality, parenting skills, and work adjust- 
ment. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

333 

PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the physiological psy- 
chologist's method of approach to the 
understanding of behavior as well as the set 
of principles that relate the function and 
organization of the nervous system to the 
phenomena of behavior. Prerequisite: Psy- 
chology 110 or consent of instructor. 

334 

PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric methods and theory, 
including scale transformation, norms, 
standardization, validation procedures, and 
estimation of reliability. Prerequisites: Psy- 
chology 110 and statistics. 

335 

HISTORY AND SYSTEMS OF 

PSYCHOLOGY 

The growth of scientific psychology and 
the theories and systems that have accompa- 
nied its development. Prerequisite: Four 
courses in psychology. 

336 

PERSONALITY THEORY 

A review of the major theories of person- 
ality development and personality function- 
ing. In addition to covering the details of 
each theory, the implications and applications 
of each theory will be considered. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

337 
COGNITION 

An investigation of human mental 
processes along the two major dimensions: 
directed and undirected thought. Topic areas 
include recognition, attention, conceptualiza- 
tion, problem-solving, fantasy, language, 
dreaming, and creativity. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110. 



338 

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
the teaching-learning process. Areas consid- 
ered may include educational objectives, 
pupil and teacher characteristics, concept 
learning, problem-solving and creativity, 
attitudes and values, motivation, retention 
and transfer, evaluation and measurement. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

341 

PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A review of contemporary theory and 
research on the psychology of gender 
differences. The major theories and basic 
research on gender differences will be 
covered. Special topics include sex differ- 
ences in achievement, power, and communi- 
cation; sex-role stereotypes; beliefs about 
masculinity and femininity; and gender 
influences on mental health. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110. 

431 

LEARNING EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

Learning processes. The examination of 
the basic methods and principles of animal 
and human learning. Prerequisite: Psychol- 
ogy 110 and statistics. 

432 

SENSORY EXPERIMENTAL 

PSYCHOLOGY 

The examination of psychophysical 
methodology and basic neurophysiological 
methods as they are applied to the under- 
standing of sensor processes. Prerequisites: 
Psychology 110 and statistics. 



iffik. 



448-449 

PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY 

An off-campus experience in a commu- 
nity setting offering psychological services, 
supplemented with classroom instruction and 
discussion. Psychology 448 covers the basic 
counseling skills, while Psychology 449 
covers the major theoretical approaches 
to counseling. Prerequisite: Consent of 
instructor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Internships give students an opportunity to 
relate on-campus academic experiences to 
society in general and to their post-baccalau- 
reate objectives in particular. Students have, 
for example, worked in prisons, public and 
private schools, county government, and for 
the American Red Cross. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Independent study is an opportunity for 
students to pursue special interests in areas 
for which courses are not offered. In addi- 
tion, students have an opportunity to study a 
topic in more depth than is possible in the 
regular classroom situation. Studies in the 
past have included child abuse, counseling of 
hospital patients, and research in the psychol- 
ogy of natural disasters. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 
Honors in psychology requires original 
contributions to the literature of psychology 
through independent study. The most recent 
honors project was a study of the effect of 
self-esteem on attitude-behavior consistency. 




Religion 



Professor: Guerra (Chairperson), Hughes 
Assistant Professor: Van Voorst 

A major consists of 10 courses, includ- 
ing Religion 113, 114, and 120. At least 
seven courses must be taken in the depart- 
ment. The following courses may be counted 
toward fulfilling the major requirements: 
Greek 221 and 222, Hebrew 221 and 222, 
History 340 and 416, Philosophy 332, and 
Sociology 333. 

A minor in Religion consists of one course 
from Religion 1 10, 1 13, 1 14 and four religion 
courses numbered 200 or above. 

An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical 
Languages requires the completion of Greek 
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222. 

110 

INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION 

Designed for the beginning student, this 
course examines what it means to be reli- 



iwck 



gious. Some of the issues are the definition 
of religion, the meaning of symbolism, 
concepts of God, ecstatic phenomena. 
Specific attention will be devoted to the 
current problem of cults and religious liberty. 

113 

OLD TESTAMENT FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature 
within its historical setting and in the light of 
archaeological findings to show the faith and 
religious life of the Hebrew- Jewish commu- 
nity in the Biblical period, and an introduc- 
tion to the history of interpretation with an 
emphasis on contemporary Old Testament 
criticism and theology. 

114 

NEW TESTAMENT FAITH 

AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature 
within its historical setting to show the faith 
and religious life of the Christian community 
in the Biblical period, and an introduction to 
the history of interpretation with an emphasis 
on contemporary New testament criticism 
and theology. 

119 

RELIGION AND POPULAR CULTURE 

An examination of the interaction of 
religion and culture in a historical perspec- 
tive followed by a direct analysis of the 
ethical and religious issues raised by contem- 
porary American popular culture. Readings 
include artistic and social-scientific as well 
as ethical and religious approaches to popular 
culture. 

120 

DEATH AND DYING 

A study of death from personal, social and 
universal standpoints with emphasis upon 
what the dying may teach the living. Princi- 
pal issues are the stages of dying, bereave- 
ment, suicide, funeral conduct, and the 
religious doctrines of death and immortality. 



Course includes, as optional, practical 
projects with terminal patients under profes- 
sional supervision. Only one course from the 
combination 120-121 may be used for 
distribution. 

121 

AFTER DEATH AND DYING 

An examination of the question of life 
after death in terms of contemporary clinical 
studies, the New Testament resurrection 
narratives, the Asian doctrine of reincarna- 
tion, and the classical theological beliefs of 
providence and predestination. Religion 120 
is recommended but not required. Only one 
course from the combination 120-121 may be 
used for distribution. 

222 

PROTESTANTISM IN 
THE MODERN WORLD 

An examination of Protestant thought and 
life from Luther to the present against the 
backdrop of a culture rapidly changing from 
the 17th century scientific revolution to 
Marxism, Darwinism, and depth psychology. 
Special attention will be paid to the constant 
interaction between Protestantism and the 
world in which it finds itself. 

223 

THE BACKGROUNDS OF CHRISTIANITY 

A study of the historical, cultural, and 
religious background of the formation of 
Christianity and the antecedents of Christian 
belief and practice in post-exilic Judaism and 
in Hellenism. 

224 

JUDAISM AND ISLAM 

An examination of the rise, growth, and 
expansion of Judaism and Islam with special 
attention given to the theological contents of 
the literatures of these rehgions as far as they 
are normative in matters of faith, practice, 
and organization. Also, a review of their 
contributions to the spiritual heritage of 
mankind. 



225 

ORIENTAL RELIGION 

A phenomenological study of the basic 
content of Hinduism, Buddhism, and Chinese 
Taoism with special attention to social and 
political relations, mythical and aesthetic 
forms, and the East- West dialogue. 

226 

BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY 

A study of the role of archaeology in 
reconstructing the world in which the 
Biblical literature originated with special 
attention given to archaeological results that 
throw light on the clarification of the Biblical 
text. Also, an introduction to basic archaeo- 
logical method and a study in depth of 
several representative excavations along with 
the artifacts and material culture recovered 
from different historical periods. 

227 

HISTORY AND THEOLOGY 

OF THE EARLY CHURCH 

An examination of the life and theology 
of the church from the close of the New 
Testament to the fifth century. Special 
attention will be given to the struggles of the 
church with heretical movements, the 
controversies concerning the person and 
nature of Christ, and the encounter of the 
church with the Roman Empire. 

228 

HISTORY AND CULTURE 

OF THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST 

A study of the history and culture of 
Mesopotamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, and 
Egypt from the rise of the Sumerian culture 
to Alexander the Great. Careful attention 
will be given to the religious views prevalent 
in the ancient Near East as far as these views 
interacted with the culture and faith of the 
Biblical tradition. 



230 

PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION 

A study into the broad insights of psychol- 
ogy in relation to the phenomena of religion 
and religious behavior. The course concen- 
trates on religious experience or manifesta- 
tions rather than concepts. Tentative solu- 
tions will be sought to questions such as: 
What does it feel like to be religious or to 
have a religious experience? What is the 
religious function in human development? 
How does one think psychologically about 
theological problems? 

331 

CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

A study of Christian ethics as a normative 
perspective for contemporary moral problems 
with emphasis upon the interaction of law 
and religion, decision making in the field of 
biomedical practice, and the reconstruction of 
society in a planetary civilization. 

332 

CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN 

CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

An examination of the approach of 
religion and other disciplines to an issue of 
current concern; current topics include the 
theological significance of law, the ethics of 
love, and the Holocaust. The course may be 
repeated for credit if the topic is different 
from one previously studied. 

337 

BIBLICAL TOPICS 

An in-depth study of BibUcal topics 
related to the Old and New Testaments. 
Topics include prophecy, wisdom literature, 
the Dead Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus, 
Pauline theology, Judaism and Christian 
origins, redaction criticism - the way the 
Synoptic Gospels and John give final form to 
their message. Course mil vary from year to 
year and may be taken for credit a second 
time if the topic is different form one previ- 
ously studied. 



.^ffek 



341 

CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES 

A study of the theological significance of 
some contemporary intellectual develop- 
ments in Western culture. The content of this 
course will vary from year to year. Subjects 
studied in recent years include the theological 
significance of Freud, Marx, and Nietzsche; 
Christianity and existentialism; theology and 
depth psychology; the religious dimension of 
contemporary literature. 

342 

THE NATURE AND 
MISSION OF THE CHURCH 

A study of the nature of the Church as 
"The People of God" with reference to the 
Biblical, Protestant, Orthodox, and Roman 
Catholic traditions. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in religion usually work in local 
churches under the supervision of the pastor 
and a member of the faculty. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Current study areas are in the Biblical 
languages. Biblical history and theology. 
Biblical archaeology, comparative rehgions, 
and the ethics of technology. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 




Scholar Program 

Associate Professor: Boerckel (Director) 

1 he Lycoming college Scholar Program 
is a special program designed to meet the 
needs and aspirations of highly motivated 
students of superior intellectual ability. The 
Lycoming Scholar satisfies the college dis- 
tribution requirements, generally on a more 
exacting level and with more challenging 
courses than the average student. Lycoming 
Scholars also participate in special interdisci- 
plinary seminars and in serious independent 
study culminating in a senior project 

301 

LYCOMING SCHOLAR SEMINAR 

Team taught interdisciplinary seminar 
held each semester under the direction of the 
Lycoming Scholar Council. May be repeated 
for credit. Completion of five semesters is 
required by the Scholar Program. Prerequi- 
site: Acceptance into the Lycoming Scholar 
Program. One-quarter unit of credit. Grade 
will be recorded as "A" or "F" . 

450 

SENIOR SEMINAR 

During the senior year, Lycoming 
Scholars complete independent studies or 
departmental honors projects. These projects 
are presented to scholars and faculty in the 
senior seminar. Non-credit course. Pre- 
requisite: Acceptance into the Lycoming 
Scholar Program. 




Sociology- 
Anthropology 

Professor: Wilk (Chairperson) 

Associate Professor: Jo 

Assistant Professor: Alexander, Strauser 

1 he Sociology/ Anthropology Depart- 
ment offers two tracks in the major. Both 
tracks introduce the students to the funda- 
mental concepts of the discipline, and both 
tracks prepare the student for graduate 
school. 

Track I emphasizes the theoretical aspects 
of sociology and anthropology. Track II 
emphasizes the application of sociology and 
anthropology to human services. 

Track I - Sociology-Anthropology requires 
the core course sequence 1 10, 1 14, 229, 444, 
and 447 and three other course within the 
department with the exception of 115, 222, 
223, 225, 440, and 443. Religion 226 may 
also be counted toward the major. 



Track II - Human Services in a Socio- 
Cultural Perspective requires: Sociology- 
Anthropology 1 10, 222, 229, 443, 444, and 



447. In addition, students must select two 
courses from among the following: Sociol- 
ogy-Anthropology 220, 221, 227, 228, 300, 
334, and 335. Students are also required to 
choose two units from the following courses: 
Psychology 110, Psychology 224, Economics 
224, and Political Science 333. Recom- 
mended courses: Accounting 110, Account- 
ing 226, Spanish 111, Spanish 112, History 
126, and Philosophy 334. 

Majors in both tracks are encouraged to 
participate in the internship program. 

A minor in Sociology and Anthropology 
consists of Sociology- Anthropology 110 and 
four other sociology-anthropology courses 
(three of which must be numbered 220 or 
above) which must be approved by the 
department. Sociology-Anthropology 
courses 1 15, 223, 225, 339, and 440 cannot 
be counted toward this minor. 

110 

INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY 

An introduction to the problems, concepts, 
and methods in sociology today, including 
analysis of stratification, organization of 
groups and institutions, social movements, 
and deviants in social structure. 

114 

INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY 

An introduction to the subfields of 
anthropology; its subject matter, methodol- 
ogy, and goals. Examination of biological 
and cultural evolution, the fossil evidence for 
human evolution, and questions raised in 
relation to human evolution. Other topics 
include race, human nature, primate behav- 
ior, and prehistoric cultural development. 

115 

INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM 

An introduction to the role of law enforce- 
ment, courts, and corrections in the admini- 
stration of justice; the historical development 
of police, courts, and corrections; jurisdiction 



mk 



and procedures of courts; an introduction to 
the studies, literature, and research in 
criminal justice; careers in criminal justice. 

220 

MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY 

The history, structure, and functions of 
modem American family life, emphasizing 
dating, courtship, factors in marital adjust- 
ment, and the changing status of family 
members. Prerequisite: Socio logy- Anthro- 
pology 110 or consent of instructor. 

Ill 

JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 

A multidisciplinary approach to the study 
of the constellation of factors that relate to 
juvenile delinquency causation, handling the 
juvenile delinquent in the criminal justice 
system, treatment strategies, prevention, and 
community responsibility. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

222 

INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN SERVICES 

The course is designed for students 
interested in learning about, or entering, the 
human services profession. It will review the 
history, the range, and the goals of human 
services together with a survey of various 
strategies and approaches to human prob- 
lems. It will include practical discussions of 
social behavioral differences as they relate to 
stress and conflict in people's lives. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology- Anthropology 110 and/ 
or Psychology 110 or consent of instructor. 

223 

INTRODUCTION TO LAW 

ENFORCEMENT 

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the 
law of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of 
criminal investigation, important case law. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115 or 
consent of instructor. 



224 

RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES 

The concept of community is treated as it 
operates and affects individual and group 
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban 
settings. Emphasis is placed upon character- 
istic institutions and problems of modern city 
life. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 
110 or consent of instructor. 

225 

INTRODUCTION TO 
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION 

This course is designed for advanced 
criminal justice majors. Emphasis is placed 
on an in-depth study of detection and investi- 
gation of major crimes. Particular attention 
is placed on the use of criminalistics, legal 
parameters of evidence and interrogation, and 
prosecutory procedures; Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 223 or consent of 
instructor. Will not be counted toward the 
sociology I anthropology major. 

116 

SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 

An analysis of the dynamics, structiu"e, 
and reactions to social movements with focus 
on contemporary social movements. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 or 
consent of instructor. 

Ill 

SOCIAL PROBLEMS 

The course examines the causes, charac- 
teristics, and consequences of social prob- 
lems in America from diverse socio-cultural 
perspectives. Topics discussed typically in- 
clude crime, urban crises, family disorganiza- 
tion, poverty, race problems, drug abuse, and 
other related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

IIH 

AGING AND SOCIETY 

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics 
of the aged as individuals and as members of 
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables: 



^Bjk 



health, housing, socio-economic status, 
personal adjustment, retirement, and social 
participation. Sociological, social psycho- 
logical, and anthropological frames of 
reference utilized in analysis and description 
of aging and its relationship to society, 
culture, and personality. 

229 

CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

An examination of cultural and social an- 
thropology designed to familiarize the 
student with the analytical approaches to the 
diverse cultures of the world. The relevancy 
of cultural anthropology for an understanding 
of the human condition will be stressed. 
Topics to be covered include the nature of 
primitive societies in contrast to civilizations, 
the concept of culture and cultural relativism, 
the individual and culture, the social pattern- 
ing of behavior and social control, an anthro- 
pological perspective on the culture of 
the United States. 

300 
CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis of the sociology of law; condi- 
tions under which criminal laws develop; 
etiology of crime; epidemiology of crime, in- 
cluding explanation of statistical distribution 
of criminal behavior in terms of time, space, 
and social location. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

331 

SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A sociological examination of the role of 
women in American society through an 
analysis of the social institutions which affect 
their development. Role-analysis theory will 
be applied to the past, present, and future 
experience of women as it relates to the role 
options of society as a whole. Students will 
do an original research project on the role of 
women. Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropol- 
ogy 110. Alternate years. 



332 
INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces the student to the sociological 
concept of social institution, the types of 
social institutions to be found in all societies, 
and the interrelationships between the social 
institutions within a society. The course is 
divided into two basic parts: 1. That aspect 
which deals with the systematic organization 
of society in general, and 2. The concentra- 
tion on a particular social institution: eco- 
nomic, political, educational, or social 
welfare. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropol- 
ogy 110 or consent of instructor. 

333 

SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

An examination of the major theories of 
the relationship of religion to society and a 
survey of sociological studies of religious 
behavior. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthro- 
pology 110 or consent of instructor. 

334 

RACIAL AND CULTURAL MINORITIES 

Study of racial, cultural, and national 
groups within the framework of American 
cultural values. An analysis will include 
historical, cultural, and social factors under- 
lying ethnic and racial conflict. Field trips 
and individual reports are part of the require- 
ments for the course. Prerequisite: Sociol- 
ogy-Anthropology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

335 

CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 

Introduction to psychological anthropol- 
ogy, its theories and methodologies. Empha- 
sis will be placed on the relationship between 
individual and culture, national character, 
cognition and culture, culture and mental 
disorders, and cross-cultural considerations of 
the concept of self. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 
Offered at least once every three years. 



^i. 



336 

THE ANTHROPOLOGY 
OF PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS 

The course will familiarize the student 
with the wealth of anthropological data on 
the religions and worid views developed by 
primitive peoples. The functions of primitive 
religion in regard to the individual, society, 
and various cultiu'al institutions will be 
examined. Subjects to be surveyed include 
myth, witchcraft, vision quests, spirit 
possession, the cultural use of dreams, and 
revitalization movements. Particular empha- 
sis will be given to shamanism, transcultural 
religious experience, and the creation of 
cultural realities through religions. Both a 
social scientific and existential perspective 
will be employed. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

337 

THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 

AMERICAN INDIANS 

An ethnographic survey of native North 
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such 
as the Iroquois, Plains Indians, Pueblo, 
Kwakiutl, and Netsilik. Changes in native 
lifeways due to European contacts and United 
States expansion will be considered. Recent 
cultural developments among American 
Indians will be placed in an anthropological 
perspective. Offered at least once every 
three years. 

338 

LEGAL AND POLITICAL 

ANTHROPOLOGY 

The course is designed to familiarize the 
student with the techniques of conflict 
resolution and the utilization of public power 
in primitive society as well as the various 
theories of primitive law and government. 
The rise of the state and an anthropological 
perspective on modem law and government 
will be included. The concepts of self- 
regulation and social control, legitimacy. 



coercion, and exploitation will be the 
organizing focus. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 

339 

THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM 
Nature and history of punishment, 
evolution of the prison and prison methods 
with emphasis on prison community, prison 
architecture, institutional programs, inmate 
rights, and sentences. Review of punishment 
versus treatment, detention facilities, jails, re- 
formatories, prison organization and 
administration, custody, and discipline. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115. 

440 

PROBATION AND PAROLE 

A course designed for the advanced 
criminal justice major. While the course 
concerns the study of probation and parole as 
parts of the criminal justice system and their 
impact on the system as a whole, the primary 
emphasis is the impact on the offender. 
Particular attention is given to diagnostic 
report writing on offenders, pre-sentence 
investigation, offender classification, and 
parole planning. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 115 and 339. Alternate years. 

441 

SOCL\L STRATIFICATION 

An analysis of stratification systems with 
specific reference to American society. The 
course will include an analysis of poverty, 
wealth, and power in the United States. 
Particular attention will be given to factors 
which generate and maintain inequality, 
along with the impact of inequality on the 
lives of Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

443 

HUMAN SERVICES IN 
HELPING INSTITUTIONS 

The course examines the organizational 
and conceptual context within which human 



services are delivered in contemporary 
society. Subject to be covered include ethno- 
graphic study of nursing homes, prisons, 
therapeutic communities, mental hospitals, 
and other human service institutions. The 
methodology of fieldwork will be explored so 
as to sensitize the student to the socio- 
cultural dimensions of helping environments 
and relationships. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or Sociology -Anthropology 
229 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

444 

SOCIAL THEORY 

The history of the development of socio- 
logical thought from its earliest philosophical 
beginnings is treated through discussions and 
reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociologi- 
cal thought since the time of Comte. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 or 
consent of instructor. 

445 

ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY 

The history of the development of anthro- 
pological thought from the 18th century to 
the present. Emphasis is placed upon 
anthropological thought since 1850. Topics 
include evolutionism, historical-particu- 
larism, cultural idealism, cultural material- 
ism, functionalism, structiu^alism, and 
ethnoscience. Prerequisite: Sociology-An- 
thropology 229 or consent of instructor. 
Offered at least once very three years. 

447 

RESEARCH METHODS IN 
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study of the research process in sociol- 
ogy-anthropology. Attention is given to the 
process of designing and administering 
research and the application of research. 
Different methodological skills are consid- 
ered, including field work, questionnaire 
construction, and other methods of data 



gathering and the analysis of data. Prerequi- 
site: Sociology-Anthropology 110 and 
Mathematics 103 or consent of instructor. 

448-449 

PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces the student to a practical work 
experience involving community agencies in 
order to effect a synthesis of the student's 
academic course work and its practical appli- 
cations in a community agency. Specifics of 
the course to be worked out in conjunction 
with department, student and agency. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 
and consent of instructor. 

470-479 

INTERNSHIP (see index) 

Interns in sociology-anthropology 
typically work off campus with social service 
agencies under the supervision of administra- 
tors. However, other internship experiences, 
such as with the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum, are available. Interns in criminal 
justice work off campus in criminal justice 
agencies, such as penal institutions and 
probation and parole departments, under the 
supervision of administrative personnel. 

N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

An opportunity to pursue specific interests 
and topics not usually covered in regular 
courses. Through a program of readings and 
tutorials, the student will have the opportu- 
nity to pursue these interest and topics in 
greater depth than is usually possible in a 
regular course. 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index) 



mi. 



Theatre 

Professor: Falk (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Allen 
Part-time Instructor: Clark 
Theatre Technician: Downing 

1 he major consists of eight courses: 
Theatre 100 and seven others; a concentra- 
tion in acting, directing, or design is possible. 
In addition to the course requirements, ma- 
jors are expected to participate actively in 
Arena Theatre productions. Majors are urged 
to include courses in art, music, psychology, 
and English, or other areas of special interst. 
Three minors are available in the Theatre 
department. A minor in Theatre History and 
Literature consists of Theatre 100, 332, 333, 

335, and 400. The following courses are 
required to complete a minor in 
Performance: Theatre 100, 140, 226, 334, 

336, and either 332 or 333. To obtain a 
minor in Technical Theatre, a student must 
complete Theatre 100, 148, 228, 338, and 
420 or 430. 

The fine arts distribution requirement may 
be satisfied by selecting any two of the 
following recommended courses: Theatre 
100, 110, 140, 148, 332, 333 or other courses 
with the consent of the instructor. 

100 

INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE 

Designed as a comprehensive introduction 
to the aesthetics of theatre. From the specta- 
tor's point of view, the nature of theatre will 
be explored, including dramatic literature and 
the integral functioning of acting, directing 
and all production aspects. 

110 

INTRODUCTION TO FILM 

A basic course in understanding the film 
medium. The class will investigate film 
technique through lectures and by viewing 
regular weekly films chosen from classic, 
contemporary, and experimental short films. 




135-136 

INTRODUCTION TO DANCE I AND II 

An introduction to the techniques of basic 
movement and interpretation in ballet, jazz, 
and modem dance. Classes include improvi- 
sation and choreography. Prerequisite for 
Theatre 136: Theatre 135 or consent of 
instructor. One-half unit of credit each. Not 
open to students who have received credit for 
Music 135-136 or Music 235-236. 

137 

HISTORY OF THE DANCE I 

A survey of classical ballet from the 
Ballets de cour of 17th century France to the 
present with emphasis on the contributions of 
Petipa, Fokien, Cecchetti, and Balanchine. 
One-half unit of credit. Not open to students 
who have received credit for Music 137 
or 138. 

138 

HISTORY OF THE DANCE II 

A survey of the forms of dance, excluding 
classical ballet, as independent works of art 
and as they have reflected the history of 



J^^ 



civilization from primitive times to the 
present. Prerequisite: Theatre 137 or 
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit. 
Not open to students who have received 
credit for Music 137 or 138. 

140 

INTRODUCTION TO ACTING 

An introductory study of the actor's 
preparation with emphasis on developing the 
actor's creative imagination through improvi- 
sations and scene study. Prerequisite: 
Theatre 100. 

148 

INTRODUCTION TO 
PLAY PRODUCTION 

Stagecraft and the various other aspects of 
play production are introduced. Through ma- 
terial presented in the course and laboratory 
work on the Arena Theatre stage, the student 
will acquire experience to produce 
theatrical scenery, lighting and costumes. 

226 

INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING 

An introductory study of the function of 
the director in preparation, rehearsal, and per- 
formance. Emphasis is placed on developing 
the student's ability to analyze scripts, and on 
the development of the student's imagination. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 140. 

228 

INTRODUCTION TO SCENE 
DESIGN AND STAGECRAFT 

An introduction to the theatre with an 
emphasis on stagecraft. Productions each 
semester serve as the laboratory to provide 
the practical experience necessary to under- 
stand the material presented in the classroom. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent of 
instructor. 



231 

ADVANCED TECHNIQUES 
OF PLAY PRODUCTION 

A detailed consideration of the interre- 
lated problems and techniques of play 
analysis, production styles, and design. Of- 
fered summer only. 

232 

FUNDAMENTALS OF MAKEUP 

Essentials of stage makeup; straight, 
character, special types. Effects of light on 
makeup are included. Prerequisite: Theatre 
148. One-half unit. Alternate years. 

233 

ADVANCED MAKEUP 

Advanced techniques in makeup design. 
Three dimensional and prosthetic makeups 
are included, with emphasis on nonrealistic 
and nonhuman forms. Prerequisite: Theatre 
232. One-half unit. Alternate years. 

235-236 

INTERMEDIATE DANCE I AND II 
Studies of the techniques of basic 
movement and interpretation in ballet, jazz 
and modem dance at the intermediate level. 
Classes include improvisation and choreogra- 
phy. Prerequisite for Theatre 235: Theatre 
136 or consent of instructor. Prerequisite for 
Theatre 236: Theatre 235 or consent of 
instructor. One-half unit of credit each. Not 
open to students who have received credit for 
Music 135-136 or Music 235-236. 

332 

HISTORY OF THEATRE I 

A detailed study of the development of 
theatre from the Greeks to the Restoration. 
Alternate years. 

333 

HISTORY OF THEATRE II 

The history of the theatre from 1660. 
Alternate years. 



iBtk 



334 

INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING 
Instruction and practice in character 
analysis and projection with emphasis on 
vocal and body techniques. Prerequisite: 
Theatre 140. 

335 

THEORIES OF THE MODERN THEATRE 
An advanced course exploring the philo- 
sophical roots of the modem theatre from the 
birth of realism to the present and the 
influences on modem theatre practice. Se- 
lected readings from Nietzsche, Marx, Jung, 
Freud, Whitehead, Kierkegaard, Sarte, 
Camus, Antoine, Copeau, Stanislavski, Shaw, 
Meyerhold, Artaud, Brecht, Brook, Grotow- 
ski. Alternate years. 

336 

INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis is placed on the student's 
ability to function in preparation and re- 
hearsal. Practical experience involves the 
directing of two one-act plays from the con- 
temporary theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 226. 

337 

PLAYWRITING AND 
DRAMATIC CRITICISM 

An investigation of the techniques of 
playwriting with an emphasis on creative 
writing, culminating in a written one-act 
play, plus an historical survey of dramatic 
criticism from Aristotle to the present with 
emphasis upon developing the student's 
ability to write reviews and criticism of 
theatrical productions and films. Alternate 
years. 

338 

INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: 
LIGHTING DESIGN 

The theory of stage and lighting design 
with emphasis on their practical application 
to the theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or 
consent of instructor. 



400 

MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA 

An intensive and detailed analysis of the 
plays and related works, including criticism 
of great authors, that have shaped world 
theatre. Authors to be selected on the basis 
of interest of students and faculty. At times, 
more than one author will be treated in a 
term. Ibsen, Brecht, Moliere, Williams, 
Albee. Alternate years. May be accepted 
toward English major with consent of English 
Department. 

420 

ADVANCED STUDIO: 
COSTUME DESIGN 

The theory of costuming for the stage, 
elements of design, planning, production, and 
construction of costumes for the theatre. 
Students will participate in the design of a 
production. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or 
consent of instructor. 

430 

ADVANCED STUDIO: 
PROPERTIES DESIGN 

The theory of properties design for the 
stage, including the production of specific 
properties for staging use. Elements of 
design, fabrication, and the constmction of 
properties employing a variety of materials 
and the application of new theatrical technol- 
ogy. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent of 
instructor. 

440 

ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING 

Preparation of monologues and two- 
character scenes, contemporary and classical. 
The student will appear in major campus 
productions. Prerequisite: Theatre 234. 



m%. 




446 

ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis will be placed on the student's 
ability to produce a major three-act play from 
the script to the stage for pubhc performance. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 336. 

448 

ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN 

Independent work in conceptual and 
practical design. The student will design one 
full production as his major project. Pre- 
requisites: Theatre 228 or 338 and consent 
of instructor. 

470-409 

INTERNSHIP (see index) 

Interns in theatre work off campus in the- 
atres such as the Guthrie Theatre, Minneapo- 
lis, and the New Jersey Shakespeare Festival. 



N80-N89 

INDEPENDENT STUDY (see index) 

Some recent independent studies have 
been the roles of women as characters in 
drama, scene design, and lighting design for 
an Arena production, 

490-491 

INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (see index) 

A typical study could be the writing and 
production of an original play. 

THEATRE PRACTICUM 

Students may receive academic credit for 
supervised participation in the various 
aspects of technical production, rehearsal, 
and performance of the Theatre Department's 
major presentations in the Arena Theatre. 
Credit for Theatre Practicum is earned on a 
fractional basis. Students may register for 
one-half semester hour course credit for 



A^ 



active participation in a major production in 
the designated areas of technology and 
performance, limited to one semester hour 
credit per semester and eight semester hours 
over for years. Theatre Practicum credit may 
not be use to satisfy distribution requirements 
in Fine Arts. Students may not register for 
Theatre Practicum while taking Theatre 100 
(Introduction to Theatre) or Theatre 148 
(Play Production) without permission of the 
instructor. When scheduling, students should 
register for Theater Practicum in addition to 
the normal four academic courses. Because 
students may not be cast or assigned duties in 
time to meet the drop/add deadline, late reg- 
istration for Theatre 160 and 161 (Technical 
Theatre), (Rehearsal and Performance) will 
be permitted without penalty. 

160 

TECHNICAL THEATRE PRACTICUM 

Participation in a major production of the 
Arena Theatre in one of more of the follow- 
ing technical areas: scene construction, 
scene painting, lighting, sound, properties, 
costume, make-up. A minimum of 50 hours 
is required. May be repeated for credit. 
One-half credit hour. Prerequisite: Consent 
of instructor. 

161 

REHEARSAL AND 
PERFORMANCE PRACTICUM 

Participation in a major production of the 
Arena Theatre in one or more of the follow- 
ing rehearsal and performance areas: acting 
in a major or minor role, stage manager, di- 
rector, assistant director, choreographer. A 
minimum of 50 hours is required. May be 
repeated for credit. One-half hour credit. 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 










Women's Studies 



Professor: Jensen (Coordinator) 

Although a major in Women's Studies 
is available only under the policies regarding 
Individual Interdisciplinary Majors (see 
p. 12), an established minor in Women's 
Studies is provided. Courses required for the 
minor are: 

History 310: Women in History 
English 334: Women and Literature 
Psychology 341: Psychology of Women 
Art 339: Women in Art 

With the approval of the coordinator, one 
of the four courses may be satisfied with 
Political Science 347: Women in Politics, 
with an appropriate special course, or with an 
independent studies project. To receive 
credit for a minor in Women's Studies, a 
student must maintain at least a 2.0 average 
in courses taken for that minor. 



^^ 



Student Services 



Administration 

1 he program of student services at 
Lycoming is administered by the Office of 
Student Services, It is designed to respond to 
a diversity of student needs. Professional 
staff members are assigned the specific 
responsibilities of: 

• career counseling and placement; 

• psychological services; 

• residence life; 

• student activities; 

• religious life; 

• health services; 

• safety and security; 

• student orientation; 

• judiciary-student conduct; 

• intramural sports; 

All members of the staff are available to 
counsel and advise individual students. 

Counseling Service 

l^ounseling Service assists students in 
achieving their personal and academic goals. 
Professional and confidential services are 
provided free of charge to Lycoming stu- 
dents. Individual and group therapy, referral 
information and psychological assessment are 
offered. The Counseling Service also 
provides guidance to students with learning 
disabilities and conducts outreach programs 
for the college community. 

Career Development 
Services 

1 he Career Development Center 
provides services which are designed to help 
students identify their abilities and interest, 
set realistic career goals, and plan academic 
programs to meet these goals. Counseling 
for Lycoming students begins in the fresh- 
man year. 




In addition to individual guidance, the 
center maintains a library on specific careers, 
employment outlooks, and career trends. 
Services offered by the center include: 

• individual counseling; 

• DISCOVER, a computer assisted career 
guidance system, provides information to 
students about themselves and the world of 
work; 

• SHARE (Students Having a Real Experi- 
ence), a program in which students observe 
and work with a professional in the field; 

• placement services to aid seniors in imple- 
menting their career plans; 

• assistance to students in securing intern- 
ships, summer employment, and part- 
time employment; 

• speaker program which brings profession- 
als from a variety of careers to 
campus seminars; 

• video-cassette programs relating to job 
skills and career information; 

• microfiche copies of graduate- and profes- 
sional-school catalogs for the United States 
and abroad. 



^1^ 



Residence Halls 

IS ingle students under 23 years of age 
who do not live at the home of their parents 
or guardians are required to live in residence 
halls and eat in the dining room. All new 
resident students are forwarded a room- 
agreement form to sign after confirmation of 
their admission to Lycoming. The agreement 
is renewed each spring. 

Resident students assume responsibility 
for their rooms and furnishings. The College 
reserves the right to enter and inspect any 
room for reasons of damage, health, or 
safety, and to search any room when there is 
reason to believe a violation of College rules 
or the law is occurring or has occurred. 
Charges are assessed for damage to rooms, 
doors, and furniture. Whenever possible, 
damage to resident hall property will be 
charged to the person or persons directly re- 
sponsible. When damage occurs to common 
living areas of the residence halls (lounges, 
stairwells, lobbies, hallways, or bathrooms) 
and is clearly the result of negligence, care- 
lessness, malicious intent to destroy or theft, 
residents of the floor or building may be 
assessed for their share of the repair and/or 
replacement costs. Damage and breakage 
occurring in a room will be the responsibility 
of students occupying the room. 

Residence halls are not available for oc- 
cupancy during the vacation periods. Quiet 
hours are for study purposes and are estab- 
lished by the Office of Student Services. 
They are published in the Student Handbook 
and posted on bulletin board. Residence Hall 
Councils, which share responsibihty for 
developing and monitoring regulations, may 
vote to extend these hours. Room visitation, 
by members of the opposite sex, is permitted 
in the halls under conditions established by 
the College. 

Resident Advisors are available on 
student floors to assist with any problems 
which might arise, as well as, offer activities 
for students. These are undergraduate 



student who are hired by the College to help 
provide a good living environment for all 
students. 

Student Activities 

Otudent activities offers assistance and 
advice for all campus programs and student 
organizations. Through the efforts of the 
Campus Activities Board (C.A.B.) program- 
ming is provided for all facets of the student 
population. C.A.B. works to create an atmos- 
phere which best serves the social and 
recreational needs of the students. Student 
Activities is also responsible for Leadership 
Training and the Student Orientation staff; in 
addition, it provides support and direction for 
student government, the Interfratemity and 
Panhellenic Councils and the retention 
program. 

Religious Life 

1 he United Campus Ministry, staffed by 
a Protestant Minister and a Roman Catholic 
Priest, provides a wide range of activities in 
support of the religious lives of students. 
Ecumenical and inclusive in nature, campus 
ministry at Lycoming provides worship 
services, service projects, social occasions, 
retreats, study opportunities and personal 
counseling. The chaplains are an integral 
part of campus life and are available to stu- 
dents for a variety of situations in which they 
might need support, counsel or direction. 

Health Services 

M ormal medical treatment by the health 
service staff at the College is provided 
without cost to the student. During the fall 
and spring semesters, the College maintains 
an outpatient service in Rich Hall. It is 
staffed with a registered nurse five days a 
week from 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. The 
College physician is available for one hour 
each day, Monday through Friday. At other 
times, emergency care is available at the 



^Imk 



emergency rooms of Williamsport and 
Divine Providence Hospitals, located a short 
distance from the campus. 

Medical service charges paid by the stu- 
dent are: emergency room and emergency 
room physician's charges, special medica- 
tions. X-rays, surgery, care for major acci- 
dents, immunizations, examinations for 
glasses, physician's visits other than in the 
Health Services, referrals for treatment by 
specialists, special nursing services and 
special services. 

Entering students must provide basic 
health information to the College between the 
time of admission and the beginning of 
classes of the term to which they are admit- 
ted. Information provided by the student and 
his/her physician is confidential and is 
available only to health service staff and the 
Dean of Student Services. 

All students are required to carry acci- 
dent-sickness medical insurance. Pre-paid 
medical insurance is a requirement for par- 
ticipation in intercollegiate athletics. Lycom- 
ing College does offer a student plan that is 
voluntary and at the students' expense. 

Student Orientation 

INew students at Lycoming are required 
to attend one of three summer orientation 
sessions with at least one parent before they 
enroll in the fall. The purpose of the program 
is to acquaint new students and their parents 
with the College more fully so that new 
students begin their Lycoming experience 
under the most favorable circumstances. In 
addition, all new students are required to 
attend a two day orientation program which 
is held immediately prior to the beginning of 
the fall semester. Information on orientation 
is mailed to new students after they confirm 
their admission. 



Safety and Security 

1 he department strives to maintain an 
environment that is free of unnecessary 
hazards and disruptions. This responsibility 
includes the enforcement of Lycoming 
College rules, regulations, and policies. 
Security personnel are scheduled on an 
around-the-clock basis. An emergency 
telephone line, extension #491 1 is always 
monitored to respond to serious events on 
campus. Telephone extension #4604 is used 
to handle general security concerns. 

The office of Safety and Security solicits 
the cooperation of the entire College commu- 
nity in reporting unsafe conditions and 
suspicious activity on the Lycoming College 
campus. 

Other services provided by the department 
are: First aid and ambulatory medical 
transportation, emergency maintenance 
referral, an escort service, guest and parking 
registration, and the dissemination of 
telephone and general information to the 
public. 

Standards of Conduct 

JLycoming students are expected to 
accept responsibiUties required of adults. 
The rights of every member of the College 
community are protected by established 
regulations. Although the acceptance of the 
College's standards of behavior is an individ- 
ual responsibility, it also calls for group 
responsibility. Students should influence 
their peers to conduct themselves responsibly 
for the collective good. 

Students who are unable to demonstrate 
that they have accepted these responsibilities 
or who fail to abide by established policies 
may be dismissed at any time or semester. 

Students are given a handbook which 
contains the College's official policies, rules 
and regulations. These policies, rules and 
regulations are part of the contractual agree- 
ment students enter into when they register 
at Lycoming. 



^ffii 



Admission To 
Lycoming 







l-/ycoming College welcomes applica- 
tions from prospective students regardless of 
age, sex, race, religion, financial resources, 
color, national or ethnic background. 

Freshman Applicants 

r reshman applicants must complete the 
following steps: 

1) Submit the completed Lycoming College 
Admission Application; 

2) Submit the non-refundable $25.00 
application fee; 

3) Provide official transcripts of all high 
school and post-secondary school studies 
(whether or not completed): 



4) Submit official Scholastic Aptitude Test 
(SAT), or American College Test (ACT); 

Transfer Applicants 

JLycoming College considers applica- 
tions from students who have attended other 
post-secondary educational institutions. 
These applicants must have earned a cumula- 
tive grade point average of at least 2.0 (on a 4 
point scale) in transferable courses at the 
post-secondary institution(s) attended. 



Transfer applicants must complete each of 
the following steps: 

1) Complete and return application with the 
$25 application fee 

2) Provide official transcripts from each 
post-secondary school attended. If you 
have accumulated less than 24 semester 
hours or 36 credit hours you must also 
submit high school transcripts. 

3) Submit the Lycoming Transfer Form 

(it will be sent to you upon application). 

Applicants may transfer up to 64 semester 
credits of lower division coursework, and up 
to 32 semester credits of upper division 
coursework for a total of 96 credits. Students 
must complete the final 32 credits of their 
degree program at Lycoming College. 

Additional information regarding the 
transfer of college credit appears on page 19. 

International Applicants 

X rospective students who are neither 
citizens nor permanent residents of the 
United States are welcome to apply for 
admission. 

International applicants must complete 
each of the following steps: 

1) Submit the completed Lycoming College 
Admission Application; 

2) Provide certified true copies of all 
secondary (and when applicable, post- 
secondary) transcripts, mark sheets, diplo- 
mas and certificates in the original lan- 
guages, as well as in English (when the 
original are not in English). Translations 
of non-English materials must be certi- 
fied as true and correct; 

3) Submit two letters of recommendation. 

4) Please note that the minimum amount 
required for each academic year of study 
(September through April) at Lycoming 
College is U.S. $16,500. Summer living 
expenses (May through August) average 
an additional U.S. $2,000, and are not 
included in $16,500 amount 



5) Provide proof of the ability to read, write 
and speak English at the college level as 
evidence by TOEFL score of at least 500, 
or comparable evidence of English 
language fluency; 

6) International students who are currently 
studying in the United States must be 
"in-status" with the United States De 
partment of Justice, Immigration and 
Naturalization Service. They must also 
be eligible to transfer to Lycoming 
College. 

Note All Students: 

1) If there is additional information that 
would be helpful to the Admissions 
Committee in reviewing your application, 
please indicate on a separate piece of 
paper. 

2) If you are 24 or older you need only 
complete the unshaded sections of the 
application. If you have not taken the 
SAT or ACT assessment, that requirement 
will be waived. 





Admission Application 
Filing Period 

Applications for the fall semester will be 
accepted from June 1st of the preceding year 
through July 31st of the year in which studies 
are to begin. Applications for the spring 
semester are accepted from the preceding 
May 1st through December 15th. A limited 
number of applications may be considered on 
a space available basis up to one month prior 
to the beginning of the semester. 

Applications, when complete, are re- 
viewed and evaluated on a rolling basis. 
Generally, applicants are notified in writing, 
regarding the outcome of their applications 
within three weeks following the receipt of 
all required materials. 



Admission Decision Criteria 

Admission to Lycoming College is 
competitive. Applicants are evaluated 
on the basis of their academic preparation, 
talents, and interests, as well as the College's 
capacity to help them achieve their educa- 
tional objectives and career goals. 

Successful candidates for admission have 
typically completed a college preparatory 
program in high school which includes four 
years of English, three years of math, two 
years of foreign language, two years of 
natural of physical science, three years of 
social science, and two years of academic 
electives. 

In addition, successful admission candi- 
dates generally place in the top two-fifths of 
their high school graduating class, and have 
better than average SAT or ACT scores. 

From time to time, supplemental materi- 
als, as well as a personal interview may be 
required prior to the determination of 
admissibility. 

Confirmation of Intent 
to Enroll at Lycoming 

Admitted applicants are asked to 
confirm their intent to enroll for the fall 
semester no later than the preceding May 1st, 
or by December 1st for the following spring 
semester by submitting the appropriate 
deposit. Nonresident, commuting students 
are required to submit a $100 Tuition 
Deposit. Resident students are required to 
submit the $100 Tuition Deposit, as well as a 
$100 room Reservation Fee. Admitted 
international applicants are required to 
submit all applicable deposits prior to the 
issuance of the 1-20 form. 

Deposits are non-refundable, after May 
1st for the following fall semester, and 
December 1st for the following spring 
semester. 



^tfek 




Withdrawal of 
Admission Offers 

l^ycoming College reserves the right to 
withdraw offers of admission when: 

1) information requested as part of the 
admission application process is not provided 
by applicants. 

2) misrepresentation of fact to the College 
by applicants occur during the application 
process; 

3) the conduct of applicants is not in keeping 
with the ethical or moral standards as set 
forth in the Lycoming College Catalog or the 
Lycoming College Student Handbook. 

Admissions Office 
Location and Hours 

X rospective students and their families 
are encouraged to visit the campus for a 
student-conducted tour and an interview with 



an admissions counselor, who will provide 
additional information about the College and 
answer questions. 

The Office of Admissions is located on 
Washington Boulevard, and College Place. 
For an appointment, telephone 1-800-345- 
3920 or (717)321-4026, or write Office of 
Admissions, Lycoming College, 
WiUiamsport, PA 17701. 

Ofllce hours are: 

Weekdays - September through April 
8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. 

- May through August 8:00 a.m. 
to 4:00 p.m. 

Saturdays - September through April 
9:00 a.m. to 12:00 noon 

- May through August Saturday 
appointments by request. 



.^BcW 



Financial Matters 



Expenses for the 
Academic Year 1991-92 

1 he following expenses are effective for 
the regular fall and spring semesters. The 
College reserves the right to adjust fees at 
any time. The fees for each semester are 
payable not later than the second day of 
classes for the semester. 

Per Semester Per Year 
Fees 

Comprehensive $5,500 $11,000 
Board and 

Room Rent $1,990 $3,980 

Total $7,490 $14,980 

One-Time Student Fees 

Application Fee $25 

Admissions Fee $100 

Contingency Deposit $100 

Room Reservation Deposit $100 

Part-Time Students Fees 

Application Fee $25 

Each Unit Course $1,380 

Additional Charges 

Applied Music Fee (half-hour 

per week per semester) $150 

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost 

Laboratory Fee per Unit Course. .$20 to $160 

Reregistration Fee $25 

Parking Permit (for the 

academic year) $20 to $45 

Practice Teaching Fee 

(Payable in Junior Year) $400 

R.O.T.C. Uniform Deposit 

(Payable at Bucknell University $75 

Transcript Fee $3* 

Health Services Fee $100 

Placement Retest Fee $25 




The comprehensive fee covers the regular 
course load of twelve to sixteen credits each 
semester. Resident students must board at 
the College unless, for extraordinary reasons, 
authorization is extended for other eating 
arrangements. If a double room is used as a 
single room, there is an additional charge of 
$420 per semester. The estimated cost for 
books and supplies is up to $400 per year, 
depending on the course of study. Special 
session (May term and summer term) charges 
for tuition, room, and board are established 
during the fall semester. 

*$3 for 1 transcript; $1 for each additional 
copy ordered in the same request. Tran- 
scripts provided free to currently enrolled 
students. 



A 



Entry Fees and Deposits 

Application Fee - All students for admission 
must submit a $25 application fee. This 
charge defrays the cost of processing the 
application and is nonrefundable. 

Admission Deposit - After students have 
been notified of their admission to Lycoming, 
they are required to make a $100 admissions 
deposit to confirm their intention to matricu- 
late. Students seeking residence must submit 
an additional $100 room -reservation deposit. 
All deposits are applied to the general 
charges for the first semester of attendance. 
After May 1, deposits are nonrefundable. 

Contingency Deposit - A contingency 
deposit of $100 s required of all full-time 
students as a guarantee for payment of 
damage to or loss of College property, for 
library and parking fines, or similar penalties 
imposed by the College. The deposit is 
collected along with other charges for the 
initial semester. The balance of this deposit 
is refunded after all debts to the College have 
been paid, either upon graduation or upon 
written request submitted to the Registrar two 
weeks prior to voluntary permanent termina- 
tion of enrollment at Lycoming College. 

Partial Payments 

r or the convenience of those who find it 
impossible to follow the regular schedule of 
payments, arrangements may be made with 
the College Treasurer for the monthly 
payment of College fees through various 
educational plans. Additional information 
concerning partial payments may be obtained 
from the Treasurer or Director of 
Admissions. 

Refunds for Students 
Who Withdraw 

Ivefunds of tuition and board are made to 
students who voluntarily and officially 
withdraw from the College while in good 



standing according to the following schedule 
for the fall and spring semesters and the 
comparable period for the May and summer 
terms: 

Refund Charge 
Period of Withdrawal % % 

During the first week 

of the semester 80 20 

During the second 

and third week 60 40 

During the fourth 

and fifth week 40 60 

During the sixth 

and seventh week 20 80 

After seven weeks 100 

No refunds are given to students who are 
suspended for disciplinary reasons. 

Non-Payment of 
Fees Penalty 

•Students will not be registered for 
courses in a new semester if their accounts 
for previous attendance have not been settled. 
Diploma, transcripts, and certifications of 
withdrawals in good standing are issued only 
when a satisfactory settlement of all financial 
obligations has been made in the Business 
Office. Final grades may also be held in 
some cases. 

Financial Aid 

Student Financial Assistance 

l-zycoming College is committed to 
helping students and families meet college 
costs. While some assistance is available to 
students regardless of need (merit scholar- 
ships), the primary purpose of the College's 
financial aid program is to help qualified 
students of limited financial resources attend 
Lycoming College. Scholarships may be 
awarded on the basis of merit and/or need, 
while grants are provided on the basis of 
financial need. Long term educational loans 



^tli. 



with favorable interest rates and repayment 
terms are available as are part-time employ- 
ment opportunities. 

Students who wish to be considered for 
financial assistance should submit the 
following forms as soon after January 1 as 
possible and no later than April 1 . 

1. Lycoming Financial Aid Application 
(LFAA) - available from the Office of 
Financial Aid. 

2. Financial Aid Form (FAF) of the College 
Scholarship Service (CSS) - available from 
your high school/college counselor or the 
Office of Financial Aid. 

3. Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance 
Agency (PHEAA) grant application if a 
Pennsylvania resident - or the appropriate 
state grant application form from the state 
which student resides. Applications are 
available from your high school/college 
counselor or the Office of Financial Aid. 

Renewal applications are required annu- 
ally. For additional information refer to the 
Lycoming College Financial Aid Guide. 

Scholarships and Grants 

Trustee Scholarships - This scholarship is a 
full tuition guarantee awarded to incoming 
freshmen. Recipients of this scholarship 
typically rank in the top rank in the top ten 
percent of their class and have Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT) combined scores of 
above 13(X). Students who have been 
recognized as a National Merit Scholar may 
also be eUgible for this scholarship. 

Founders Scholarships - These $5,000 
scholarships are available to incoming 
students. Recipients of this scholarship 
typically rank in the top twenty percent of 
their class and have combined SAT scores of 
1200 or above. 

Valedictorian/Salutatorian Scholarship - 

These $4,000 scholarships are awarded to 
students that graduated first or second in their 



high school class and do not qualify for the 
Trustee or Founders Scholarship. 

Lycoming Academic Scholarship - Ranging 
in value from $1,000 to $4,000, these scho- 
scholarships may be awarded to students that 
in the top thirty percent of their class and 
have SAT combined scores of 1(X)0 or above. 

The above scholarships are available to 
eligible students regardless of need. The 
scholarships are renewable providing the 
student maintains at least a 3.0 cumulative 
grade point average as a full-time student. 

Recognition Scholarships for $1,000 to 
$3,000 per year are awarded to Freshmen 
who have superior academic qualifications 
and who have filed the FAF but did not 
demonstrate financial need as determined by 
the College Scholarship Service and were not 
eligible for another Lycoming Scholarship 
program. This scholarship is renewable if the 
recipient maintains a 3.00 cumulative 
average. 

Directors' Scholarships of $400 to full 
tuition, depending upon financial need, are 
awarded to students in the top fifth of their 
secondary school class with SAT scores of 
1100 or more. Renewal cumulative is 3.00. 

Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of $200 to 
full tuition, depending upon financial need, 
are made to full-time students who do not 
qualify for scholarships and who have 
demonstrated financial need and the prospect 
of contributing positively to the College 
community. Renewal requires satisfactory 
academic progress as defined by the College 
catalog, continued financial need, and 
satisfactory citizenship standards. 

Ministerial Grants are awarded to depend- 
ent children of United Methodist ministers 
and ordained ministers of other denomina- 
tions. The grant amounts to one-third of 
tuition for children of United Methodist 



Ministers in the Central Pennsylvania Annual 
Conference and one-fourth of tuition for all 
others. If a student completes the FAF, this 
grant will be part of the total aid award. 

Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of one- 
fourth of tuition are awarded to students 
preparing for the Christian ministry who are 
enrolled full time and demonstrate financial 
need. Students must complete the pre- 
ministerial application available through the 
Financial Aid Office. 

Presidential Fellowships in Music are 
awarded each year to candidates nominated 
by the Department of Music. Auditions and 
interviews are conducted annually by the 
Department. A tuition stipend of $250 is 
awarded for each semester the student serves 
as a Fellow. The recipients are expected to 
fulfill responsibilities assigned each semester 
by the Department with the primary responsi- 
bility being musical performance. To apply 
contact the Chairman, Department of Music, 
Lycoming College. 

Two-in-Family Grants are awarded to each 
member of a family attending Lycoming 
College on a full-time basis at the same time. 
The amount is 10% of tuition, room, and/or 
board paid. Each member must be enrolled 
full-time and not eligible for any other 
financial aid program of the College. If a 
student is eligible for other Lycoming aid, the 
student would receive whichever is greater. 

Applied Music Grant was established 
anonymously to be used to offset music fees 
for selected students taking advanced study in 
piano. Selection of recipients will be based 
upon talent and potential in piano. 

Art Scholarship of $1,500 is available to 
each new, selected student. It is awarded on 
the basis of juried competition and is open to 
high school juniors and seniors and to 
freshman and sophomore college transfer 



students. Renewal requires satisfactory 
academic progress and recommendation of 
the department. 

Music Scholarship of $l,000-$2,000 is 
available to new selected students. Recipi- 
ents should have SATs of at least 900 and 
rank in the top half of their Senior Class. 
Audition and recommendation by the 
department are necessary. Renewal requires 
satisfactory academic progress and recom- 
mendation of the department 

Franklin L. Artley Scholarship is available 
annually to assist a ministerial student(s). 

Sculpture Scholarship of $1,500, but not to 
exceed need, is available for students seeking 
a BFA in Sculpture and who successfully 
completes a portfolio review. Students must 
also demonstrate financial need. Contact the 
Art Department. Application must be 
received prior to March 1. 

Two-Year Transfer Scholarships of $2,400 
are awarded to the student transferring from 
each two year institution with the best 
academic record. Must have completed a 
two-year program or 64 credits and have at 
least a 3.25 cumulative average. On campus 
interview required. Renewable for one year 
if student maintains a 3.0 cumulative 
average. 

United Methodist Scholarships are awarded 
to full-time degree applicants who have a 
cumulative average of 3.00 or better, are 
active in Christian activities, are an active, 
full member of the Methodist Church, and 
have demonstrated financial need. The 
awards are normally $500 per year and the 
funds are provided by the United Methodist 
Church. Annual application is required. The 
student must complete and file the FAF and 
the scholarship forms which are available in 
the Financial Aid Office. 



A 



Wyoming Conference Scholarship is 

granted by Lycoming for $500 to a student 
chosen by the Scholarship Committee of the 
Wyoming Conference. These are renewable 
for three additional years. Good academic 
performance and service to the church are the 
criteria for this award. 

Eph and Bess Baker Scholarship for $6,000 
is available at $1,500 per year for four years 
awarded annually to a full-time student who 
exhibits academic promise and has a perma- 
nent residence in Lycoming County. Prefer- 
ence will be given, but not limited, to 
students who demonstrate need for financial 
assistance to attend Lycoming College. 
Renewal will be contingent upon maintaining 
a cumulative average of at least 3.0 on a 4.0 
scale. Recipient is chosen by the Director of 
Financial Aid. 

Ronald Beemer Memorial Scholarship of 

$350 is periodically awarded. 

Mary Strong Clemins Scholarship of $250 
for a student preparing for Christian ministry 
or for deaconess work or its equivalent in the 
United Methodist Church. 

Mabel L. Collins Scholarship of $250 is 
available for a student from Hepburn 
Township; otherwise, to any other worthy 
student. 

C. Luther Culler Memorial Scholarship of 

$450 for a student is awarded based 
on scholarship. 

Dewitt-Bodine Scholarship is awarded to 
the highest ranked student in the graduating 
class each year from Hughesville High 
School who attends Lycoming College. The 
recipient is designated by the Hughesville 
Guidance Counselor. The scholarship 
amount is $2,200 and is credited at $550 per 
year over four years of attendance at Lycom- 
ing. If the student is in a three-year program 



(such as Med-Tech), the award will be 
divided equally over the three-years' 
attendance at Lycoming. 

Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarship is 

awarded to the highest ranked student in the 
graduating class each year from Line Moun- 
tain High School who attends Lycoming 
College. The recipient is designated by the 
high school's guidance office. The scholar- 
ship is $400 per year for up to four years 
attendance at Lycoming. 

Richard W. Gieniec Memorial Scholarship 

is available annually to a full-time student(s) 
who is in good academic standing, who has 
demonstrated financial need and who has the 
prospect of contributing positively to the 
college community. Preference will be 
given, but is not limited to, a student(s) who 
meets any or all of the following criteria: 
resident of Lancaster County, Pennsylvania; 
learning disabled, soccer player. 

Beryl Kline Glenn Scholarship of $300 is 
periodically awarded to a deserving student 
majoring in music. 

Edward J. Gray is awarded to one or more 
persons of good moral character, of studious 
habits, making such record in scholarship and 
deportment as shall be approved by President 
and faculty. 

David Grove and Wife Scholarship of $200 
is periodically awarded to a needy student 
studying faith and ministry. 

Robert I. Hamilton Grant of $600 is avail- 
able. Mr Hamilton was a resident of 
South Williamsport. 

Esther M. Heefner Scholarship of $1,650 is 
available to help needy and deserving 
students. 

Edward P. Heether Scholarship is available 
to help needy and deserving students, who 
are in good academic standing. 



A 



James A. Heether Scholarship for $500 is 
available based on financial need. Priority 
will be given to a chemistry major. 

George W. Huntley, Jr. Scholarship for 

$900 is available to help defray the tuition 
and expenses for the first year only of any 
graduate of Cameron County High School 
(formerly Emporium High School). The 
selection is made by the Superintendent of 
Schools, Cameron, PA. 

Elizabeth S. Jackson Scholarship is paid 
annually to the full time, degree seeking 
student who attains the required rank highest 
in scholarship and deportment in the sopho- 
more class. 

The Paul and Mildred John Endowed 
Scholarship Fund in Business was estab- 
lished in 1990 by Mr. and Mrs. John to 
recognize the significant contributions their 
friend, Robert L. Shangraw '58, has made to 
the betterment of Lycoming College. This 
endowed scholarship provides annual income 
for full-time students who are pursuing a 
major in any of Lycoming's business pro- 
grams. Preference is given to candidates who 
demonstrate financial need, are children of 
employees of the Ritz-Craft Corporation of 
PA, Inc. and/or residents of Union County. 

Amos Johnson Scholarship of $100 is 
available for the education of the ministerial 
student of limited means. 

John T. and Mary Louise Kiliher 
Scholarship of $200 is available for a 
deserving student "from the area." 

Morgan V. Knapp Endowed Music Schol- 
arship is awarded in the ratio of 75% of the 
fund to financially needy students, in 
satisfactory academic standing, who are 
majoring in music or who are pursuing 
courses in vocal music, piano, or strings, in 
that priority order. Twenty-five percent of 
the fund is awarded as needed, on the recom- 
mendation of the Music Department Faculty, 



to students, who in their opinion should be 
encouraged to study privately in the areas of 
voice, piano, or strings, in that priority order. 

LAMCO Scholarship (formerly the Grit) of 
up to $2,250 is available for scholarship with 
the following selection priorities: 

1. children and grandchildren of 
employees of The Grit; 

2. graduates of high schools of the city 
of William sport; and 

3. graduates of high schools of 
Lycoming County. 

The Law Scholarship was established in 
1990 by Mrs. Fern S. Law as a memorial 
tribute to her husband, James Graham Law, 
who served Lycoming College as a member 
of the Board of Trustees from 1965 to 1986. 
Annual income is to be awarded to a full- 
time student from the Bloomsburg area who 
shows academic promise and demonstrates a 
need for financial assistance. 

Doris Lennon Scholarship of $1,800 is 
available to help dedicated young students 
preparing for church work in need of finan- 
cial assistance. 

The Lycoming County Scholarship is an 

endowed scholarship which provides interest 
annually to be awarded to students whose 
permanent residence is in Lycoming County. 
Preference will be given to entering freshmen 
who demonstrate financial need. Recipients 
will be selected by the Director of 
Financial Aid. 

Eva Rupert McKeIvy Memorial Scholar- 
ship of $100 is available to help a worthy 
Christian girl. 

Mary Housenick Miller Scholarship is 

given to a Lycoming student majoring in 
History (preferably American History) with a 
preference to an individual who has attained 
at least sophomore status. The scholarship 
will continue until graduation subject to 
concurrence from the History Department. 



Selection preference will be given but not 
limited to deserving students who demon- 
strate financial need. 

James E. and Bernadine Decker Nancar- 
row Scholarship is to be awarded annually 
to a student(s) in good academic standing 
with demonstrated financial need. Preference 
may be given to Lycoming County students. 

Earl Nearhoof Memorial Scholarship of 

$800 is available to assist young students 
entering Christian work with preference 
given to students from the Warrior Mark and 
Tyrone, PA areas. 

Ada Remely Memorial Scholarship is an 

award available to currently enrolled female 
member of the Junior Class having completed 
80 credit hours with at least a 3.0 cumulative 
average and who demonstrates financial need 
of at least the regular tuition rate. Applica- 
tions are available in the Financial Aid 
Office in February and are due in March. 
The award is normally $500 based on current 
earnings of the scholarship endowment. 

Mort RaufT Memorial Scholarship Fund 

provides annual interest which is awarded 
to a deserving full-time student who is in 
good academic standing. Preference is given 
to but not limited to an individual who 
demonstrates financial need and is an active 
member of the Lycoming College swimming 
team. 

Jennie M. Rich Memorial Scholarship of 

$450 is available for worthy and needy 
students preparing for the Christian ministry 
or deaconess or missionary work. 

Margaret Rich and Elmer B. Staats 
Endowed Scholarship of up to $1,000 is 
available to an academically talented student 
who intends to pursue a career in public 
service. Preference given, but not limited, to 
individuals who have demonstrated need. 



Leonard H. Rothermel Fund provides 
$1,400 in grant to financially needy 
student(s) who are in satisfactory academic 
standing with primary preference given to 
Trevorton residents and secondary preference 
given to Line Mountain School District area 
students. 

Mary Landon Russell Applied Music Fund 

was established in recognition of her out- 
standing service to Lycoming College by 
alumni and friends during a special Home- 
coming celebration in 1985. This endowed 
fund provides financial assistance to quali- 
fied, talented students who seek advanced 
training in music. 

Nathan A. Scheib Memorial Music Fund 

provides financial assistance to qualified, 
talented students for advanced training in 
music. Awarded on the recommendation of 
the Music Department Faculty to students 
who, in their opinion, should be encouraged 
to study privately. Preference will be given 
to students who have demonstrated financial 
need with the College. 

J. Milton Skeath Memorial Scholarship of 

$250 is available for a psychology major. 

Robert Barry Spieth Memorial Scholar- 
ship is awarded to a student who demon- 
strates need with preference given to a 
business administration major who is an 
active member of Sigma Pi. Minimum GPA 
is 2.0 

Bishop D. Fredrick and Betty Rowe Wertz 
Endowed Scholarship is awarded annually 
to a student(s) in good academic standing 
with demonstrated financial need. 

Samuel Willard Memorial Scholarships are 

awarded to a junior or senior student at 
Lycoming who is in need of financial 
assistance to complete his/her degree. 



Preference is given to a Religion Major. The 
award varies between $400 and $700 depend- 
ing upon available scholarship endowment 
income. 

H. Merrill Winner Memorial Scholarship 

of $400 is available periodically. 

Hiram and Elizabeth Wise Scholarship of 

$100 is available for a ministerial of mission- 
ary student who, because of present circum- 
stances and promise of future usefulness 
shall, in the judgement of the President, be 
deemed worthy of the same. 

Dr. Paul E. Witmeyer Memorial 
Scholarship of $250 is available for a student 
interested in education. 

Donald C. Wolfe Memorial Scholarship of 

$400 is available for a worthy ministerial 
student to be selected by the Trustees. 

William Woodcock Scholarship is paid 
annually to the full time, degree seeking 
student who attains the required rank second 
in scholarship and deportment in the Sopho- 
more class. 

Raymond A. and L. Marie Zimmerman 
Scholarship of $100 is available for the 
benefit of students preparing for the Christian 
ministry. 

Federal Aid 

PELL Grants are awarded by the Federal 
government to eligible undergraduate 
students as determined by a standard Federal 
formula. The grants will range up to $2,400 
for an academic year and are based on 
financial need as determined by the Federal 
Government formula. Application can be 
made when submitting the Financial Aid 
Form (FAF), the PHEAA State Grant 
Application, or by separate federal appUca- 
tion on forms which are available in secon- 
dary school guidance offices or the Financial 
Aid Office at Lycoming. For students who 



received their first Pell Grant award in the 
1987-88 award year or thereafter, the 
duration of eligibility for a Pell Grant is 
limited to the full-time equivalent of 5 
academic years of study if the student is 
enrolled in an undergraduate degree or 
certificate program of 4 years or less. 

Supplemental Education Opportunity 
Grants are awarded to a limited number of 
undergraduate students who have exceptional 
need. Priority must be given to Pell Grant re- 
cipients. The award range is $100 to $4,000 
per year. You need to file the FAF applica- 
tion to be considered for this award. 

Paul Douglas Teacher Scholarship is avail- 
able to residents of Pennsylvania who rank in 
the top 10 percent of their high school class 
and plan to enter the elementary or secondary 
teaching field. Scholarships are for up to 
$5,000 and the student must sign an agree- 
ment to teach. More information is available 
from your high school guidance counselor or 
Lycoming's Financial Aid Office. 

State Aid 

Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance 
Agency (PHEAA) Grants are available for 
Pennsylvania residents meeting the residency 
requirements and financial requirements of 
the program. Awards range from $100 to 
$2,200 per year for up to four years. Direct 
application to Harrisburg on the PHEAA 
Grant application is required. The deadline 
for filing to receive consideration is normally 
May 1st. 

Scholars in Education Awards (SEA) are 
offered by PHEAA to PA residents who 
plan to teach math or science in a Pennsylva- 
nia secondary school. Must rank in the top 
fifth of your high school class, achieve at 
least a 3.0 (B) average on a 4.0 scale in math 
or science courses in high school and college, 
and score at least 1000 on the SATs (math 
must be at least 550) or on ACT have at 



JmL 



least 22 in English and 27 in math. Award is 
50% of annual tuition. You must agree to 
teach math or science in a Pennsylvania 
secondary school. If you fail to keep the 
commitment the grant becomes a loan with 
interest. High school seniors should contact 
your guidance counselor. College students 
should contact Lycoming's Financial Aid 
Office. 

Other State Aid may be available to assist 
you at Lycoming College. Massachusetts, 
Ohio, Delaware, Rhode Island, and Connecti- 
cut have programs which allow their resi- 
dents to use state grants at Lycoming. 
Contact your secondary school guidance 
office for specific information and applica- 
tion forms. 

Loan Programs 

Perkins Loan (National Direct Student 
Loan Program) permits a total of $9000 to 
be borrowed by the undergraduate student not 
to exceed $4,500 the first two years. Prefer- 
ence must be given to those who have 
exceptional need. Applicants must complete 
the FAF through the College Scholarship 
Service. The repayment period and the inter- 
est does not begin until six months after the 
student is graduated or ceases at least half- 
time enrollment. A simple interest rate of 
5% applies. Repayment of the principal may 
extent over a ten year period with the 
exception that the Program requires repay- 
ment of not less than $30 per month. 

Stafford (formerly Guaranteed Student) 
Loan Program allows students to borrow up 
to $2,625 as a freshman or sophomore or up 
to $4,000 as a junior or senior per academic 
level not to exceed $17,250. 

Currently, the Federal Government pays 
the interest while the student is enrolled at 
least half-time. The simple interest rate 
ranges from 7-10 percent depending upon the 
date you first obtained a loan. Repayment 
usually extends over a period of up to ten 



years and begins six months after leaving 
school. Applications and information are 
available from your bank or other lending 
institutions. 

PHEAA Alternative Loan of up to $10,000 
is available to students attending a Pennsyl- 
vania school through PHEAA. Eligibility is 
based on your credit qualifications and those 
of your cosigner. For more information 
request the PHEAA Help Loan Brochure or 
contact PHEAA, 660 Boas Street, Harrisburg, 
PA 17102. 

PHEAA Nonsubsidized Stafford (GSL) 
Loan may be available to students attending 
a Pennsylvania school. The interest rates are 
the same as on the Subsidized Stafford; 
however, the interest on the Nonsubsidized 
Stafford must be paid on a quarterly basis 
while the student is enrolled in school and 
during the six-month grace period following 
the in-school period. The maximum loan 
amount is up to $2,625 minus Stafford 
subsidized eligibility for freshman and 
sophomore standing and $4,000 minus 
Stafford subsidized eligibility for junior 
and senior standing. Minimum loan amount 
is $500. 

PLUS/SLS Loans are meant to provide 
additional funds for educational expenses. 
The interest rate varies annually but will not 
exceed 12%. Parents of dependent under- 
graduate students or independent undergradu- 
ates may borrow up to $4,000 per year to a 
total of $20,000. Applications and informa- 
tion are available from your bank or other 
lending institution. 

United Methodist Student Loans are 

available on a very limited basis to students 
who are members of the United Methodist 
Church. The maximum amount which may 
be borrowed for an academic year is $1,000 
subject to availability of funds. Information 
and applications are available through the 
Financial Aid Office. 



Vl^ 



Employment Opportunities 

Federal College Work-Study Program 

(CWS) awards provide work opportunities on 
campus. The program is funded by Federal 
funds supplemented by Lycoming 
funds. Students generally earn $500 to 
$2,000 per academic year and are normally 
limited to five to twenty hours per week 
during periods of regular enrollment. The 
purpose of the program is to provide employ- 
ment to students who are in need of assis- 
tance to attend college. Applicants must 
complete the FAF or PHEAA Grant Applica- 
tion and Lycoming's Financial Aid Applica- 
tion (LFAA). 

Lycoming Campus Employment Program 

opportunities are provided on campus to 
students enrolled full time who are not 
packaged with Federal Work-Study jobs. 
The earnings range up to $1,500 per year. 
Applicants must have a work supervisor 
complete a job request form from the 
Financial Aid Office. 

Other Job Opportunities are frequently 
available with local business firms or 
persons. Contact the Career Development 
Office of the College for information 
on these opportunities. 

Other Aid Sources 

Williamsport Hospital Scholarship pro- 
vides assistance to sophomore, junior, or 
senior nursing students who have at least a 
2.5 cum average. Students selected must 
agree to provide the Williamsport Hospital 
with a minimum of twelve months of service 
as an employee in the Nursing Department 
for each $2,000 per year of award received. 
Awards of greater than $2,000 per year 
require on year of service for each year of 
award received. If the student does not work 
for the hospital, the award reverts to a loan. 



Non-College Aid Opportunities often are 
available through family employers or labor 
unions, business firms, fraternal and religious 
organizations, and secondary schools. 
Contact your secondary school guidance 
office for information. Your parents should 
contact their employer and organizations of 
which they are members for information on 
an financial aid sources. 

Veterans and Dependents Benefits are 

available for qualified veterans and children 
of deceased or disabled veterans. Applica- 
tion should be made to your nearest Veter- 
ans' Administration Office. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps (ROTC) 
Stipends. Students who participate in the 
Army ROTC program receive $100 per 
academic month of their junior and senior 
years. They also receive half of a second 
lieutenant's pay plus travel expenses for a 
six-week advanced summer camp between 
junior and senior years. 

Pennsylvania National Guard. Students 
participating in this program may be eligible 
for scholarship, credit programs, educational 
bonus, or loan repayment. Contact a Guard 
unit in your area for more information. 

Tuition Exchange Grants. Lycoming 
College is a member of both the Tuition 
Exchange Program and the CICU Tuition 
Exchange Program. These programs are for 
dependent students of employees at partici- 
pating institutions of higher education. You 
should contact the Tuition Exchange Officer 
at your sponsor institution for information 
regarding sponsorship. 

Education Financing Plans. The Business 
Office at Lycoming provides information 
about plans which enable parents to pay 
college expenses on a monthly basis through 
selected companies. 



iwck 



The Campus 




JNineteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
34-acre campus. Most buildings have been 
constricted since 1950, even though Lycom- 
ing - one of America's 50 oldest colleges and 
universities - dates back to 1812. All 
buildings are easy to reach from anywhere on 
campus. A 12-acre athletic field and football 
stadium lie a few blocks north of the main 
campus. 

Modern buildings include the eight 
residence halls, which contain clean and 
comfortable single and double rooms; the 
student union; and the physical education/ 
recreation center. Up-to-date facilities 
include the library theatre, the planetarium, 
the computer center, an electronic-music 
studio, a photography laboratory, and an art 
gallery. The computer center opened in 



1969; the art gallery and physical education 
center opened in 1980. An arts center was 
renovated and opened in 1983. 

Residence Halls 

Asbury Hall (1962) - Named in honor of 
Bishop Francis Asbury, the father of The 
United Methodist Church in America, who 
made the circuit through the upper 
Susquehanna District in 1812, the year 
Lycoming (then the Williamsport Academy) 
opened its doors. 

Crever Hall (1962) - Honors Lycoming's 
founder and first financial agent, the 
Rev. Benjamin H. Crever, who helped 
persuade the Baltimore Conference to 
purchase the school from the Williamsport 
Town Council in 1848. 

East hall (1962) - Houses most of the 
chapters of Lycoming's national fraternities 
and other students. The self-contained 
fraternity units each contain rooms, a lounge, 
and a chapter room. All students share a 
large social area. 

Forrest Hall (1968) - Honors Dr. and Mrs. 
Retcher Bliss Forrest and Anna Forrest 
Burfiendt '30, the parents and sister of 
Katherine Forrest Mathers '28, whose 
generosity established the memorial. 

Rich Hall (1948) - Honors the Rich family of 
Woolrich, Pennsyvannia. Houses the health 
service, campus security, mail room, and the 
Sara J. Walter Lounge for commuting 
students. The Academic Resource Center 
opened in January, 1986, and is located in 
the North Lounge on the First Floor. It is 
manned by peer tutors and professional 
staff during specified hours on Sunday 
through Friday. 



^Sk. 



Skeath Hall (1965) - The largest residence 
hall. Honors the late J, Milton Skeath, 
professor of psychology and four-time Dean 
of the College from 1921 to 1967. 

Wesley hall (1956) - Honors John Wesley, 
the founder of Methodism. 

Williams Hall (1965) - Honors Mary Ellen 
Whitehead Williams, mother of Joseph 
A. Williams, of St. Marys, Pennsylvania, 
whose bequest established the memorial. 

Academic 

Academic Center (1968) - Probably the most 
architecturally impressive building on 
campus, the Center actually is composed of 
four buildings: the library, Wendle Hall, the 
Arena Theatre and laboratories, and the 
faculty office building. 

Library (1968): An active instruction 
program acquaints students with academic 
library strategies and supports their specific 
research in each discipline studied. Students 
become familiar with traditional methods of 
research as well as new information technolo- 
gies utilizing computerized CD-ROM and 
online searching. The collection includes 
more than 160,000 volumes, approximately 
1 100 periodical titles, and a strong reference 
section suitable to an undergraduate educa- 
tion. The library also serves as a partial 
depository for U.S. government publications. 

Other facilities in this wing: 

Art Gallery (1980): Located in the north- 
west corner of the first floor of the library, 
the gallery contains exhibits year-round, in- 
cluding shows of student work. 

College Computer Center (1969): Located 
in the lower level of the library, the center 
houses a PRIME 9755 which replaced the 
DEC PDPl 1/70 in December 1987. The 
PRIME 9755 has three 315 and one 1475 
megabyte disk drives and 15 megabytes of 
main memory. 



Computer Graphics Center (1986): The 

computer graphics center provides the IBC 
Ensign Computer for students majoring in 
computer science and for those taking 
graphics courses. It has 32 ports for termi- 
nals and printers, 2 megabytes of memory, 
and two 85 megabyte disk drives. 

Nursing Skills Laboratory (1983): Located 
in the lower level of the library, it is a replica 
of a modem hospital ward, complete with 10 
simulated work stations, a nurses' station, 
and all the medical equipment used by 
nurses. 

Wendle Hall (1968): Contains 21 class- 
rooms, the psychology laboratories, a 
computer terminal laboratory with 20 
terminals available for use at present with an 
expansion capability of 20 more, and 
spacious Pennington Lounge, and informal 
meeting place for students and faculty. 

Arena Theatre and Laboratories (1968): 

The 204-seat thrust-stage theatre is one of the 
finest in the region. It includes projection 
facilities, scene and costume shops, a make- 
up room, and a multiple-use area known as 
the Down Stage, where one-act experimental 
plays are performed. The language, business, 
mathematics, and physics laboratories are 
situated on the upper floors. The Detwiler 
Planetarium is located on the ground floor. 

Faculty Office Building: Contains faculty 
offices, seminar rooms, and a 735-seat 
lecture hall. 

Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated 1983): 

Contains studios, sculpture foundry, wood- 
shop, printmaking shop, classrooms, lecture 
hall, offices. In addition, the Career Devel- 
opment Office is located in this building. 

Photographic Laboratory (1984): Located 
in the lower level of the Fine Arts Center, it 
contains all the materials and equipment of 
any commercial laboratory. 



^i. 



Mass Communication Center (1987): The 
focal point of the facility is a fully equipped 
broadcast quality television studio and 
control room. The building also houses two 
editing rooms, a classroom, faculty offices, 
the FM radio station and the student newspa- 
per office. The center is located on the 
southeast corner of campus. 

Science Building (1990): Opened this past 
spring, the $8.3 million Science Building is 
one of the finest undergraduate science 
facilities in the East. The three-level 
building totals more than 63,000 square feet 
and contains state-of-the-art biology and 
chemistry laboratories, lecture and seminar 
rooms, a science reading area and a green- 
house, as well as classrooms and faculty 
offices. 

Clarke Building (1939): Includes recital 
hall, music classrooms, practice studios, an 
electronic-music studio, faculty offices, two 
chapels, and the United Campus Ministry 
Center. 

Administration 

Drum House: Built in 1857 as a rental 
property, the Admissions House is the oldest 
building on the campus. It was first occupied 
by a Presbyterian parson. Founded in 1812, 
the Williamsport Academy, predecessor to 
Lycoming College, was likewise Presbyterian 
until 1848 when the institution was purchased 
by the Methodists to become the Williams- 
sport Dickinson Seminary. 

The Admissions House was bought by the 
College in 1931, along with twenty-eight 
other dwellings and in 1940 became the 
President's home. John W. Long occupied it 
for the remainder of his tenure and D. 
Frederick Wertz lived in the house from 1955 
until 1965 when the President's home was 
moved to 325 Grampian Boulevard. The 
building was then converted for use by the 
Fine Arts Department. In 1983, when a new 



Fine Arts facility was completed, the depart- 
ment was relocated and the house was vacant 
until 1987 when it was restored by college 
craftsmen to its original Federalist design 
under the supervision of Carol Baker '60, 
kindly volunteered her services during the 
year-long reconstruction. The Admissions 
House was a gift of the W.F. Rich Family. 

John W. Long Hall (1951): Opened origi- 
nally as the library, it now houses the 
administrative offices, including those for the 
president, dean, treasurer, dean of student 
services, housing, registrar, alumni affairs, 
public relations, institutional advancement, 
publications, and financial aid. It includes a 
reception area, central communications, and 
the printing and bulk mail office. 

Recreation 

Physical Education and Recreation Center 

(1980): Includes the George R. Lamade 
Gymnasium, which contains basketball and 
other courts; a six-lane swimming pool; all- 
purpose room; sauna and steam room; weight 
room; offices; classrooms, and Alumni 
Lounge. 

Wertz Student Center (1959): Contains the 
main and private dining rooms, Burchfield 
Lounge, a recreation area, game rooms. 
Jacks' Corner, bookstore, post office, student 
activities office, career development, and 
student organization offices. Honors Bishop 
D. Frederick Wertz, president of Lycoming 
from 1955 to 1968. 

Religious 

Clarke Building (1939): Lycoming's 
landmark, the building contains Clarke 
Chapel, St. John Neumann Chapel, the 
United Campus Ministry Center, and music 
department studios and offices. 



The Directory 




Board of Trustees 
Officers 

Robert L. Shangraw '58 

Chairman 

Richard W. DeWald '61 

Vice Chairman 

Leo A. Calistri '59 

Secretary 

Ann S. Pepperman 

Assistant Secretary 

Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr. '50 

Chairman Emeritus 



Emeriti Trustees 

Samuel Evert, '34, LL.D. 

Paul Gilmore, Litt.D. 

Kenneth Himes 

Ralph E. Kelchner 

W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D., L.H.D. 

Fred A. Pennington, LL.D. 

William Pickelner 

Margerite G. Rich 

George L. Stearns, II 

The Rev. Wallace F. Stettler, H.H.D. 



^Q^ 



Trustees 

Term expires 1991 

Elected 

1979 David Y. Brouse '47 



1988 David B. Lee '61 

1982 Margaret D. L'Heureux 

1973 Robert G. Little, '63, M.D. 

1991 George Nichols '59 

(Alumni Representative) 

1988 Ann S. Pepperman 

1988 Theodore Reich 

1988 John C. Schultz 

1988 J. Richard Stamm '76 

1988 Jeanne R. Twigg '74 

Term expires 1993 

Elected 

1987 Leo Calistri '59 

(Alumni Representative) 

1987 Robert E. Hancox '65 

1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr. 

1987 K. Alan Himes '59 

1989 Kenrick R. Khan '57 

1984 D. Stephen Martz '64 
1987 Richard D. Mase '62 

1985 Robert L. Shangraw '58 

1972 Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr., '50 




Term expires 1992 

Elected 

1986 Harold D. Chapman 

1980 Richard W. DeWald '61 

1989 Paul John 

1989 Kenneth Polcyn '58 

(Alumni Representative) 

1989 V. Jud Rogers 

1972 Donald E. Shearer, '59, M.D. 

1983 Hon. Clinton W. Smith '55 

1961 Nathan W. Stuart, '36, J.D. 

197 1 Willis W. Willard, III, '58, M.D. 



^^ 



Administrative Staff 



James E. Douthat (1989) 

President 

B.A., The College of William and Mary 

M.Div., Duke University 

Ed.D., Duke University 

Daniel G. Fultz (1989) 

Treasurer 

A.B., Lycoming 

M.B.A. Buc knell University 

Anne Harris Katz (1991) 

Dean of the College 

B.S., Ur sinus College 

M.S., Ph.D., University of Massachusetts 

J. Barton Meyer (1984) 
Vice President for Development 
BA., Ohio Northern University 
M.S., University of Dayton 

R. Michael O'Brien (1987) 
Dean of Student Services 
A.B., University of Chattanooga 
BD., Southern Methodist University 
Ed.D., University of Tennessee 

James Spencer (1989) 

Dean of Admission & Financial Aid 

B.A., Concordia College 

Keith Barrows (1990) 

Admissions Counselor 
A.B., Lycoming College 

Diane Michalik-Bonner (1990) 

College Counselor 

B.A., Rutgers University 

M.A., Fairleigh Dickinson University 

Elizabeth G. Boyd (1990) 

Assistant to the President 

B.A., The University of the South 



Dale V. Bower (1968) 

Director of Planned Giving 

B.S., Lycoming College 

BD., United Theological Seminary 

William E. Byham (1987) 
Sports Information Director 
B.S.,Bloomsburg University 

Molly Costello (1991) 

Director College Relations 
A.B., Mount Holyoke College 
M.BA., Southeastern Massachusetts 
University 

Robert L. Curry (1969) 

Associate Director Athletics 
A.B., Lycoming College 

David P. Durdak (1990) 

Coordinator of Residence Life 
B.A., Kent State University 
M.A., Kent State University 

Jerry S. Falco (1990) 

Director of Student Activities 

B.S., Westminister College 

M.A., Bowling Green State University 

Frank L. Girardi (1984) 

Director of Athletics 

B.S., West Chester State College 

Daniel J. Hartsock (1986) 

Director of Academic Resource Center and 
Coordintator of Advising 
B.A., The Pennsylvania State University 
M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania 

Alice Heaps (1986) 

Associate Director of Admissions 

B.S., Shippensburg University 

Mary Beth Heim (1990) 

Admissions Counselor 
B.A., Earlham College 



iBiW 



Thomas J. Henninger (1966) 

Director of Computer Services 
B.S., Wake Forest College 
M.A., University of Kansas 

J. Marco Hunsberger (1989) 

Campus Minister 

B.A., Mercer University 

M.Div., United Theological Seminary 

Kelly Keiser (1990) 

Admissions Counselor 
A.B., Lycoming College 

John Killian (1990) 

Admissions Counselor 
A.B., Lycoming College 

Wayne Kinley (1990) 

Controller 

A.B., Lycoming College 

James Lakis (1990) 

Director of Financial Aid 
B.A., Temple University 

John C. Lambert (1988) 

Roman Catholic Chaplin 

B.A., University of Scranton 

S.T.B. Catholic University of America 

Christina E. MacGill (1985) 
Director of Career Development 
A.B., Lycoming College 
M.S., Bucknell University 

Constance C. Plankenhorn (1989) 

Director of Alumni & Parent Relations 
B.S., Lycoming College 

Lisa A. Sheptock (1990) 

College Nurse 
B.SJ^.,Bloomsburg University 

William Sherwood (1990) 

Business Manager 

A.B., Lycoming College 

M.B.A.. Michigan State University 

Phyllis J. Sieber (1989) 

Director of Residence Life 
B.S., University of Delaware 
M.A., Trenton State College 



Patricia Waltman (1990) 

Admissions Counselor 
B.A., Clarion University 

Jeanne A. Wagner (1990) 

Registrar 

B.S., Syracuse University 

Deborah E. Weaver (1978) 
Manager, Residence Halls Operations 

Laurence C. Wilcox (1987) 

Director of Safety and Security 

Penn State Police Academy 

Institute of Applied Science. Syracuse, NY 

Cathleen Wild (1977) 

Assistant Instructional Services Librarian 

B.A., the College ofWooster 

M.S., Columbia University 

Mary Wolf (1985) 

Political Science 
Assistant Dean of Freshmen 
B.A., St. Mary's College; 
M.P.A., University of Michigan 

Ralph E. Zeigler, Jr. (1980) 

Director of Development for Annual Support 

A.B., Lycoming College 

M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 

Gail M. Zimmerman (1984) 
Director of Prospect Research 
B.S., SUNY at Cortland 

Emeriti 

Jack C. Buckle 

Dean Emeritus 
A.B., Juniata College 
M.S., Syracuse University 

Harold H. Hutson 

President Emeritus 

B.S., LL.D., Wojford College 

B.D.,Duke University 

Ph.D., University of Chicago 

L.HD., Ohio Wesley an University 



Faculty 



Emeriti 

John P. Graham 

Professor Emeritus of English 

Ph.B., Dickinson College 

M.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 

Harold W. Hayden 

Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus of 

Library Services 

A.B., Nebraska State Teachers College 

B.S., University of Illinois 

M.A. in L.S., University of Pennsylvania 

John G. Hollenback 

Professor Emeritus of Business 

Administration 

B.S., M.B.A., University of Pennsylvania 

James K. Hummer 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 
B.N.S., Tufts University 
M.S., Middlebury College 
Ph.D., University of North Carolina 

M. Raymond Jamison 

Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics 
B.S., Ursinus College 
M.S., Bucknell University 

Walter G. Mclver 

Professor Emeritus of Music 
Mus3., Westminster Choir College 
A.B., Bucknell University 
M.A., New York University 

Robert W. Rabold 

Professor Emeritus of Economics 
B.A., The Pennsylvania State University 
M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



John A. Radspinner 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 
B.S., University of Richmond 
M.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute 
D.S., Carnegie Mellon Institute 

Logan A. Richmond 

Professor Emeritus of Accounting 
B.S., Lycoming College 
M.BA., New York University 
C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 

Mary Landon Russell 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 
Mus. B., Susquehanna University 
Conservatory of Music 
M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 

Louise R. Schaeffer 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Education 

A.B., Lycoming College 

M.A., Bucknell University 

D. Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 

James W. Sheaffer 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania 
M.S., University of Pennsylvania 

Frances K. Skeath 

Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 

A.B., M.A., Bucknell University 

D. Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 

John A. Stuart 

Professor Emeritus of English 

B.A., William Jewell College 

M.A., PhD., Northwestern University 

Helen B. Weidman 

Professor Emeritus of Political Science 
A.B., M.A,, Bucknell University 
Ph.D., Syracuse University 



^B^ 



Professors 

Robert B. Angstadt (1967) 

Biology 

B.S., Ur sinus College 

M.S.. Ph.D., Cornell University 

Jon R. Bogle (1976)** 

Art 

B.F.A., B.S., M.F.A., Tyler School of Art; 

Temple University 

Jack D. Diehl, Jr. (1971) 

Biology 

B.S., M.A., Sam Houston State University 

M.S., Ph.D., University of Connecticut 

Robert F. Falk (1970) 

Theatre 

Marshal of the College 

B.A., BD., Drew University 

M.A., Ph.D., Wayne State University 

David A. Franz (1970) 

Chemistry 

Marshall of the College 

A.B., Princeton University 

M.A.T., The Johns Hopkins University 

Ph.D., University of Virginia 

Ernest D. Giglio (1972) 
Political Science 
B.A., Queens College 
M.A., SUNY at Albany 
Ph.D., Syracuse University 

Eduardo Guerra (1960) 

Religion 

BD., Southern Methodist University 

S.T.M., Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary 

John G. Hancock (1967)** 

Psychology 

B.S., M.S., Bucknell University 

Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University 

Richard A. Hughes (1970) 

M.B. Rich Chair in Religion 
B.A., University of Indianapolis 
S.T.B., Ph.D., Boston University 



Emily R. Jensen (1969) 

English 

B.A., Jamestown College 

M.A., University of Denver 

Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University 

Robert H. Larson (1969) 

History 

B.A., The Citadel 

M.A., Ph.D., University of Virginia 

Roger W. Opdahl (1963) 

Economics 

A£., Hofstra University 

M.A., Columbia University 

D.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 

John F. Piper, Jr. (1969) 

History 

A.B., Lafayette College 
B.D., Yale University 
Ph.D.,Duke University 

David Rife (1970)* 

English 

B.A., University of Florida 

M.A., Ph.D., Southern Illinois University 

Michael G. Roskin (1972)**** 

Political Science 

A.B., University of California at Berkeley 

M.A., University of 

California at Los Angeles 

Ph.D., The American University 

Roger D. Shipley (1967) 

Art 

B.A., Otterbein College 

M.FA., Cranbrook Academy of Art 

Stanley T. Wilk (1973) 

Anthropology 

B.A., Hunter College 

Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

*0n Sabbatical Fall Semester 1991 
**0n Sabbatical Spring Semester 1992 
***0n Sabbatical Spring & Fall 1991-1992 
****0n Leave 



Associate Professors 

Jerry D. Allen (1984)* 

Theatre 

B.FA., M.FA., Utah State University 

Susan K, Beidler (1975) 

Collection Management Services Librarian 

BA., University of Delaware 

M.L.S., University of Pittsburgh 

Howard C. Berthold, Jr. (1976) 

Psychology 

BA., Franklin and Marshall College 

MA., University of Iowa 

Ph.D., The University of Massachusetts 

Gary M. Boerckel (1979) 

Music 

Director of Lycoming Scholars 
B.A., B.M., Oberlin College 
M.M., Ohio University 
D.M.A., University of Iowa 

Clarence W. Burch (1962) 

Physical Education 

B.S., M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 

Richard R. Erickson (1973)** 
Astronomy and Physics 
B.A., University of Minnesota 
M.S., Ph.D., University of Chicago 

Edward G. Gabriel (1977) 

Biology 

B.A., M.A., Alfred University 

M.S., Ph.D., The Ohio State University 

Stephen R. Griffith (1970) 

Philosophy 

A.B., Cornell University 

M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

David K. Haley (1980) 

Mathematics 

BA., Acadia University 

M.S., Ph.D., Queens University 

Habil., Universitat Mannheim 



Bruce M. Hurlbert (1982) 
Director of Library Services 
B.A., The Citadel 
M.S.L.S., Florida State University 

Moon H. Jo (1975) 

Sociology 

B.A., Valparaiso University 

M.A., Howard University 

Ph.D., New York University 

Eldon F. Kuhns, II (1979) 

Accounting 

A.B., Lycoming College 

M. Accounting, University of Oklahoma 

C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 

Paul A. MacKenzie (1970) 

German 

A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Boston University 

Robert J.B. Maples (1969) 

French 

A.B., University of Rochester 

Ph.D., Yale University 

Richard J. Morris (1976)** 

History 

B.A., Boston State College 

M.A., Ohio University 

Ph.D., New York University 

Kathleen D. Pagana (1982)** 

Nursing 

B.SJ^., University of Maryland 

M.S.N. , Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania 

Doris P. Parrish (1983) 

Nursing 

B.S., SUNY at Pittsburgh 

M.S., Russell Sage College 

Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin 

Kathryn M. Ryan (1981) 

Psychology 

B.S., University of Illinois 

M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



iBcw 



GeneD. Sprechini (1981) 

Mathematics 

B.S.. Wilkes College 

M.A., Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton 

Fred M. Thayer, Jr. (1976) 

Music 

A.B., Syracuse University 
B.M., Ithaca College 
MM., SUNY at Binghamton 
DMA., Cornell University 

H. Bruce Weaver (1974) 

Business Administration 

B.BA., Stetson University 

J.D., Vanderbilt University 

M.BA., University of Central Florida 

John M. Wheian, Jr. (1971) 

Philosophy 

B.A., University of Notre Dame 

Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin 

Robert A. Zaccaria (1973) 

Biology 

B.A., Bridgewater College 

Ph.D., University of Virginia 

Melvin C. Zimmerman (1979) 

Biology 

B.S., SUNY at Cortland 

M.S., Ph.D., Miami University 



Assistant Professors 

Susan Alexander (1991) 

Sociology 

B.A., M.A., Ph.D., American University 

Penelope Austin (1988) 

English 

A.B., University of Michigan 

M.A., University of Missouri-Columbia 

Ph.D., University of Utah 



Bernard J. Balleweg (1985) 

Psychology 

B.S., Colorado State University 

M.A., Ph.D., University of Montana 

Henry E. Berkheimer (1988) 

Chemistry 

A.B., Dickinson College 

M.S., Bucknell University 

Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University 

Steven Bidlake (1988) 

English 

BA., Western Washington University 

M.A., University of Oregon 

Ph.D., University of Washington 

Barbara F. Buedel (1989) 

Spanish 

B.A., University of Kentucky 

M.A., M. Phil., PhD., Yale University 

John H. Conrad (1959) 

Education 

B.S., Mansfield State College 

M.A., New York University 

Santusht S. DeSilva (1983) 

Mathematics 

B.Sc, University of Sri Lanka 

M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Michelle S. Ficca (1985) 

Nursing 

B.S., Stroudsburg State University 

M.S., The Pennsylvania State University 

David Fisher (1984) 

Physics 

B.S., The Pennsylvania University 

M.S., Ph.D., University of Delaware 

Ruth Ann Fulton (1989) 

Nursing 

B.S2^.,Bloomsburg University 

M.S., Pennsylvania State University 



Amy Golahny (1985) 

Art 

BA., Brandeis University 

M.A., Williams College - Clark Art Institute 

M. Phil., and Ph.D., Columbia University 

Bahrain Golshan (1989) 

Mathematical Science 

B.S., Jundi Shapour University, Iran 

M.S., Kent State University 

Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University 

G. W. Hawkes (1989) 

English 

B.A., University of Washington-Seattle 

M.A., PhD., SUNY-Binghamton 

Thomas J. Henninger (1966) 

Director of Computer Services; Mathematics 
B.S., Wake Forest College 
M.A., University of Kansas 

Owen F. Herring (1965) 

Philosophy 

B.A., Wake Forest College 

Rachael Hungerford (1989) 

Education 

A.A., Cayuga County Community College 

B.S., State University of New York 

at Plattsburgh 

Ph.D., University of MassachusettslAmherst 

Janet Hurlbert (1985) 
Instructional Services Librarian 
B.A., M.A., University of Denver 

Mary Lou Kasputis 

Nursing 

B.S.,Villa Maria College 

M.S., Case Western Reserve University 

Mehrdad Madresehee (1986) 

Economics 

B.S., University of Tehran 

M.S., National University of Iran 

M.S., University of Idaho 

Ph.D., Washington State University 



Chriss McDonald (1987) 

Chemistry 

B.S., Manchester College 

Ph.D., Miami University of Ohio 

Carole Moses (1982) 

English 

B.A., Adelphi University 

M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 

Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton 

Bradley Nason (1983) 

Mass Communication 
A.B., Lycoming College 
M.A., The American University 

Michael R. Smith (1989) 

Mass Communication 
B.A., University of Maryland 
M.S., Shippensburg University 

Arthur Sterngold (1988) 
Business Administration 
B.A., Princeton University 
M.B A., Northwestern University 

Larry R. Strauser (1973) 

Sociology 

A.B., Lycoming College 

M.PA., University of Arizona 

Robert E. Van Voorst (1989) 

Religion 

B.A., Hope College 

M.Div., Western Theological Seminary 

S.T.M., Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary 

Richard Weida (1987) 

Mathematics 

B.S., Muhlenberg College 

M.S., Ph.D., University of Delaware 

Budd F. Whitehill (1957) 

Physical Education 

B.S., Lock Haven University 

M.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 



Richard E. Wienecke (1982) 

Accounting 

A.B., Lycoming College 

M.S.,Bucknell University 

M.BA., Long Island University 

C.PA. (Pennsylvania and New York) 

Fredric M. Wild, Jr. (1978) 

Mass Communication 

B.A., Emory University 

M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University 

M.Div., Yale Divinity School 

David H. Wolfe (1989) 

Physics 

B.S., Lock Haven State College 
M.S., Pennsylvania State University 
Ph.D., Kent State University 

Troy A. Wolfskin (1989) 

Chemistry 

B.S., Albright College 

Ph.D., University of Virginia 

Peiyuan Yan (1989) 

Mathematical Science 

B.S., E. China Inst, of Tech. 

M.S., Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University 

Instructors 

Margaret Gray-Vickrey (1986) 

Nursing 

B.S.N., SUNY at Pittsburgh 

M.S., Northern Illinois University 

Edward Henninger (1988) 

Business Administration 
B.S., Shippensburg University 
M.BA., Shippensburg University 

Deborah J. Holmes (1976) 

Physical Education 

B.S., M.S.. The Pennsylvania State University 



Diane C. Janda (1988) 

Music 

B.M., University of Texas at Austin 
M.M., University of Cincinnati, College-Con- 
servatory of Music 

Nancy Jo Roberts (1989) 

Business Administration 

B.S., Northwestern State University 

M.BA., Louisiana State University 

Lecturers & Special 
Appointments 

Ronda L. Bird, R.D. (1986) 

B.A., Indiana University 

Don M. Larrabee II (1972) 
Lecturer in Law 

A.B., Franklin and Marshall College 
LL.B., Fordham University 

Gerald M. McKeegan 

Nursing 

B.S., Philadelphia College of 

Pharmacy and Science 

Part Time Faculty 

Joan Moyer Clark (1987) 
Music and Theatre 

Roger Davis (1984) 

Mathematics 

B.S.Ed., Clarion State College; 

M.S.Ed., Bucknell University 

Sherril D. Ingram (1991) 

Nursing 

B.SM., University of Pittsburgh; 

M.S.N., University of Virginia 

James Logue (1976) 

English 

A.B., M.S., Bucknell University 



Linda Potter (1990) 

Nursing 

B.S.N., Lycoming College 

Thomas M. Shivetts (1986) 

Education 

B.S., Lycoming College; 

M.S. Ed., Bucknell University 

Gary Steele (1988) 

Music 

B.M., Juilliard School; 

M.M., Eastman School of Music 

Steve Uzupis (1989) 

Accounting 

B.S., Pennsylvania State University; 
M.S., University of Houston; 
C.P.A., Texas 

Elliott Weiss (1989) 

Accounting 

B.A., City College of New York; 

JD, University of Syracuse; 

Masters in Taxation, New York University 

Applied Music Teachers 

Diana L. Bailey (1986) 

Saxophone 

B.S., Susquehanna University 

Jean Grube (1990) 

Voice 

B.M., Susquehanna University 

Richard J. Lakey (1979) 

Organ and Piano 

A.B., Westminster Choir College; 

M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania 

Robert Leidhecker (1989) 

Percussion 

B.M., Mansfield University 



Albert Nacinovich (1972) 

Brass 

B.A., in Music Education, Mansfield 

University; 

M.S., in Music Education, Ithaca College 

Mary Russell (1936) 

Music 

B.S., Susquehanna University 

Conservatory of Music; 

M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 

Marcus Smolensky (1990) 

Viola 

B.M., Eastman School of Music; 

M.M., Cleveland Institute of Music 

D. Charles Truitt (1990) 

Guitar 

B.M., Hartt School of Music; 

M.A., Mary wood College 

Judith A. White 

Voice 

B. Mus., Susquehanna University 

Edwin E. Zdzinski (1987) 

Violin 

B.S.,SUNYatFredonia 

M.A., Ed.D., Columbia University 

Teachers College 



Adjunct Faculty & Staff 

Galal Amed, M.D. 

Medical Director, School of 
Medical Technology 
Divine Providence Hospital 
Williamsport,PA 17701 

Vivian Anagnoste, M.D. 

Medical Director, Clinical Laboratory 
Science Program 
Rolling Hill Hospital 
ElkinsParKPA 19117 




Brook Barrie (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical 

Institute of Sculpture 

Paul J. Cherney, M.D. 

Medical Director, School of 
Medical Technology 
Abington Memorial Hospital 
Abington.PA 19001 

Gerald R. Fahs, M.D. 

Medical Director, School of 
Medical Technology 
The Lancaster General Hospital 
Lancaster, PA 17603 

Nadine Gladfelter, M.S., MT (ASCP) 

Program Director, School of 
Medical Technology 
The Lancaster General Hospital 
Lancaster, PA 17603 



Phyllis Gotkin, Ph.D., MT (ASCP) 

Program Director, Clinical Laboratory 
Science Program 
Rolling Hill Hospital 
Ellcins Park, PA 19117 

Barbara Kravitz, B.S., MT (ASCP) 

Education Coordinator, Clinical 
Laboratory Science Program 
Rolling Hill Hospital 
Elkins Park, PA 19117 

Jon Lash (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical 

Institute of Sculpture 

Loretta A. Moffatt, B.S., MT (ASCP) 

Program Director, School 
of Medical Technology 
Divine Providence Hospital 
Williamsport.PA 17701 

Andrzej Pitynski (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical 

Institute of Sculpture 

Barbara J. Scheelje, B.S., MT (ASCP) 

Program Director, School 
of Medical Technology 
Abington Memorial Hospital 
Abington, PA 19001 

Herk Van Tongeren (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical 

Institute of Sculpture 



Medical Staff 

Robert S. Yasui, M.D. 

College Surgeon 
M.D., Temple University 



Athletic Staff 



James Bodner 

Assistant Men's Basketball Coach 

Clarence Burch 

Head Men's Basketball Coach 

William Byham 

Sports Information 

Robert Curry 

Associate Athletic Director 

Rees Daneker 

Assistant Men's Basketball Coach 

Cheryl Dempsey 

Head Volleyball Coach 

Robert Eaton 

Head Soccer/Golf Coach 

Mike Fiamingo 

Assistant Wrestling Coach 

Frank Girardi, Jr. 

Assistant Football Coach 

Frank Girardi, Sr. 

Athletic Director, Head Football Coach 

Robert George 

Assistant Football Coach 

Gene Haupt 

Assistant Football Coach 

Suzanne Helfant 

Head Softball Coach/Assistant Women's 
Basketball Coach 

Brett Hoffman 

Athletic Trainer 



Deborah J. Holmes 

Chair, Physical Education Department/Head 
Women's Tennis Coach/Intramural 
Program Director 

Mike Hudock 

Assistant Men's Basketball Coach 

James Kramer 

Head Men'sAVomen's Swimming Coach 
Head Men's/Women's Cross Country Coach 

Joseph Lumbis 

Equipment Manager 

Terry Mantle 

Assistant Football Coach/Assistant 
Track Coach 

Joseph Mark 

Head Tennis Coach 

Dan Muthler 

Assistant Wrestling Coach 

James Orr 

Head Women's Basketball Coach 

Deb Phillips 

Secretary, Athletic Department 

Budd Whitehill 

Head Wrestling Coach 

Mike Weber 

Assistant Football Coach 

Steve Wiser 

Assistant Football Coach/Head 
Track and Field Coach 



iraW 



Administrative 
Assistants 



Trudy L. Beachem 

Gift Records Specialist 

Michael J. Beatty 

Security Officer 

Theresa M. Beatty 

Faculty Secretary, Science Department 

Nathalie R. Beck 

Executive Secretary to President & Vice 
President For Development 

Emily C. Biichle 

Coordinator of Facility 
Scheduling and Purchasing 

Karen N. Bloom 
Financial Aid Associate 

Lynette C. Bower 

Secretary, Business Manager 

Elizabeth L. Boyd 

Assistant to President 

Brigitte C. Brahms 

Telecommunications Coordinator 

Mary M. Camp 

Nursing Skills Lab Instructor 

Barbara J. Carlin 

Executive Secretary, Admissions 
& Financial Aid 

Deborah A. Caulkins 

Slide Curator and Gallery Coordinator 

Diana L. Cleveland 

Coordinator of Academic 
Services for Mathematical Sciences 



Richard L. Cowher 

Printing Services Coordinator 

Elizabeth G. Cowles 

Secretary, Career Development 

June V. Creveling 

Secretary, Building and 
Grounds & Safety & Security 

Mary E. Dahlgren 

Assistant for Admissions/Computer 
Applications 

Richard C. Dingle 

Sub Desk Aide 

Julia E. Dougherty 

Library Technician, Circulation 

Katherine A. Dougherty 

Communications Officer 

David F. Downing 

Theatre Technician 

Patricia R. Eagleson 

Communications Officer 

Gladys M. Engel 

Secretary, Theatre Department 

June L. Evans 

Faculty Secretary, Nursing Department 

Robert W. Faus 

Mailroom Assistant & 
Assistant Press Operator 

Paula M. Fisher 

Admissions Data Entry Clerk/Receptionist 



S. Jean Gair 

Faculty Secretary, Music & Art Departments 

John E. Gohrig 

Mailroom Coordinator 

Diane J. Hassinger 

Executive Secretary to Dean of the College 

Bernadine G. Hileman 

Printing Services Assistant 

Carol E. Hill 

Faculty Secretary 

Robert L. Hill 

Library Evening Proctor 

Barbara E. Horn 

Faculty Secretary, Education Department 

W. Latricia James 

Faculty Secretary, Mass Communications 

Diane M. Keeler 

Accounting Clerk 

David M. Kelchner 

Records and Data Manager 

Paula D. Klein 

Microcomputer Lab Monitor 

Gladys W. Knauss 

Sub Desk Aide 

Richard D. Lane 

Library Evening Proctor 

Gale D. Laubacher 

Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Donna M. Laughrey 

Campus Store Assistant 

Peggie A. LeFever 

Personnel Coordinator 

Shirley D. Lloyd 

Campus Store Assistant/Clerk 

Carol A. Long 

Assistant, Alumni & Parent Relations 



John J. Maness 

Security Officer 

Dorothy E. Maples 

Box Office Manager 

D. Maxine McCormick 

Recorder 

Nielin L. Meredith 

Assistant Data Coordinator 

Stephen F. Mileto 

Security Officer 

Rebecca R. Miller 

Secretary, Financial Aid 

Yvonne L. Miller 

Computer Programmer/Operator 

Roberta M. Mitteer 

Sub Desk Aide 

Marilyn MuUings 

Faculty Secretary 

Carol T. Murray 

Coordinator of Academic Computer Services 

Marlene L. Neece 
Library Technician, AV/ILL 

Judith E. Noble 

Library Technician, Acquisitions 

Jeffrey A. Norton 

Security Officer 

Marion R. Nyman 

Bursar/Executive Secretary to the Treasurer 

Martha W. O'Brien 

Assistant to the Registrar 

Carl H. Pederson 

Security Officer 

Rosalie S. Pfaff 

Switchboard Operator 



Deborah E. Phillips 

Secretary to Director of Athletics 



A 



Madeline A. Pinkerton 

Secretary, Athletics Department 

Melissa S. Pinkerton 

Assistant, Freshman Dean & Annual Support 

David W. Poeth 

Speical Assistant to Superintendent 
of Buildings & Grounds 

Pearl Ringler 

Campus Store Assistant 

Elizabeth L. Ruesskamp 

Sub Desk Aide 

Sherry L. Schaefer 

Secretary for Residence Life 

Fern L. Schon 

Payroll Clerk & Student Loan Coordinator 

Anna L. Seidel 

Alumni Records Clerk 

Richard D. Sheddy 

Communications Officer 

Penny S. Siddle 

Microcomputer Lab Monitor 

Patricia L. Strauss-CundifT 

Systems Analyst 

Sheran L. Sank 

Faculty Secretary 

Diane M. Thomas 

Computer Programmer 

Alan N. Thompson 

Security Officer 

Carole A. Thompson 

Faculty Secretary 

Patricia J. Triaca 

Library Technician, Cataloging 

Deborah E. Weaver 

Manager, Residence Halls Operations 




Donna A. Weaver 

Assistant, Student Activities 

Geraldine H. Wescott 

Library Technician, Periodicals 

Joetta D. Witiak 

Nursing Skills Lab Instructor 

Patricia S. Wittig 

Secretary, Campus Ministries 

Melissa C. Wolf 

Library Technician, ILL 

Pamela E. Wolfskin 

Secretary 

Jean C. Wool 

Executive Secretary to 
Dean of Student Services 

Richard J. Wright 

Mailroom Assistant 

Scott A. Wright 

Security Officer 

Cheryl A. Yearick 

Library Technician, Govt. Pub/ILL 



Gregory A. Young 

Security Officer 



^^ 



1991 -92 Alumni 
Association 
Executive Board 



1 he Alumni Association of Lycoming 
College has a membership of nearly 12,000 
men and women. It is governed by an 
executive board consisting of 24 members-at- 
large, elected through mail ballot by the 
membership of th association. The board 
also has members representing specific 
geographic areas, the senior class president, 
the student body president, and past 
presidents of the last graduating class the 
Student Association of Lycoming College. 
The association annually designates one 
alumni representative as a nominee for a 
three-year term on the College Board of 
Trustees. The Director of Alumni and Parent 
Relations directs the activities of the alumni 
office. The Alumni Association has the 
following purpose as stated in it constitution: 
"As an off -campus constituency, the associa- 
tion's purpose is to seek ways of maintaining 
an active and mutually beneficial relationship 
between the College and its alumni, utilizing 
their talents, resources and counsel to further 
the objectives and programs of Lycoming 
College." 

All former students of Williamsport 
Dickinson Seminary and all former students 
who have successfully completed one year of 
Study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior 
College or Lycoming College are considered 
members of the association. 

Acting as the representative of alumni on 
the campus and working also with under- 
graduates, the alumni office is responsible for 
keeping alumni informed and interested in 



the programs, growth, and activities of the 
College through regular publications mailed 
to all alumni on record. Arrangements for 
Homecoming, class reunions, club meetings, 
and similar activities are coordinated through 
this office. Through the Lycoming College 
Annual Fund, the alumni office is closely 
associated with the development program of 
the College. Communications to the alumni 
association should be addressed to the Office 
of Alumni and Parent Relations. 




1990-91 ALUMNI 
ASSOCIATION 
EXECUTIVE BOARD 

Term Expires October 1991 

Cynthia Pennington Clippinger (Mrs.) '66 

Mark A. GaNung '85 

Mark A. Gibbon '83 

John G. HoUenback '47 

Eleanor Layton Loomis (Mrs.) '60 

Carole-Kay Miller Lundy '63 

Otto L. Sonder, Jr. (Dr.) '46 

Jean R. Alpert Staiman (Mrs.) '47 

Term Expires October 1992 

Brenda P. Alston-Mills '67 
Melvin H. Campbell, Jr. '70 
Elizabeth (Betty) J. Paris (Mrs.) '70 
Barbara N. Price (Dr.) '60 
C. Edward Receski '60 
Larry A. Robbins '81 
Barbara L. Sylk '73 
Ned W. Weller (Rev.) '54 

Term Expires October 1993 

Patricia S. Courtwright (Mrs.) '74 
David T. Franklin '74 
Ronald A. Frick '83 
William S. Kieser '65 



Everett W. Rubendall '70 
Richard A. Russell '37 
Ann L. Shields (Ms.) '87 
Robin N. Straka (Mrs.) '79 

Members of the Board 
Serving a One- Year Term 

Student Association of 
Lycoming College (SALC), 
President - Eric A. Reff 

SALC Past President - 

Joanne C. Marchesano 

'91 Senior Class President - 

Diane E. DeNisco 

'90 Senior Class President - 

Lonna K. Zook 

Area Alumni 
Representatives 

Kent T. Baldwin '64 - Greater Williamsport 

Patrick J. Cerillo '77 - Northern New Jersey 

Amy Gehron Chambers '70 - Pittsburgh 

Ann Weitzel Fuhrman (Mrs.) '79 - 
Southcentral Pennsylvania 

Barry C. Hamilton '70 ■ 

Greater Philadelphia 

Robert & Marjorie Ferrell Jones '48 
and '50 - Greater Rochester Area 

Charles J. Kocian '50 - Washington, DC 

James G. Scott '70 - New England 



Mi. 



Index 



Academic Advisement 14 

Academic Calendar 2 

Academic Honesty/Standing 19 

Academic Honors 20 

Academic Program 7 

Accounting Curriculum 37 

Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) 40 

Admission to Lycoming 140 

Advanced Placement 20 

Advanced Standing by Transfer 140 

Advisory Committees 14 

Health Professions 14 

Legal Professions 15 

Medical Technology 14 

Theological Professions 15 

Allopathic Medicine, Advisement for 14 

American Studies (EIM) 40 

Anthropology Curriculum 127 

Application Fee and Deposits 144 

Applied Music Requirements 105 

Art Curriculum 41 

Astronomy and Physics Curriculum 48 

Athletics Training 1 16 

Athletic Staff 169 

Audit 25 

Awards 20 

BFA Degree 8 

Biology Curriculum 54 

Board of Trustees 157 

BSN Degree 8 

Business Administration Curriculum 59 

Campus Facilities 154 

Capitol Semester 32 

Career Development Services 137 

Chemistry Curriculum 63 

Christian Ministry, Advisement for 15 

Class Attendance 18 

College and the Church 6 

College Level Examination 

Program (CLEP) 20 

Computer Science Curriculum 95 

Conduct, Standards of 139 



Contingency Deposits 145 

Cooperative Programs 29 

Engineering 29 

Environmental Studies 29 

Forestry 29 

Medical Technology 30 

Military Science 31 

Optometry 30 

Podiatric Medicine 31 

Sculpture 32 

Counseling, Personal 137 

Course Credit by Examination 20 

Criminal Justice (EIM) 66 

Degree Programs/Requirements 7 

Departmental Honors 25 

Deposits/Deposit Refunds 145 

Distribution Requirements 9 

English 10 

Fine Arts 10 

Foreign Language 10 

History and Social Science 11 

Mathematics 10 

Natural Science 10 

Philosophy 10 

Religion 10 

Economics Curriculum 67 

Education Curriculum 70 

Education Financing Plans 145 

Educational Opportunity Grants 146 

Engineering, Cooperative Program 29 

English Curriculum 70 

English Requirement 10 

Entrance Examination (CEEB) 20 

Environmental Studies 29 

Established Interdisciplinary Major (EIM). 12 

Federal Grants and Loans 151-152 

Fees 144 

Financial Aid/Assistance 145 

Fine Arts Requirements 10 

Foreign Language Requirement 10 

Foreign Languages and 

Literatures Curriculum 79 



^B^ 



Forestry, Cooperative Program 29 

French Curriculum 80 

German Curriculum 81 

Grading System 16 

Graduation Requirements 7 

Greek Curriculum 83 

Health Professions Careers 14 

Health Services 138 

Hebrew Curriculum 83 

History Curriculum 85 

History Requirements 11 

Honor Societies 20 

Independent Study 26 

Interdisciplinary Majors 12 

Established Majors (EIM) 12 

Individual Majors (IIM) 12 

International Studies 89 

Internship Programs 27 

Johnson Atelier 43 

Legal Professions, Advisement for 15 

Literature (EIM) 91 

Loans 152 

London Semester 32 

Major 11 

Admission to 11 

Departmental 12 

Interdisciplinary (EIM, IIM) 12 

Mass Communications (EIM) 91 

Mathematical Sciences 95 

Mathematical Requirements 10 

May Term 27 

Medical School, Advisement for 14 

Medical History 139 

Medical Technology 30 

Military Science 101 

Minor 12 

Music Curriculum 102 

National Direct Student Loans (NDSL). . 152 

Natural Science Requirement 10 

Near East Culture and 

Archaeology (EIM) 106 

Nursing 107 

Optometry 30 

Optometry School, Advisement for 14 

Osteopathy School, Advisement for 14 

Part-time Student Opportunities 28 

Payment of Fees 145 



Philadelphia Semester 31 

Philosophy Curriculum 1 12 

Philosophy Requirement 10 

Physical Education Curriculum 116 

Physics Curriculum 48 

Placement Services 137 

Podiatric Medicine, 

Cooperative Program 31 

Political Science Curriculum 117 

Psychology Curriculum 120 

Refunds 145 

Registration 15 

Religion Curriculum 123 

Religion Requirement 10 

Repeated Courses 17 

Reserve Officer Training 

Corps Program (ROTC) 31 

Residence and Residence Halls 138 

Scholarships/Grants 146 

Scholarships (ROTC) 153 

Scholar Program 33 

Sculpture 43 

Social Science Requirement 11 

Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum 127 

Spanish Curriculum 83 

Special Features 25 

Independent Study 26 

Internship Program 27 

May Term 27 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 28 

State Grants and Loans 151 

Student Enrichment Semester (SES) 32 

Student Records 18 

Study Abroad 28 

Supplemental Educational 

Opportunity Grant (SEOG) 151 

Theatre Curriculum 132 

Theological Professions, Advisement 15 

Unit Course System 16 

United Nations Semester 32 

Veterinary School, Advisement for 14 

Washington Semester 32 

Withdrawal from College 143 

Women's Studies 136 

Work-Study Grants 153 

Writing Across The Curriculum Program. . . 9 



i^ 



Communicating With 
Lycoming College 



Please address specific 
inquires as follows: 

Director of Admissions: 

Admissions; requests for publications 

Treasurer: 

Payment of bills; expenses 

Director of Financial Aid: 

Scholarships and loan fund; 
financial assistance 

Dean of College: 

Academic programs; faculty; 
faculty activities 

Assistant Dean for Freshmen: 

Freshman Seminar; freshman 
academic concems 

Dean of Student Services: 

Some activities; residence halls; 
religious life; health services; 
academic support services 

Registrar: 

Student records; transcript requests; 
academic policies 

Career Development Center: 

Career counseling; employment 
opportunities 

Executive Director for College 
Advancement: 

Institutional relations; aimual fund; 
gift programs 



Director of Alumni and 
Parent Relations: 

Alumni information; parent support 

Director of Public and 
Media Relations: 

Public information; publications; 
sports information; media relations 

All correspondence 
should be addressed to: 

Lycoming College 
Williamsport, PA 17701 

The College telephone number 
is (717) 321-4000 



Visitors 

Lycoming welcomes visitors to the 
campus. If you would like a guided tour, 
call the Office of Admissions 
(717) 321-4126 before your visit to 
arrange a mutually convenient time. 

Toll Free Number 1-800-345-3920 

Lycoming College welcomes applications 
from prospective students regardless of age, 
sex. race, religion, handicap, finances, 
national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming 
does not discriminate on the basis of age, sex, 
race, religion, handicap, finances, national 
or ethnic origin, or color in the administra- 
tion of any of its policies and programs. 



r 



^^cx 






• ^ 



>H CD tS 






^ 


^ 




G 

C/3 


Z 




5' 
3 

V3 


^ 







> 


Tl 


"1 



2: 


00 

00 


■0 



NM 




C/3 


^ 


p. 


a 






c;3 




>